Actions

Work Header

Turning a Blind Eye

Summary:

Zuko - or rather Lee - became a scribe in the Beifong's estate. It's a fresh start, with a solid cover story, no disgrace, and failure attached to his name. Yet, he still tries to find a way to make things right, to regain all that he's lost. He hasn't given up on being himself.

His plans get interrupted by a blind girl, definitely too enthusiastic about illegal fighting rings.

or

Zuko being a scribe, slow-burn bond with the greatest earthbender, and whooops! No one called the Gaang but they finally arrived (Zuko is not pleased).

Notes:

"Rock Bottom" summary at the end!

Not native speaker, so feel free to point out more obvious mistakes! (sometimes the word choices get funny, wait for it and have a good laugh)

(See the end of the work for other works inspired by this one.)

Chapter 1

Notes:

HELLLLO!!!!

Damn Zuko break is going just as great as mine... I really struggled to put this all together (I hate beginnings with passion) It's slow but we are going to speed things up with time. (I still love cliffhangers).

I was expressing my struggles on tumblr 😅 https://renegadeoftheworld.tumblr.com/

** beta by Cora :)

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

Zuko sat close enough to the group of merchants to avoid any accusations stating that he felt too important to sit with them, but far enough to have some peace. He was looking into the fire, focusing on not bending it, he’d already slipped a few times and the fire had matched his breaths but gladly no one noticed.

Why would they?

He was just an orphaned scribe, a refugee from the war territory in the west Earth Kingdom.

The group of merchants debated something for over an hour; at first, Zuko tried to follow their conversation but realized quickly how pointless it was. Now, he was slowly starting to panic. After the symptoms of starvation had disappeared, he has never felt hungry in Mr. Xaalo’s household. So, when his stomach made the first quiet noise it brought some nasty memories back.

Theoretically, he knew that neither of the merchants had eaten yet and that they didn’t have a reason to refuse him his portion of food. Mr. Xaalo had paid for his fare, completely ignoring Zuko’s protests that he could’ve done it himself.

When the bald merchant – Cha – put six bowls on the ground and started filling them with stew, Zuko felt relief. Everyone walked to the temporary cook to take their portion, so Zuko quickly climbed to his feet and waited at the end of the queue. Cha looked a little surprised when he saw him, for a second anxiety returned with full force, then the man handed a bowl to Zuko.

“Thank you, Sir,” Zuko said, bowing in the Earth Kingdom’s style.

The man tilted his head, frowning at Zuko and after a few dreadful seconds of silence, he said, “Um, yeah… you’re welcome.”

As fast as he could, without making it look weird, Zuko returned to his previous spot near the fire. He felt weird looks from the merchants. Was he eating too fast? He tried to disguise his hunger but apparently, it hadn’t worked. He shouldn’t even be this hungry, there was a possibility that his mind exaggerated the feeling. Nonetheless, Zuko finished his portion first.

 


 

On the second day of the trip, Zuko felt bad for not helping with setting up camp. Maybe that was the reason he has been getting those weird looks. So, when they stopped for the second night, Zuko took the tent he had slept in the previous night and started unfolding it. He’d never used a similar one, but it couldn’t be too difficult.

He was struggling a bit with lines and bolts, but after a few attempts, he finally figured them out. His bad leg didn’t like the squats he has been doing, after a whole day of riding an ostrich horse it throbbed with objections. Zuko massaged his tensed muscle, thinking of what to do next with the tent.

Someone walked up to him from behind a carriage. “Oh, Spirits! Here you are,” the woman – Tena – released a relieved sigh. She looked at Zuko's tent. “You don’t have to fight with it, kid. We will take care of it after finishing with the carriages. Just like yesterday.”

She was looking at him with a smile that didn’t look hostile. Zuko felt a little embarrassed when he glanced at his construction. He didn’t like to be helpless. “It’s fine… I, um… I'm almost done.”

She looked skeptically at his staff laying on the ground next to the tent. “Aren’t you injured?”

“It’s nothing,” Zuko shrugged. He wasn’t sure how to balance being self-sufficient, and respectful. “You don’t have to do it for me, Ma’am.”

The weird smile of the woman changed into a soft grin. “At least let me show you a faster way to set it up, okay?”

Zuko blushed, looked at his poorly looking construction, and nodded.

 


 

After the scribe proposed to do chores around the camp, no one had any idea how on earth this boy – this boy – had some kind of relationship with Xaalo. Was he immune to Xaalo’s influence or did the old man have a soft spot somewhere?

They expected an insolent little shit, but they got a silent, polite, maybe even a bit scared lad.

Damn… now, they all felt bad for giving the boy a cold shoulder for half of their journey. Still, two days left to change that.

 


 

The weird looks stopped but the merchants actually started trying to have conversations with him, which was way worse. Two of them surrounded him during the ride and started asking about some irrelevant things. Luckily, when they got tired of Zuko’s stuttering and one-word-answers, they began exchanging stories about stupid things they had done as teenagers.

“How about you?” the taller man asked, bumping Zuko with his fist. Coming from his good side, Zuko spotted the movement beforehand, a familiar gesture to him after spending an afternoon with the chatty guard. “Anything interesting in your scribey life? I doubt you have something better than Ju Jing’s barn invasion tho,” he said while laughing.

To be honest, the barn invasion didn’t sound thrilling at all, but both men almost fell off their animals during the story. Zuko wondered what would happen if he told them about his time in the Pohuai Stronghold.

The corner of his lips twitched slightly as he shook his head. “Nothing interesting.”

They both glanced at the left side of his face for a moment too long, but then continued the conversation with another story without asking about the scar.

 


 

“Do you want seconds, Lee?” the group’s cook asked when Zuko was chewing his last bite of the dinner. It was the last night he was supposed to spend with the merchants. Zuko wasn’t sure if he was relieved that nothing bad had happened or terrified of meeting his new employers. “We will resupply tomorrow anyway.”

Zuko was trying to stop the instincts he had acquired. He’d noticed that he felt calmer when he knew there was food nearby, even when he wasn’t hungry. He had an irrational fear that they would deny him another meal. He was perfectly aware of it being paranoiac – he could hear Mr. Xaalo’s witty remark in the back of his mind – but he couldn’t help it.

He really hoped it would pass with time. He was fucked-up enough, no need to add more to the list.

“Come on…” the cook said, handing the bowl in Zuko’s direction. “It will get cold.”

Zuko might’ve developed newfound anxiety triggered by lack of food, but he wouldn’t overeat. That would do more harm than good, and he knew it wouldn’t make much sense. He glanced at the full bowl of noodles, maybe he would eat two, three at best, just for its taste.

“I’m already almost full,” he said in the politest way he could. He hadn’t upset them yet and he wanted to keep it this way. “Thank you, Sir.”

“Almost,” she repeated, giving him a weird smile. “Fill your ‘almost’ with the food and I’m gonna take care of the rest.”

Zuko reluctantly took the bowl, deciding that fussing would make them angry. Besides, the noodles were good. Not like Mr. Xaalo’s but still good.

“You will get fat Tena,” the cook sneered.

The woman stole one noddle from the bowl Zuko was holding and dramatically put it into her mouth. “Do I look like I care? Also, fuck of and mind your own chunky ass.”

Zuko carefully observed the weird argument. When looking at each other they didn’t seem angry and – which was more confusing – they were both skinny. Zuko jumped a little when the merchant on his right released a loud sigh.

“All of you are a bunch of fools,” he grinned, massaging his actually stout stomach. Zuko stopped looking when the man looked a little too similar to Uncle for a second. “More to love is better.”

Everyone chuckled and Zuko smiled sadly – he could imagine uncle saying the exact same thing.

 


 

The merchants took the road that allowed them to drop off Zuko just in front of Beifong’s gates. He took his few belongings off the ostrich horse’s back, looking at the intimidating estate in front of him. Was this really a good idea? He had nowhere to go, and Mr. Xaalo vouched for him, he couldn’t break his trust and flee.

“Are you stressed?”

Zuko glanced at the merchant. “Yeah,” he muttered in response.

“Don’t worry, kid! You’ve charmed Xaalo the bastard, you will easily deal with the Beifongs.”

Zuko scowled at ‘charmed’… he had no idea what had happened but in fact, he and the noble really did create a weird bond. But there was no ‘charming’ involved, Zuko was not charming. But it hadn’t been pity either… Seriously, Zuko had no idea what had happened, any explanation he could think of wasn’t believable.

“Remember to write to Xaalo,” the woman said. “Or otherwise, he will strangle us… I hope the trip wasn’t too bad?”

“I will. The trip was really nice. Thank you.”

The merchants were ready to depart and after a short and awkward goodbye, Zuko was left alone in front of the estate. The whole area was surrounded by a huge wall so he couldn’t see much. He braced himself and knocked through a golden mechanism with a golden-winged boar on it. He heard some shuffling on the other side of the door and then two guards stood in front of him.

He had been thinking about what to say but suddenly when he realized he was standing in front of two earthbenders his mind went blank. Thankfully, one of the men spoke first.

“Are you the scribe?” he asked, analyzing Zuko carefully. He gripped his staff tighter and nodded. “Come with us. Mr. Beifong is expecting your arrival.”

The feeling of being flanked by earthbenders was familiar – Zuko hadn’t missed it. They led him through an impressive garden with ponds, small bridges, and various flowers. Zuko couldn’t take a closer look though, he was too busy trying to gather his thoughts in order to not to make a complete fool of himself. A group of servants gathered nearby, giving Zuko curious glances. He could hear his heart pumping his blood, which wasn’t a good sign. It was normal that the guards accompanied a newcomer, neither of the men wasn’t giving him any special attention beyond their duties.

 Just a scribe…

…until he finds a solution.

There were few impressive buildings, the guards led him to the one connected with the main house. The architecture was different from the palace’s but Zuko thought the main idea of separate buildings or wings was similar. The biggest building was a family house, the one hidden in the background was probably meant for staff, so the one he just entered was most likely for business purposes.

Zuko was right, after walking through a long corridor and being announced he stood in front of a huge desk in a nicely decorated room with various flowers. Mr. Beifong looked like a classic noble – fancy clothes, straight back, and the look of a person who knew they were better than you, but there was something gentle in his appearance, so he didn't remind him of Farther. He half-glanced at Zuko, focusing on the papers in front of him.

“I assume you are Lee,” he said.

In the corner of the room, a man with small glasses placed on the very edge of his nose was giving Zuko a withering look. He was holding some scrolls under one arm and a clipboard in the other.

Zuko bowed quickly. “Yes, Mr. Beifong. It's a pleasure to meet you,” he said, a line that he’d practiced earlier in his head.

Just make a good impression and then you won’t have to see the swell again.

“Xaalo’s discovery…” the man continued. The way he pronounced Mr. Xaalo’s name was saying a lot about the nobleman’s relationship, he glanced at the other man, who was probably an assistant of some sort.

Dandy and I have some disputes, but we respect each other's business enough that it shouldn’t concern you.

“For such a young age your skills are quite impressive.”

“Thank you, Sir,” Zuko bowed, this time, only with his head. He kept an eye on the figure in the corner, who was making Zuko uneasy since he hadn't stopped piercing him with his small eyes.

“My condolences… That’s a lot to live through for such a young age – ”

Your tragic backstory is quite impressive so we will dull it a bit… Enough to raise sympathy and deter further questions, but we don’t want to give Beifong a heart attack.

“Well… there’s no need to stay in the past,” Mr. Beifong rubbed his hands and hid them in his sleeves. The other man stepped forward, scribbling something on his clipboard.

Spoiled fob will be uncomfortable even thinking about it, he will feel like your savior.

“Are you ready for a fresh start, young man?” Mr. Beifong asked politely.

Let him be the savior.

“Yes. Thank you for giving me the opportunity, Sir” Zuko answered humbly.

The man from the corner stopped two steps in front of Zuko, giving him the most judging look Zuko had ever seen. “At least he’s well-spoken… Less for me to correct,” he said under his breath. “Though we have to make him look like a scribe, not a gardener.” The man noted more things and turned to Mr. Beifong. “Anything else, Sir, before I take him?”

“I think that’s all. Thank you,” Mr. Beifong nodded to the man, then looked back at Zuko. “Welcome to the estate, Lee.”

Zuko’s answers were slowed down by stress, so before he managed to articulate anything the man with the clipboard already marched past him, Mr. Beifong wasn’t paying him any more attention.

“After me! We don’t have time.”

Zuko made a quick bow towards the noble, even though he wasn’t looking at him – he couldn’t mess this up.

The man with the clipboard shouldn’t be so fast. Zuko had to run a little to catch up, his bag and staff weren’t helping. He couldn’t even take a closer look at his new surroundings.

“The stick. It’s a cane?” the man asked with disgust in his voice.

“Yes, Sir. But – “

Zuko wanted to explain that he actually didn’t need it to move around anymore, but without looking at him the man growled, “You will get a regular one, I don’t want to see that thing anymore.”

Zuko wanted to explain that it wouldn’t be necessary, but the man was speaking again already.

“Before everything else, I have to take care of that appearance. It’s unacceptable.”

Zuko was glad the man was ignoring him. He wasn’t sure which part of his appearance needed fixing… Clothes? His scrawny figure that wasn’t yet back to normal? Looking too much like someone from the Fire Nation? Or maybe the scar covering half of his face? The list was long and not all things could be changed.

The man led him to a small room, an old woman sitting in the corner sewing something. She looked up at the clipboard wielder and frowned. “What do you want?”

“You, to give the boy a haircut.”

Zuko subconsciously scratched his scalp. His hair had grown since the last haircut. Since the North. Now, some strands were falling on his forehead, the part where his phoenix tail had been once slightly longer than the rest, but it wasn’t that visible. At least he’d thought so…

Zuko shivered at the memory of his last haircut.

He was so cold, and scared, and he couldn’t breathe because of a hand choking him.

“Any specific requirements?” the woman asked with a smile that looked fake.

“Not too short. Just do something so he won’t look shaggy, then he can grow it.” Zuko didn’t miss a subtle glance on his scar. “Fast, please.”

The lady rolled her eyes and put a stool in the middle of the room. “Sit here, boy,” she instructed.

It was just a room, not a cell.

He wasn’t bound and forced to obey with cold whips and violent punches.

His hair didn’t matter anymore… It was no longer symbolic; he was no longer Fire Nation.

Not until he figures out how to make things right.

Zuko endured the haircut. The lady was behind him, the clipboard man wasn’t paying him any attention, so no one had seen how measured his breaths were during the process. It wasn’t bad itself – the lady was quick and precise; she’d barely touched him. Zuko was glad she wasn’t turning his head to the sides, like the palace’s hairdresser used to when he was young.

“Acceptable,” the clipboard approved with a quick nod. “Let’s carry on.”

 


 

The home was boring – nothing new here.

Toph wandered through the gardens, she could feel the guards who were tracking her steps on her right, a group of servants gathered in the backyard, some stressed guy escorted by the guards to meet her father. She wouldn’t have tripped in those damned gardens even if she couldn’t see with earthbending. Someone could put iron shoes on her feet, and she would be perfectly aware of every stupid plant.

She was so sick of this constant boredom, to the point where she would be happy if an earthquake happened. Maybe she would be the one responsible for it…

The Earth Rumble Five saved her home from a boredom-earthquake caused by her bare hands and feet.

Five days and she would be a champion.

 

 

 

Notes:

My comment begging went AMAZING under the Rock Bottom's finale... Really guys I was answering them all in my work hours for two days. I don't mind doing it again.

Let's chat. I find it adorable that merchants adopted Zuko, such a polite young man. Everyone just assumes he's an asshole (true but deep inside) because he's buddies with Xaa <3. I Iwas so nostalgic in Xaa's "flashback lines" damnnnn my dear man. That's from me. now your turn to comment (pretty please I do hate beginnings)

Is there something that is unclear? More things will be clarified in time but I don't want to miss anything!

Also, TOPHHHHHH and her earthquake tendencies.

OH I FORGOT. The title - you know blind toph is quite obvious.... but the meaning of the idiom kinda shows Zuko's mindset 😶

summary: Rock Bottom: Zuko is barely alive but he runs into a family that provides him basic kindness and help, but then he dumps them and wanders the Earth Kingdom alone. He becomes a beggar and almost dies of starvation. His limp isn't doing great either. Then The Bastard Xaalo himself appears and they do some serious bonding and (3+) therapy sessions. Zuko became a coffee addict. Due to Zuko's restlessness and reasons Xaalo wasn't so obvious about Zuko is send to Beifongs.

 


It sounds like nothing but a serious development happened. I really encourage you to read (or re-read if there's a need) if you just find this story.

Chapter 2

Notes:

Guys! The Earth Rumble 5 is one Earth Rumble before the gang arrives (it happens at ER6)

For plot reasons I'm establishing that 5 and 6 happen in a span of two weeks.

beta by Cora :))

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

 

 

Only four days until she’d show everyone that she was the best, Toph thought while sneaking back home after her secret practice. Now, all she had to endure were Master Yu’s boring lessons.

She could do it – she would do anything to keep the Earth Rumble secret.

Sneaking back was easy, when she could feel the steps of everyone around, after checking out a few entrances, she decided that the route close to the staff’s building was the best. Sneaking under one window she overheard an argument of her favorite tailor and the dull father’s assistant.

Later that day she would have to sneak around again to check the grounds around the bending arena – she couldn’t risk any of her parent’s guards noticing her when she would be more concerned with planning her fights.

She wanted to kick Boulder’s ass first.

 


 

Absolutely do not firebend until you know every single routine of every single person in Beifong’s house. For bigger things use your paranoia and be sure no one, absolutely no one can see you. Am I clear, Flamethrower?

The small room had only one bed, desk, and a closet – it was all his. Zuko had mentally prepared himself for sharing a room with another servant because the Beifongs had a lot of staff, unlike Mr. Xaalo. Yet, the angry man with a clipboard – who hadn’t introduced himself – had shown him that single room.

“Um, it’s only mine, Sir?” Zuko had asked.

The man had looked at him annoyed. “If you want to be a mere servant, tell me about it,” he growled. “From what I know you are supposed to be a scribe.”

“I’m sorry, Sir,” Zuko had apologized, even though he wasn’t sure why he’d gotten scolded.

Now, he was sitting on his small bed, cross-legged, doing simple breathing exercises to brace himself for the day. He had learned his staff over the door, so he would stop meditation on time. He had been told that the scribes always met for a briefing before breakfast.

Zuko wasn’t thrilled, but put on the spare clothes from his bag and carefully unlocked the door. The hallway was quiet – too quiet. Zuko spotted two men leaving one of the rooms, heading to the place where the meeting was supposed to be. He walked after them, limping slightly, his leg usually felt a little off in the mornings. Zuko wanted to stop using the cane for good and it was high time to do it.

Clipboard sat behind a massive desk in a cluttered room with a row of chairs placed alongside the walls. He wore the same annoyed expression from yesterday. There were five other scribes in the room – two women and three men. All of them had at least one strand of grey hair, the oldest-looking woman had a massive bun of grey curls, matching her wrinkled face.

All of them were at least three times older than Zuko.

All of them turned to him when he entered the room. Some frowning in confusion, others scowling.

One man with sideburns smirked. “Servant boy, have some respect and wait until we are finished,” he scoffed.

Zuko could tell his body shrunk, the well-known feeling of being unwelcome washing over his shoulders. He glanced at the Clipboard, naively hoping he would say something, but the man was more concerned with papers on his desk.

Zuko cleared his clenched throat. “I’m a scribe.”

The man seized him from head to toe. “I don’t think so,” he said.

Zuko noticed how the scribe’s clothes differed from his own. Their robes were well fitted, with tapering cuffs that wouldn’t go in the way while writing. The fabric looked soft, a deep shade of green with bony white details around the collar and waist, a golden emblem placed on the front. Meanwhile, Zuko’s robes were fine but simple, nowhere close to the scribe’s elegance.

“I don’t know if you can see that,” the man emphasized looking at Zuko’s face with a playful smile. “But we are about to discuss important matters, so stop your foolish act.”

Zuko had already been greeted by a slur about his face. The first thing Mr. Xaalo had said to him was an insult, and later he’d said many more. Some of them had hurt, the others only annoyed him. Later, he’d learned that the noble rarely meant what he said, always waiting for a reaction, carefully observing what his words achieved. He had been ready to respond, anticipating the continuation of those small battles of his. Most of the time – if not in all of them – Zuko had lost, but his retort attempts had been heard and (maybe) appreciated.

Now, Zuko wasn’t famished, still desperate but not as much as he’d been in that florist shop. The venomous comment made his inner flame twist in his gut.

Maybe he reacted like this because the man with sideburns wasn’t looking at him anymore, not paying attention to the result of the words.

Zuko realized that he’s forgotten how it felt to be disdained.

“I am not – “

“Silence,” the man behind the desk growled. “Everyone sit down. We don’t have time for this.”

The scribes looked between Zuko and Clipboard. He limped to the chair as far away from the scribe as possible. Everything was buzzing as the Clipboard started talking about tasks for today. He told other scribes that Zuko was one of them, everyone nodded, slight surprise on their faces, but the man with sideburns frowned in annoyance.

“As you can see Lee is young, but his skills might be better than yours already. I have to check how fast he can write in the quality he presented in the letter I’ve seen,” Clipboard said.

Zuko blushed after the words of praise until the anxiety squeezed his chest. He didn’t know if he was, in fact, better than the rest of the scribes. He didn’t need to be better than them. He just wanted some time in peace, he just wanted to blend in, and now, they would see him as a threat.

When he looked up, he accidentally crossed his gaze with the old woman with a huge bun, she analyzed him for a moment and then smiled lightly. Zuko averted his head and looked at his feet for the rest of the meeting. It turned out the scribes currently worked on copying something, Zuko was supposed to join them in the communal office later.

For a moment, Zuko thought that Clipboard forgot about him, the man buried his nose in another pile of documents. He jumped when the man suddenly stood and stormed to the door. “After me!”

Zuko wasn’t sure where they were going but he obediently followed. The pace was fast but this time he managed to take a closer look at decorated corridors and expensive rugs. It wasn’t the palace’s level of splendor but still impressive for the Earth Kingdom, that was supposed to be ‘rudimentary among the poor and undeveloped among the wealthy’… Zuko had noticed early in his banishment that some of the information he had been taught wasn't accurate. Back then, he’d cared only about the Avatar.

Now, he tried to admire the pretty designs without falling into memories of the palace’s halls from his childhood.

“You need proper attire before you touch any of the papers.”

Clipboard stopped in the same room where the old woman had given him a haircut yesterday. Said woman, and a couple of others, sat in the corners working on colorful fabrics. She looked up when the man blocked her from good light. “What now?” she growled, daggers in her eyes.

“Scribe’s garb in the boy’s size.”

The woman looked at Zuko, the daggers in her eyes disappearing. “The hair suits you.”

“Um… thanks,” Zuko muttered surprised, a blush already climbing his cheeks.

“I don’t have time for this,” Clipboard growled.

The woman glared back at him. “Always so fast,” she mocked and disappeared behind the back door. Clipboard inhaled suddenly, looking really affronted by what she’d said. Zuko just tried to do something not awkward with his arms when the woman was gone.

She came back with a green robe in her arm.

“This is the last design but it’s the best I can do before I make a new one for him,” she said, putting nicely folded clothes on her desk. She took a measure from her pocket. “Come here.”

Zuko took a hesitant step towards her, his knee buckled slightly, at this point, it wasn’t even painful. She noticed it and was about to say something but Clipboard spoke first, “Also, a cane. He won’t move around with that ridiculous stick he had yesterday.”

“Huh… so you just let a boy with bad leg fatigue because you don’t like his walking stick?”

Zuko didn’t like the tension that was building around him. “Actually, I – “ Zuko was interrupted again.

“Bring the cane, take his measurements, and stop wasting my time,” the man admonished.

The woman raised Zuko’s arms with a quick motion, he had never liked fittings back in the palace but he knew he was supposed to keep his arms up. Then he remembered.

A proper fitting wasn’t done in clothes and Zuko couldn’t show them his back.

Do not practice shirtless or do any other dumb teenage shit... We cleared your backstory of any criminal record and your speech skills wouldn’t handle lying out of the mosaic on your back.

When Zuko was on a good way to panicking, already lowering his arms so the woman couldn’t touch him or his clothes, she glared at someone behind him. “To do it properly I should at least take the top off, but because of Mr. Fast over there we don’t have time.” She hid her face beside Zuko’s figure and smiled smugly. “Up!” she repositioned his arms again, Zuko let her. He hoped she wouldn’t feel the thundering of his heart. “Oh… someone’s stressed,” she teased.

Zuko endured the measurements and embarrassment, gladly, the woman didn’t make any further comments. Around the end of the process, one of the woman’s assistants brought a wooden cane and handed it to Clipboard.

“Done. Step by in two days and it should be ready.”

“Thank you, Ma’am.”

Clipboard pushed the cane and clothes to Zuko’s arms. “Change, go to the dining hall for a quick meal, and I want to see you in the office.”

Zuko didn’t have time to respond as the man disappeared in the corridors.

 


 

One of the bastards sat at their table in the dining hall.

Scribes always ate first when maids were doing morning cleaning. They always got everything fresh and warm when maids had to eat lukewarm leftovers – that happened only twice after bigger banquets when the cleaning took longer than usual, but that was not the point. The point was that scribes thought they were better than everyone else and couldn’t miss a single occasion to show it.

“Please tell me I’m hallucinating,” Moshi said through clenched teeth.

The twins on her right looked at each other, then all three of them glared at the figure sitting at their table.

“I think it’s a new one,” Ba said.

“Clearly younger than the rest,” Oke added.

The man’s hair was short and black, unlike the rest of hairy grey-heads. It only made everything worse – the old bastards sent a newbie to vex them. Moshi usually kept her mouth shut when old scribes made comments about her or her work, but she wouldn’t stop herself from punching the stripling in the face if he tried.

“I can’t believe the old bags of ink already corrupted the newbie,” Ba sighed.

Oke shrugged and crossed her arms. “Maybe they didn’t have to. Scribes are born assholes.”

All three of them nodded, even though, in fact, the only scribes they knew were the ones working for Beifongs. But that was not the point.

“Three against one, ladies,” Moshi said with a wicked smile on her lips. “We got this round.”

Moshi had waited for retribution ever since the woman with that awful cocoon on her head had told her that her work was irrelevant, just after she’d cleaned her dirty room of some ugly, sticky powder. The scribing witch had suggested for her to find a rich husband, but after a second, she changed her mind saying that Moshi wasn’t ‘pretty enough' to do it.

Gladly she was pretty enough to show the writing asshole where he should put his pens and parchments.

They walked up to the boy from the back, when they got closer he turned out to be around their age – he couldn’t be older than twenty-something. Not with that smooth face and rigid posture. Somehow the age similarity made Moshi angrier.

Moshi gestured to the twins to wait behind her when she stormed up to face the guy. She slammed her hands on the table in front of him. “What do you think you are doing, Scribe?” she snarled.

The first thing she noticed was, that the guy’s skin wasn’t as smooth as she thought… A huge scar covered half of his face. He jumped in his chair, looking at her with wide eyes… eye actually.

“I – I’m… eating?” he stuttered, glancing at the plate in front of him. He looked around and noticed Oke and Ba standing behind him.

Moshi put on a fake smile. “Oh… the scribe is eating,” she said as if she was talking to a child. “Since when can mighty scribes eat when mediocre folk,” She gestured at three of them, “is around.”

The boy put down his chopsticks. Moshi was ready for him to drop the scared act and say something venomous but the boy only nervously glanced around. “I – I don’t know what you mean,” he said without looking Moshi in the face.

Poor newbie wouldn’t expect that maids can bark back; old bastards must’ve missed that detail.

“I mean…” she said with a stern voice and straight face. “This is our table and our breakfast time.”

The guy looked at the table as if he expected to find a name tag. Moshi thought that when his shock passed, he would argue back… Say something about how a meaningless maid shouldn’t tell him what to do… Moshi had a couple of answers for that and she wished to use them all.

The boy stood up, glancing between all three of them, Moshi took a deep breath preparing to continue her revenge. But then the scribe said something that took her off guard.

“Sorry,” he mumbled, she barely understood the word. “I didn’t know… I… sorry.”

The boy backed away from the table, leaving his unfinished breakfast. Moshi was too shocked to do anything besides watching him escape from the dining hall. She shared a look with the twins that looked just as dumbfounded.

She felt a weird feeling in her chest that deepened when the boy turned around and walked back to the table, avoiding their eyes at all costs. He took a wooden cane leaning over the chair. “Sorry… I have to… not that I need, but they…” he stopped the quiet mumble. “Sorry.”

The boy almost ran out of the hall, supporting his steps with the cane.

Moshi's chest was squeezed with a feeling that wasn’t pleasant at all.

Oke broke the uncomfortable silence. “I think you just rebuked an innocent one.”

Moshi slumped onto the empty chair. “No shit…” she growled; the awful feeling settled in her chest for good. She buried her face in her palms. “Why do I feel so terrible?”

“I guess the cane made it worse,” Ba suggested.

Moshi growled into her palms; it was true – the cane made it way worse. She glanced at the boy’s unfinished breakfast and lost her own appetite.

Damned scribes.

 


 

Fortunately, the work assigned for the day was simple because Zuko was a ball of buzzing stress and anger. He only copied some documents and from time to time the old woman with a bun – Eva – checked his work and nodded approvingly.

Zuko tried to understand how he could've gotten himself new people who hated his guts by just eating. The angry lady had something that reminded him of Azula. The scribes weren’t fond of him either. They barely acknowledged his presence, except for the old woman but she probably had been told to keep an eye on him.

He missed the comfort of the noble’s house.

Because of his disgraceful escape from breakfast, he was hungry after barely two hours of writing. He wasn’t as panicked as during the trip but he didn’t like the feeling. He was so grateful when one of the scribes stood up from the desk and announced a dinner break.

Zuko felt like a coward for being relieved after the day ended without another encounter with those ladies. He was exhausted after a whole day of being on his toes but he had a letter to write before he could rest.

He sat at his small table and started writing the requested affirmation of his safe journey.

Zuko wasn't mentioning any details of his first day - no need to disappoint Mr. Xaalo.

 


 

Toph sat at the table with her parents trying not to smash anything.

“ – We think you should start some correspondence with that young gentleman, he is really – “

Her mother has been talking about some dude that Toph was supposed to talk to, for the last fifteen minutes. But Toph wasn’t sure what this was all about, she had more important issues to think about.

How could a stupid illegal earthbending tournament require a form?!

Why did she need a form to kick some butts?!

It was so stupid.

Theoretically, she could just arrive there, beat everyone, and go home… But she really wanted that belt. So, she needed a stupid form. For illegal competition. She wanted to rip the stupid piece of paper hidden in her dress.

“ – So, tomorrow after your lessons Master Yu will lead you to a scribe so you could add something. The rest of the letter is of course already written, so you don’t have to feel any pressure, sweetheart,” her mother said.

Huh…

“Yes, mum,” she answered like a perfect daughter.

An idea started forming in her head…

She had three days to make the plan work.

 

 

 

Notes:

The first day of Zuko as a scribe <3

As you can see I'm making a lot Xaalo's references because he totally gave Zuko's many lectures how to act. I hope you feel nostalgic just as I do.

Also, I hope the amount of side characters wasn't overwhelming. I want to make a "vibe" of the house and thinks that are happening here but tell me if it was too much. Though I really enjoy writing the small parts where Clipboard and tailor lady hates each other guts XDD

Mean Maids bullied poor Zuko. At least they feel bad for it... Zuko will gat a heart attack if they decide to apologize or some other crazy shit like that

I'm giving you Toph in small doses but as you can see she is already planning something 😈 I would gladly listen to your opinions on her because I cant really find her voice yet (seriously it was easier to write the maid than Toph)

As always bring some comments!! I would love to chat about anything!

Check the Tumblr and find more sketches, this time from rock bottom! (i don't do much there, a scroll or two and you should see the art and artist's profile!)
https://renegadeoftheworld.tumblr.com/

Any ideas about Toph's wicked plans??

Chapter 3

Notes:

beta by Cora :)

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

If Uncle was here, he would see a romantic subtext and encourage Zuko to do something about it, or even worse… He would do something about it.

If Mr. Xaalo was here, he would mock him about the fact that he couldn’t handle a simple social interaction without changing it into a disaster.

But only Zuko was here and he was trying his best to avoid the maids for as long as possible. He had to apologize for leaving a mess on the table and he wasn’t sure yet how to do it without making anything worse.

As if being a traitor, fugitive and impostor weren’t giving him enough stress.

“Honey, you shouldn’t be this lanky anymore,” the bun lady commented during the breakfast. Zuko decided to stay close to the scribes but now he started to regret it. “Your voice has already cracked. Hopefully, your adolescence won’t skip the physique aspects. It would be such an unfortunate outcome.”

There were a lot of things that Zuko shouldn’t be, yet he was.

His inner flame grew bigger as he tried to hide how the comment stabbed him. His appearance shouldn’t be the woman’s business. Zuko remembered how his bony body had looked the first day at Xaalo’s. He has lost muscle strength gained in years of training in the span of a few weeks. Calling him lanky now, after he put so much effort into getting better – and he could see that he had gotten better – was like a blow to the face.

Zuko took a calming breath. The woman – Eva – was the only one who acknowledged his presence but something about her has been creeping him out from the beginning. Then she started making weird comments and calling him Honey. Fortunately, the creepy nickname wasn’t pinned only to him, apparently, the woman called every person younger than her this way. So basically, everyone at the estate.

But Zuko had no other choice than to stay close to Eva. Other scribes ignored him. He wouldn’t want them to start small talks, but the barest acknowledgment of his existence would be nice when they were spending most of the day in the same room. He had a bad feeling that they talked about him when he wasn’t around. 

Being a subject of gossip wasn’t pleasant in general, but in his case, a word too much could be a death sentence.

Just another thing to stress about.

Zuko glanced at the woman on his right, she was toying with a big ring on her finger. Gladly, she didn’t expect him to answer. He wasn’t sure how long he could stop his temper if every breakfast was supposed to look this way.

He missed the comfort and calmness of breakfasts at Mr. Xaalo’s. And coffee. He missed coffee too.

The tailor lady entered the dining hall. Zuko spotted a few scribes frowning and then continuing their conversations. “Another one who doesn't know her place… It’s getting worse and worse,” Eva muttered disapprovingly under her breath.

The tailor wasn’t bothered by the whispers as she marched to their table. “Hello, Lee,” she greeted only Zuko, ignoring the rest of the scribes. “Your robes are almost done. Come with me and you won’t have to bother with those long cuffs anymore.”

Zuko stopped toying with his cuff, he wasn’t aware he was doing it. Without hesitation he decided to escape from the tension surrounding the table. The tailor chuckled seeing his hurry and casually put her hand on his back, leading him out. “I see you clearly enjoy the company of our esteemed scribes,” she said with a smile.

Before Zuko could think of a safe answer, the tailor laughed.

His face probably said enough, so he stayed quiet.

 


 

“But how do we know he is not an asshole by now? They could’ve corrupted him,” Moshi said, trying to clear the dust from the higher part of the window frame.

“What does it change? You were a bitch and you keep telling us how you feel guilty,” said Oke, handing her a new cloth.

Moshi took the cloth and put the old one in the bucket. “Don’t make it only about me! If you were the good ones, you would have stopped me,” she growled. The twins shrugged, knowing that she was right. “My point is we should apologize but I can’t promise I won’t punch him if he changed into a real scribe.”

Ba stopped cleaning the floor and stretched her back. “Whatever we do, we should do it soon.”

“Why?” Moshi asked.

“With every passing day, it’s most likely he will turn into an asshole with some good reasons to dislike us.”

Moshi growled loudly. “Fine. We are planning this tonight,” she decided.

 


 

The robe was made of a soft fabric and it fitted perfectly. Zuko had been at the edge of back-related panic but then the tailor showed him a small room where he could change in private. She made a few extra seams around his waist when the clothes were on him. Not a pleasant experience but bearable.

Already in the office, waiting for today’s document delivery, Zuko toyed with his cuff. It was tightly wrapped around his wrist, not loose and too-long like the previous one. Now, he didn’t have to worry that someone would spot the fair marks on his wrists. The scars weren’t that visible, but Zuko might’ve been a bit paranoid.

The desks were arranged in three rows of two. The one belonging to Zuko was at the back and he couldn’t be more grateful for that. No one behind him and a clear view of the whole room. The scribe he had almost argued with sat on the opposite edge of the room in the front row, just like Eva.

Servants brought papers and placed a pile on each desk. The scribes acted like they were invisible as if the documents just materialized next to them. Servants were supposed to be invisible to the nobles no to other employers… Zuko didn’t want to do anything controversial but ignoring the middle-aged man bringing him heavy stacks felt wrong.

Zuko tried to make eye contact with the man, a simple nod would be enough but the man wasn’t looking at him. He couldn’t make himself new enemies among servants when maids were already hating him. Zuko quietly cleared his throat and muttered, “Thank you.”

That earned him a short and confused frown.

Then, with a soft rustle of parchment, the writing started. Sometime after he finished the first folder Eva walked to him to evaluate his work. Zuko sat tense as the woman analyzed his words with her sharp gaze.

“The margins should be slightly wider. Also, you don’t have to calligraphy accounting papers,” she said with an amused smile. “Our fledgling wants to be a showoff?”

“No, Ma’am. I can rewrite it,” Zuko offered rapidly.

“Ludicrous,” she said, putting the documents back on the table. “Calligraphy is not a crime, Honey, just too much effort for mere reckoners.”

Zuko cringed at the nickname when his and Eva’s attention snapped to the opening door. A man with a long mustache entered the room, leading a young girl in front of him. He walked her to the chair at the front desk. Zuko expected the mean scribe to complain but he only politely greeted the child.

“That’s Beifong’s daughter,” Eva whispered to Zuko. “The poor thing is blind. Such a terrible waste of opportunities.”

The girl's head turned towards them, even though there was no way she could hear the whisper from that distance. Her milky eyes were looking straight at Zuko, he turned his gaze to the papers, hoping Eva would leave him alone.

“A smart marriage is Beifong's plan, I suppose,” Eva continued her wistful whisper. Zuko didn’t want to hear that, he couldn’t care less about this girl’s arranged marriage. He just wanted to write his forms in peace. “It would be quite a commitment but for good money.”

Finally, Eva left him alone and he took a deep breath to stop his racing heart. He doubted he would ever be able to endure people judging his work without freaking out. The blind girl wasn’t doing much more than playing with some. It was pathetic but even one new person in the room, a person who couldn’t see him, made him more uneasy.

Zuko took his brush, trying to ignore his surroundings, and began to write, carefully measuring wider margins.

 


 

How could anyone be a scribe? It had to be so boring.

Yet, Toph had to choose her target.

She didn’t know how complicated the form for the tournament was. The fact that the form existed was ridiculous enough, she wouldn’t be surprised if they put some riddle in it. Bunch of morons. But because of that, it was the safest to aim at scribes, they were experienced with forms, right?

The one she talked with was pissing her off with his faked politeness. She would enjoy threatening him but she wouldn’t let him touch her victory ticket.

The ones in the second row were worth considering but after studying them for a moment, she realized that their moves were too methodical. Perfectionists could snitch on her to her parents.

One person in the last row was clearly bored. Toph wouldn’t risk her form to be sluggish and done without putting some effort into it. It had to be perfect.

Toph would like to punch the woman looming over the dude in the last row. She had heard today's comment, and many more in the past. Eva’s nose was always in someone else’s business, according to the cool tailor.

But the dude…

If he wouldn’t die from that thundering in his chest, he might be the right candidate. Toph wasn’t keeping track of the scribes but he seemed to be new and younger than the rest. The floor in the house was giving her a decent view of the surroundings but she couldn’t judge anything as precisely as she would do using her lovely earth. The fact that the dude was stressed was quite obvious. Weird… Nothing was really happening. How writing something can be so stressful?

The scribe almost finished writing the letter requested by her parents. Toph needed more time to make a good choice. She stopped toying with the small stone bird in her palm and accidentally jostled a bottle of ink. It spilled right on the letter.

“I’m so sorry!” she said in a high, panicked pitch. “What did I do? I hope I didn’t ruin anything.”

She had to stop her grin when she felt the anger of the scribe. “Everything is fine, Miss Beifong,” he said in his faked polite tone. “We are already finished, so – “

“Actually, I think I have something to add. If that’s not a problem?” He won’t get rid of her that easily.

“Of course not,” the scribe said through clenched teeth. “But be more careful, Miss.”

This reaction was predictable, the guy’s at the back though… He had jumped in his chair, lightly but she’d felt it. Just a second after she’d spilled the ink.

Someone easy to startle…

Nice… perfect for her plan.

 


 

The girl destroyed the letter.

Zuko didn’t want to face a scene from his childhood from a different point of view.

If he had done that, his teacher would give him a few strokes to his palms for being clumsy. Father hadn’t tolerated mistakes. Those were one of the light punishments, the ones after failing in firebending had been way worse. Sore fingers were nothing compared to that.

Zuko snapped out of his memories. He expected to see anger, but the man did nothing. Everything was fine and his heart shouldn’t throb so loud. Apparently, discipline worked differently here. He wouldn’t want to see the girl punished for something she couldn’t control but a small part of him was jealous.

“Lee, come over here for a second,” Eva called him from her desk.

Zuko shook his head and stood up, as usual, his thigh needed two steps to start working properly, so he faltered a little. The blind girl turned her head to him, which was creepy, but she must’ve only looked there because of Eva’s calling.

 


 

The scribe was walking in a funny way. She was almost sure he wasn’t an earthbender, not with such light and uneven steps. Also, his heart hasn’t slowed down for a single second. Was he sick? It was really weird.

Lee – Toph knew the name of her victim.

Let’s test the guy once again. Just to be sure. She couldn’t risk her future title.

Toph enthusiastically jumped off the chair. “I’m more creative when I walk,” she stated.

The scribe’s heart picked up. “Miss, I don’t think it’s safe –“

Toph walked straight into her future target’s side. The guy froze for a second and then his heart sped up – that shouldn’t be possible. Toph rubbed her cheek making a soft groan, she hadn't expected his shoulder to be so rough. Pretending to be truly blind sucked.

“I  - I…” the guy stuttered.

Perfect.

He wasn’t angry at her clumsiness; he wasn’t sorry for her either. He was just panicked and that was all that Toph needed. He wouldn’t snitch on her if he thought the blame could be put on him too. Now the blame was all hers and he was close to a heart attack. When he would be the one completing the form, he won’t say a word.

The scribe finally hasn’t said anything. Toph decided to end his torture. “I’m fine… Blindness,” she chuckled in the fakest way possible.

The panicked dude was pretty close to finally saying something, but then she let herself be escorted out of the room. She knew all she needed to know.

 


 

“Like I said…” Eva shook her head when the girl left the room. “Such an unfortunate child.”

Zuko tried to calm down and was doing a really poor job. The Beifong’s daughter was all right… If she had hurt herself stumbling into him, he would be blamed, even when he’d been just standing and reading the paper Eva showed him.

Zuko was lucky like that.

“Are you listening?” Eva asked sharply.

“I’m sorry, Ma’am .” Zuko bowed his head. He had no idea what she’d said, he was too busy visualizing dark scenarios. “Could you… could you repeat, please?”

With an irritated huff, Eva repeated the instructions. As soon as she stopped speaking Zuko bowed and apologized again and fled to his desk. No more major disasters happened during work or dinner.

Alone, in his room, Zuko finally breathed using the full capacity of his lungs.

 


 

After the boring dinner Toph, like a good-behaved daughter she was, chatted with her mother about some boring things, changed into her boring clothes, and pretended to be asleep in her boring room.

When she was sure no one would spot her, it was time for interesting things to happen.

Finding out which room belonged to the walking heart attack shouldn’t be hard. Toph snapped her fingers, grabbed the stupid form, and went to talk with the scribe.

 

 

 

Notes:

Cliff!!! Damn, I've missed it <3

If only Zuko could produce energy with his stress..... I guess maids planning to "talk" and Toph planning to "talk" with him won't be relaxing. Whoooopsie.

Now Toph had more time! I think I know what I want to do with her earthbending skills. I feel a bit better with her voice after that chapter but I'm still very open to your opinions. Or if you notice any "impossible for toph" thing (like "she saw a butterfly) tell me. I'm always scared while writing her that I will describe something I shouldn't.

Zuko still remembers his time at Xaalo's and I love it.

Now is the part when I beg for comments. So you should know what to do 🤣 (please, let's chat!) Thoughts/opinions/predictions I'm open for everything!

Also, fuck Eva bun lady for body shaming poor Zuko. Ok now I'm done. You can comment

Chapter 4

Notes:

Ok, so firstly shameless self-promo --> I've written Xaalo's POV on Rock Botton + backstory 🥳
The old man didn't want to leave my head so "It Gets Bitter" happened! Check it out if you are interested!

Now, let's get to the magic duo!

beta by Cora :))

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text


 

 

Nothing happened during the day but Zuko felt exhausted.

The kind of cruel exhaustion that left you unable to sleep. He was used to it by now. Sooner or later, he would beat the anxiety buzzing in his skull and rest for a couple of hours. At least he hoped so.

If his Lee life was so stressful, he couldn’t remember how he managed to be Zuko full-time. Things had changed so much since the North…

No. He was too tired for that. He would deal with everything but not today. Not today.

Zuko took the book Mr. Xaalo gave him before his departure. He’d said it was historical, about some noble’s houses and genealogy. Zuko was surprised after he’d given it a first try, he found it interesting. He was skipping info-dumping but schemes and fights between different houses felt almost like a play. Not a good one but still a play.

He put a box of spark rocks on the bedside table and lit the lamp with his own measured bending. Oh, Agni it felt good… It was the only kind of bending he felt bold enough to perform.

After trying a few different spots, he tucked himself in the corner between the bed and the wall. Out of all places, the floor was the most comfortable one. Zuko couldn’t focus enough to read fluidly, he had to reread a sentence or two on every page. But the simple activity helped him to calm down a bit.

 


 

It was odd that Toph has never been in this part of the house before. It turned out scribes had their own separated corridor. She recognized the hushed steps of one of them, it felt like the guy was sneaking to another room.

She didn’t care – it wasn’t her guy.

Her walking heart attack’s room was at the end of the corridor. Weird… She braced herself for a harder hunt but apparently, the guy was sitting on the floor making finding him awfully easy. He was way calmer than before but still weirdly jumpy, and not quite rhythmical.

Storming through the wall would be a good introduction to her abilities but it was the middle of the night. She didn’t need the whole house to know about her schemes. She took the stupid piece of paper from her pocket and without knocking opened his door.

Something struck her in the middle of her forehead.

She caught the stupid thing before it could make any noise – betrayed by her own element… The attacker was a stone… stick. Toph was too focused on the dude to watch for other attackers. Who put their stuff on the door in the first place?!

The guy’s heart got back to the well-known heart attack as he stood up from the floor. She wanted to start this friendly but her good intentions disappeared with the attack of her head.

She closed the door angrily but quietly – no one could know about this little meeting.

“What was that?!” she asked, gripping the stone stick.

“What – what are you doing here?” the heart attack asked, his back pressed to the wall behind him.

“Waiting for you to answer!” She waved with this stick of his to emphasize her point. “What was that?!”

Reading him was harder than Toph expected. The constant throbbing of his heart normally would mean lying or other mood shifts that Toph had categorized by now. With him, it wasn’t so simple… The panic was dulling more subtle shifts in his heartbeat and breathing. He wouldn't stay immune forever, she was sure of that, but it might take some time to read him.

“Um… it’s a staff.”

The scribe was a dunderhead…

“I know that!” she exclaimed too loud for the quiet house. She couldn’t sense the guy’s exact feelings from the cacophony he was producing but she felt his flinch. At least she accidentally dealt with the intimidation part of her plan. “I’m asking, why it hit me in the head?”

“It wasn’t me! I – I didn’t hit you – “

“I know that!” Toph growled, annoyed that she had to repeat herself.

“…You do?” the guy asked unsurely.

Right… time to establish some sweet facts about her blindness.

She stomped towards him and jabbed him in the chest with the staff, raising her chin so she was more or less looking at him. She could tell he was observing her every move, his back pressed to the wall, his breaths changed from too frequent shallow ones to almost non-existing.

Toph smirked. “I’m blind but for your own good don’t mistake me for helpless.”

She stepped away from him and as a small demonstration, she changed the stupid stick of his into rubbles.

 


 

His staff shattered into a pile of stones right at his feet. The girl smiled at him with her arms crossed on her chest.

Zuko was with his back against the wall in front of a hostile earthbender. Again.

His only weapon was destroyed in a second and he couldn’t firebend. Zuko learned early in his childhood not to underestimate younger girls – Azula was a harsh teacher.

“What are you doing here?” he asked carefully, his back still tightly pressed to the wall, eyes tracking the girl’s movements. He couldn’t get himself in any trouble with Beifongs’ daughter. “What do you want?”

The girl – Toph – walked to the desk and using too much force she put some paper on it. Then, without any problem, she stepped on the chair and sat cross-legged on the desk. The pale, light sleeping robes she wore contrasting her persona.

“Nothing special… Just you to do some scribey work for me,” she said with an unsettling smile. “My parents pay you for that, right?”

Zuko didn’t move towards the chair that was apparently waiting for him. “What work?” he asked. “Why me? Why now?”

What was wrong with people?! It wouldn’t be his first fishy writing night assignment…

“Important. I’ve chosen you. I want to keep what we do secret,” she answered with that unsettling smile still glued to her face. “Come on, Scribey, I won’t bite you. “

It was not biting that Zuko was afraid of.

He didn’t have much of a choice so he walked to the girl and sat on the chair. She traced his every movement, always ‘looking’ right where he was. He wasn’t as light on his feet as he’d been before the injury but he couldn’t be that loud.

How did she do it?

 

---

 

Toph hardly ever voluntarily took her feet off the ground but this dude was just too loud. Leaning against the wall gave her muted version of his heart orchestra and it was still confusing. She kept one of her hands close to the wall to keep an eye – puns were equally funny, even in her mind – on him.

“Read that to me, Scribey,” she pointed at the form with her foot.

He took the paper and cleared his throat. “What is it?” he asked.

“My ticket to be the greatest earthbender in the world but like… officially,” she answered smugly.

She wasn’t sure if he took her seriously but she didn’t care. Few more days and she would have a cool belt to prove her skills. He started reading… Holy Badgermoles… it was so dumb. She could easily tell them any information just before the fight. And honestly which rockhead would give their real name to an illegal tournament? An illegal tournament with a stupid application form!

Scribey read the last line, something about her signature. Toph expected questions like… Why are you fighting in an illegal tournament while you are twelve and blind? But he stayed silent, shifting nervously on his chair, his fingers tapping on the table.

“You won’t ask?” Toph didn’t try to hide disappointment. She liked to prove people wrong.

His answer was short and quiet, “No. What am I supposed to do?” he asked instead.

Huh… weird, but after all, it was exactly what she wanted. “Complete it for me so I can kick some butts,” she said with a grin.

Scribey’s heart was going at a high speed but it hadn't exploded yet. At least from what she heard his breathing was close to normal.

“What should I write in the ‘name’ space?” Scribey asked.

“No way…” she pretended to be offended by the question. Nobles liked to do that when someone forgot their name. She just wanted to mess with Scribey a bit. “You don’t know my name?”

“You are Toph,” he answered nervously. “Toph Beifong. But… um, do you want me to write your real name here?”

“I knew you were the right choice, Scribey,” she grinned, putting her hand on the wall to try to catch his reaction. His heart did a weird thing but Toph couldn’t decipher it considering his general abnormality. After a moment she said, “Write Eva and skip the nickname for now.”

“Eva… like that scribe?” he asked, his pen already moving.

“Exactly,” Toph confirmed, curious if Scribey would want to defeat his scribe buddy but he didn’t seem to mind much. “Let’s speed this up!”

He read the dumb questionary to her and obediently put crosses when she told him to. He hadn’t questioned her even once. She wasn’t sure why but it was making her irritated. He acted like he completed illegal forms every night, he should be at least slightly curious. His weird irregular heartbeat stayed the same, at this point she wasn’t sure… Maybe this was normal for him?

“Only the signature and the nickname is left,” he informed.

Scribey was really treating it like a normal assignment which was hilarious.

 


 

“Do you have any ideas?”

“What?” Zuko asked, surprised. He’d expected another command, not a question.

The girl bumped his elbow with her foot, Zuko winced in disgust, suddenly glad that she couldn’t see that. “Come on! Ideas for my nickname... It’s important, Scribey!”

Zuko’s tactic for getting out of this meeting alive was simple – do what she wants. It worked with Azula most of the time. But he wasn’t good with nicknames, and he barely knew her, and he didn’t have an answer for that…

“Something catchy but not dumb…” Toph started listing her nicknames requirements, all that while picking at her toes, which was, again, disgusting. “I want them to fear but underestimate me too… Damn it’s a hard choice to make! Scribey, a little help, would you?”

Zuko put down the pen and put his hands in his lap. Until now, it was going smoothly, except for his destroyed staff… His first belonging and a stupid cane – even when he technically didn’t need it anymore it still hurt. There was no chance of getting swords, so the staff was his only weapon, if something would go terribly wrong.

Toph poked him again.

“I don’t know!” Zuko said a little too loud. That earned him a weird grin from the girl. He took a slow inhale, exhaled, and tried, “You can put ‘Blind’ in it.”

“Why?”

Zuko took another slow inhale. She seemed way more peaceful than before so he should be fine after suggesting it. “It was one of the first things you said to me… That you are blind, I mean… Make a point so you don’t have to repeat yourself.”

She was quiet for a moment and then threw her arms in the air. Zuko involuntarily flinched. “That’s brilliant, Scribey! Blind… but blind what? It doesn’t sound good alone.”

Damn… how many acceptable ideas could he come up with in a row… Not many probably.

“Blind…” Zuko said the word out loud, hoping that maybe another one would magically appear on his tongue… “Gambit!”

“…Gambit?” Toph asked with a raised eyebrow.

“Um… yeah,” Zuko suddenly stopped being so sure of the idea that seemed genius a second ago. “Gambit… it’s, um… it’s a Pai Sho thing and um… I’ve heard it’s good? It is a tactic? A good one and I guess… you want to be good?”

“Scribey… Do I look like I enjoy Pai Sho?” She pointed at her milky eyes. “Besides, I don’t want to be good. I am already the best.”

“Sorry,” Zuko muttered.

He seriously suggested Pai Sho to a blind child… He missed Uncle so much that he was quoting his dumb Pai Sho lectures without realizing it. Why did he even remember the word?! He hated damned Pai Sho!

The girl jumped to her feet on the table. Zuko flinched, again, and almost fell off the chair. She would have walked over the form if Zuko hadn't taken it from right under her foot.

“Bandit! Bandit, Scribey!” she exclaimed with a grin on her face. “It kinda rhymes and sounds badass! Blind Bandit… Yup, I’m sure! Write it down.”

Zuko put the paper back on the desk and wrote what she said. “It makes sense…” he muttered under his breath. He glanced at the remnants of his staff. “Blind Bandit. Do you want me to sign this?”

“Sure.” She shrugged and jumped from the desk. “You are right, it makes a lot of sense but we barely know each other, Scribey.”

Zuko stood up and put the paper in her hand. “The second you stormed into my room you destroyed my staff. It’s a bandit thing to do.”

She walked past him straight to the pile of stones. “Someone is touchy about his stick…”

She made a sharp motion with her palms and in a second his staff was whole again. Zuko took a cautious step back.

“Bending was a bit sloppy in some places. Now, it’s better than new,” she grinned and handed it to him. Zuko hesitantly took it. “Why do you have it anyway?”

Zuko weighted the familiar object in his hands, it brought him more relief than it should. “It…um, it was my cane for a while,” he admitted. “Thanks.”

She had a weird expression before she shrugged and turned to the door. Just before she touched the doorknob, she ‘glared’ at him. “But better keep that thing from hitting my head.”

“Then knock.”

She chuckled. “And Scribey… Keep your mouth shut or I’m gonna make a training dummy out of you.”

And after that, she left.

 


 

Scribey was pretty weird but Toph liked him.

After getting her belt, she would take a closer look at the – still hilarious – walking heart attack. Besides, she had to learn how to read his weird moods.

Toph liked challenges.

 


 

Zuko barely slept the previous night after Beifongs’ daughter stormed into his room. He couldn’t stop imagining hundreds of bad scenarios. He believed in her earthbending abilities after she destroyed and repaired his staff in seconds, but there were so many things that could go wrong!

Either she could get hurt and sooner or later he would be blamed for letting her do it.

Or someone would find the form and recognize his handwriting – even though he changed it – and blame him for corrupting her!

Yeah… he had come up with a lot of wonderful outcomes. For him and the weird girl, but usually, he ended up getting more screwed than her. Blame his luck.

After a relatively calm and uneventful day of work he closed the door to his room and finally breathed. He was so tired… Just when he wanted to put the blanket over his head and pretend he didn’t exist, he heard a strong knock on his door.

Zuko has had enough of it. He hated that.

Anger was buzzing in him as he stomped to open the damned door.

 

 

 

 

Notes:

Zuko was always so screwed because of his inability to lie... I decided to change it! (even if it won't last forever) Toph isn't as advanced with people as she is in the show yet and Zuko is really REALLY stressed. It has to be weird for her. She's great but I don't want to make her "too great and good at everything she touches" I hope you get what I mean.

While writing this I discovered that Pai Sho has pdf with its rules... if anyone would be interested 🤣 (gambit is totally made up shit, but we can blame Zuko for that, you know, he wasn't listening carefully)

As always COMMENTS! About Toph! About Zuko! About their first weird interaction, 🤣 It's weird Toph was the first one who was hit xdd.

Oh and of course RIP to Zuko's peace of mind with another knock to his door.
TO THE COMMENTS MY DEAR READER BUDDIES!

Chapter 5

Notes:

A little later than usual because apparently, I'm writing two stories simultaneously (truly great idea......)

Xaalo's story has a second chap tho!

And now enjoy :)))

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

Back when Zuko had a ship there were many times when he wanted to throw someone overboard. The crew, Uncle, and his failed attempts of finding Avatar had been driving him mad. He just wished for some time alone in his cabin, but every time someone had to interrupt. Jee with some not-so-important ship management issues, Uncle with his stupid tea or Pai Sho… Usually a loud yell or some flames worked.

Now, it was different. Zuko was different – a truth hard to accept and classify as a good or bad change.

Lee shouldn’t yell at people, Lee had no authority over anyone, and Lee definitely shouldn’t threaten anyone with firebending.

But Zuko was exhausted. He hasn’t put much thought into his reaction as he opened the door.

 


 

The door shot open with a loud thud. Moshi prepared herself for everything – including punching the guy if necessary – thanks to that, she hadn’t jumped in surprise like Oke and Ba. The scribe stood with one of his hands on the door frame, the other on the door. He was ready to close it in her face, his scowl only escalating the intimidating effect.

“What?” the scribe growled.

Moshi tried to match his scowl, though she had no chance. The scar and shadows framing his face did an amazing job in his favor. “And good evening to you too,” she growled back.

The scribe glanced at the twins standing behind her but in a second his focus was back on her. He exhaled slowly. “What do you want?” he asked with a raspy growl.

“A lot of things actually,” Moshi answered without losing a beat. “For a good start, a little bit of politeness would be welcomed, Scribe.”

“Could you please leave me alone?”

Asshole. Farewell to all the hopes and dreams about a nice scribe…

Moshi crossed her arms, glaring at the scribe. “Is a maid not worth your time?”

“I didn’t say that,” he snapped, his voice echoing through the corridor.

After a second, he looked surprised by his reaction but Moshi didn’t give him time to start the fake-polite act again. “I’m not going to be cowed by a raised voice if that’s what you’re counting on,” she said defiantly.

“I’m not yelling,” he, well… yelled.

“Did I say that?!” she yelled back.

“Shut up! Both of you!” Ba hissed.

Moshi gestured widely towards the scribe. “He started it! He has to shut up fir – “ She hasn’t finished when she heard a muffled voice coming from the staircase. The Head of Assholes. The only one worse than scribes was coming. “Fuck… damn… Not him…”

Oke glared at her and hissed, “No idea whose fault it is!”

The threat was getting closer. He would assign them bonus work if he saw them having enough time for chatting with the scribe. Or worse… The scribe would mess with the truth and snitch on them.

Moshi grabbed Oke’s wrist. “Come on! Inside!” She pulled her with one hand, with the other she pushed the scribe inside his room so both twins could hide as well. “Stay quiet!” she hissed at him. Ba jumped to the room at the last second and quietly closed the door, just in time the supervisor stepped into the corridor.

“What are – “ the scribe tried to say something but Moshi covered his lips with her palm when Head Asshole was passing right behind the door. They could hear him growing under his breath, probably, scribbling something on his clipboard.

He went still under her palm, well, she was gripping his shirt so he didn’t really have a choice. Thanks, spirits he didn’t try to bite or lick her. Oke put her ear on the door and after few moments she announced, “He’s gone.”

Moshi relaxed her grip on the scribes shirt, she wanted to withdraw the other hand as well but he did it first. His hold on her wrist gentle but firm, he quickly moved her arm down and took a cautious step back.

“Um, right… Sorry for that,” Moshi said sheepishly. She had harassed him… again. And the way the guy was looking at them wasn’t making it better. Moshi took a step back as well, but the guy was still put against the wall in front of them, so it didn’t really change anything. “So where were we?” she tried to make the invasion less weird.

“Technically we were outside and now we are inside,” Oke commented.

Moshi glared at her over her shoulder. “Not helping…” Then she turned to the scribe, her fighting mood faded. “The Head Asshole was coming… We haven’t planned,” She gestured around, “that.”

The scribe nodded shortly. Moshi noticed that the shadows on his face she’d spotted earlier weren’t light's job but permanent ones. “What do you want?” he asked, his voice resigned and quiet.

“We wanted to talk about what happened during the breakfast.”

Something in his expression shifted like he suddenly understood something. “I’m sorry, I didn’t know… And sorry for leaving the mess, I – um… I don’t know what else I can do,” he finished with a tune of frustration.

“Are you kidding me?!” Moshi exclaimed. He jumped at her suddenly raised voice.

She came here to apologize and now the stupid scribe did it first… And the worst of all… As much as she wanted to stick with her vision of him, she couldn’t fool herself any longer. The scribe wasn’t really a scribe.

Ba stepped forward and put her hand on Moshi’s shoulder. “My blunt friend wanted to say that we came here to apologize to you.”

“And now she’s mad you did it first,” Oke added. “She’s competitive.”

The scribe looked utterly puzzled. “… Sorry?”

 


 

“Stop apologizing!” the angry maid scolded him.

“Sorry,” Zuko muttered automatically. “Um, I mean…”

The twins chuckled but the angry lady was giving him a look, her eyebrows raised, hands on her hips. Her features were sharp, red hair tangled in a braid and bun, bright green eyes staring right at him. Zuko’s anger faded into well-known tiredness. They were only employees, and he hadn’t done anything terrible so it shouldn’t escalate, but with Zuko’s luck…

The fact that the angry maid had something in common with Azula wasn’t helping.

“I’m sorry… We are sorry,” she started, all similarity to Azula shattered. She has never apologized to him. “For kicking you out of the breakfast. All we saw was a scribe at our table and scribes are assholes… We shouldn’t take revenge on you when you, in fact, haven’t done anything.”

Another apology this month… It was starting to get weird.

“It’s fine,” he said, hoping that it would be enough for them to leave.

“Just like that? Are you really fine with it or do you just want us gone?”

“Both,” Zuko said, it came a little harsh according to the angry maid’s frown. “I will stay away. And it’s fine and… Could you please leave?” Good that he was too tired to do this in his temperamental way…

The weird expressions on the twins' faces were making Zuko self-conscious. The angry maid crossed her arms on her chest. “Sure. Under one condition.”

“What condition?”

“Tomorrow you will take a day off and go with us to the town.”

“I don’t have a day off.”

“Everyone does,” she said with confidence. “And yours is tomorrow.”

Zuko eyed the entire trio carefully. “What if not?”

The maid smiled sharply; she was looking like Azula again. With ostentatiously slow steps she sat on his chair facing his bed. “If not… You will enjoy sleeping with three creepy maids ogling at you,” she said with a sweet voice and a fake smile.

“I won’t ogle at him! Speak for yourself,” one of the twins stated. Her sister nodded in agreement.

“Traitors,” the angry maid hissed to her companions. “Then only one creepy maid will ogle at you.”

Zuko wasn’t sleeping well in general. He wouldn’t close his eyes in front of hostile maids, besides his sleep wasn’t always the quiet one… Gasping for air after a nightmare would be humiliating. Why was he even considering it?!

At this moment Zuko just wanted to sleep and he didn’t care if the trip was supposed to be his doom. “Fine. I will go.”

The angry maid grinned at him. “Promise?”

Zuko bowed in Earth Kingdom’s style. “I promise.”

When he straightened his back the twins were staring at him with weird expressions. His cheeks choose a perfect time to blush.

“Time for us, ladies,” the angry maid said and turned to the door. “We will get you in the morning! Sleep tight!”

They left his room, carefully closing the door to avoid making any noise. Zuko finally released a breath he didn’t know he was holding and threw himself face-first on the pillow.

They can kill him tomorrow, now, he just wanted to sleep.

 


 

“You are a bitch and this guy is awfully cute,” said Oke.

“And awkward,” Ba added with a grin. “Moshi, don’t scare him tomorrow.”

Moshi rolled her eyes as they entered their room. “Of course… I am the villain here.”

“You threatened that you will ogle him when he sleeps. That’s hella creepy.”

“Shut up,” Moshi growled. “It worked, didn’t it?”

 


 

The day Toph would become the Earth Rumble Champion she woke up in a fantastic mood.

Finally.

Time to kick some asses.

 


 

The crazy maids found him the minute he left his room in the morning. They took him to Clipboard so they all could take their day off, which apparently existed. The man tried to kill them with his glare but it was normal for him and the maids didn’t seem bothered. They went to grab some breakfast, no one was speaking and Zuko – obviously – wasn’t the one to start a conversation.

“I’m sick of calling you ‘scribe’,” the not-longer-angry maid broke the silence. “What’s your name?”

Zuko focused on his food. He wasn’t – at this particular moment – afraid for his cover story but the situation wasn’t comfortable for him. He could hear Mr. Xaalo mocking his social skills. “Lee.”

The maid – Moshi – made a quick introduction of herself and the twins. Zuko politely nodded to each of them and got back to staring at his breakfast. He wasn’t sure what was their deal about spending time with him.

“You are young for a scribe,” Moshi said. Zuko glanced at her and nodded. “How old are you?”

“My bet is eighteen,” said Ba… or Oke?

The other twin squinted at him. “Nah, I would give him twenty but with a babyface.”

All three girls gawked at him waiting for the answer. “I – I, um… no. I’m sixteen.”

“Nonsense. They rarely hire maids at sixteen.” Zuko only shrugged. “But like a young sixteen or an old sixteen?” Moshi asked, still not quite believing him.

“I… like sixteen and a half?”

They asked more questions and Zuko carefully told them the fake story. He mentioned that Mr. Xaalo got him this job and that he worked for him before. Following Mr. Xaalo’s instructions, he shortly mentioned being an orphan but changed the topic rather quickly. Just as the noble had assured him, the maids didn’t ask about the details.

After Zuko stuttered through his story the girls told him about disputes among the staff. They tried to get some gossips from him with weirdly specific questions about certain scribes, but Zuko was clueless. “I really don’t know anything. They aren’t talking with me… Well, Eva does but she’s creepy.”

That little statement earned him three wicked smiles and whispered stories about the oldest scribe lady.

 


 

Zuko had a really hard time deciding if he should take his cane to the town or not. His leg was good enough for a simple walk but he felt better with it. It was the only weapon he could use without raising suspicions but the last time it ended terribly…

He was just a scribe. No one attacked scribes surrounded by three chatty ladies, at least he hoped so.

The girls – as it turned out four years older than him – decided to give him a walk around Gaoling. They were chatting with each other all the time, Zuko not always could follow the conversation or get what they were talking about. From time to time one of them tried to include him in the talk – simultaneously, he appreciated and hated that. It felt nice after being ignored by the scribes but his social skills weren’t ready for dealing with three talkative people.

They circled the entire main part of the city. Moshi wanted to go towards the lake but the twins started complaining about their sore feet. That comment made Moshi stop and frown at Zuko. He started limping slightly, a moment ago but until now he managed to hide it well.

“Wait… You had a cane, like, two days ago. Why didn’t you take it?”

Because I don’t want to break anyone’s nose by accident… probably wasn’t the right answer. “It’s an old injury. It’s fine, really.”

Moshi gave him an unconvinced look. “You aren’t ashamed of it, are you? We were mean in general, not because of the cane.”

Zuko rubbed the back of his head. “No. I mean… yes. Partly? I don’t like that I needed it. Besides, it’s fine.”

Moshi raised her brow and put her hands on her hips. “When we started the walk, you weren’t limping, kiddo,” she said with a patronizing voice.

“Don’t call me that!” Zuko snapped. “And I’m fine.”

“Sure you are.” Moshi managed to ruffle his hair before Zuko patted her hand away. He hasn’t been startled by the gesture but it still felt weird. “I’m not going to give you a piggyback ride. You are too old for that.”

“I’m hungry,” Ba complained ignoring the ridiculous exchange. “I’m announcing lunch.”

They went to a restaurant at the edge of the marketplace and chose one of the patio tables. As they waited for their orders Zuko realized that he wasn’t as stressed as he’d expected. Obviously, he was ready for a disaster at any moment but like… in a calm way.

The maids were finding a weird pleasure in invading his personal space.

The table was round so Moshi and Oke had easy access to his head. Every time he lost himself in his thoughts and stopped listening to them one of the girls ruffled his stupid short hair. No growls and snarls could stop them from doing that. Though after he’d flinched under Moshi’s touch before patting her hand away, Oke took the lead in harassing him. At least she sat on his good side and he could see her hand coming.

He has never dealt with older girls before. Was it normal or the maids were simply weird?

Food saved his hair from constant violations. Zuko’s dish wasn’t ready yet so he read the menu once again. He noticed a drink he’d missed earlier. “Excuse me,” he said when one of the waitresses was passing by. “Can I get a cup of coffee, please?”

“Yuck… Lee, you know how it tastes?” Ba asked with a wince.

“Um, yeah...” Zuko shrugged. “I tried it before and Beifongs don’t have it.”

“And thanks spirits for that… Tea is much better.”

“It’s not,” Zuko said just in time the lady put his drink on their table.

Three maids were looking at him horrified when he took the first sip. It wasn’t as good as Mr. Xaalo’s but it was fine. He missed the taste.

“You are a weirdo,” Moshi said and the twins nodded in agreement.

Zuko blushed because of all the attention centered on him. Thanks, Agni the rest of the meal happened without harassing him for his drink choices. As maids ordered snacks Zuko observed people passing through the marketplace. There was a pattern here… Lots of bulky guys was heading in the same direction without stopping at any of the stalls.

The bending tournament.

The bending tournament the Beifongs' daughter was a part of… He had enough troubles to worry about but he couldn’t help it. He was worried about her and about consequences that would crash on him if someone would see that form.

A ruffle to his hair got him out of his dark thoughts.

“You do have a problem with staying connected to the present, kiddo,” Moshi said from behind him.

“I don’t,” Zuko growled patting her hand away. He stood up from his chair, the maids were already on their feet. “And don’t call me that.”

The break really helped his leg, it was actually useable again and he didn’t have to limp. They walked around the marketplace looking at stalls. The twins stopped to collect some trinkets, Moshi started talking with some guy, so Zuko took the opportunity and turned to the weapons shop they passed earlier.

The shopkeeper was busy with other clients so Zuko could hide in the shadow and stare at the nice set of dual dao. It had a solid sheath and handles wrapped in leather. Technically, he could easily afford it, he still had some money from Mr. Xaalo. Zuko missed the familiar weight in his hands, especially when firebending wasn’t an option for the closest future.

It wouldn’t be that suspicious either… He had seen a group of – probably – gardeners playing with some low-quality weapons in the staff’s garden. A group of guards had been laughing at them about their technique, which was really terrible.

“Someone likes that sword,” Ba’s voice startled him from behind.

“There are two swords actually,” Zuko corrected.

“You should be using a cane and you want a sword…” Moshi sighed from his other side.

“Two swords actually,” Oke repeated Zuko’s words mimicking his tone.

“I just like it,” Zuko grumbled. “It’s not like I will use them. I don’t know how… But um… a decoration?

“Expensive decoration if you ask me,” Moshi said.

“I didn’t ask,” Zuko said matter-of-factly.

Twins giggled but Moshi wasn’t amused. “Don’t be a scribe!”

“But I am a scribe!”

Twins started giggling, Moshi too. Zuko didn’t know what was that all about, he crossed his arms and stepped away from them but they followed like giggling annoying shadows. That brought the shopkeeper’s attention.

“What brings Beifongs’ Youth to my humble stall?” the shopkeeper, a man with a braided beard and huge hands asked.

Moshi clung to Zuko’s arm. “The shy one over there would like this lovely sword as a decoration.”

“It’s a crime to use my weapons only for decoration,” the man said like he’d been insulted.

Zuko’s breaths picked up and he looked up at the huge man. “Not only…” he mumbled, trying to balance the longing for the swords with staying unsuspicious. “I would like to learn someday…”

Apparently, twins were masters in haggling. After they chatted with the guy for a moment, he stopped being hostile and started laughing at their jokes. Most important – he sold Zuko the swords at a lower price.

The sun already disappeared over the horizon as Zuko walked alongside maids with swords over his back. He thought it would be the end of the trip but when the maids turned to him with wicked grins, he lost his hopes.

 


 

Toph did it – obviously. The belt hung on her shoulder; it was way heavier than it looked. The silence on the arena after she defeated her last opponent was a best moment in her entire life.

Everything would be perfect if not for her stinging, bleeding arm.

It couldn’t be too bad, but parents would lock her inside for the rest of her life if she scratched her knee…

She couldn’t see a way how she could take care of it by herself well enough to hide it.

Sometimes blindness sucked.

 


 

The warm drink Moshi had pushed into his hands definitely had some alcohol in it. Zuko wasn’t drunk. He could think clearly and walk straight but his head felt weirdly dizzy. Oke said she’d felt like that after the first time too, something about the fruits the drink was made of.

Zuko was surprised to admit it but he enjoyed this day. Also, he appreciated that when he’d said he wasn’t feeling too well they leave the bar and went back to the estate.

The walk and fresh air really helped. “Maybe you feel off because of musty air in that bar?” Moshi suggested. “It wasn’t strong… You should feel all right,” she said worriedly.

“Actually, it might be it,” Ba said massaging her temples. “It got me too.”

“Amateurs,” Oke scoffed.

The guards greeted them with playful smiles. Zuko was feeling mostly fine by now, but Ba looked a little green. Moshi and Oke helped her up the stairs, Zuko stayed behind.

“Come on, Lee, please don’t tell me we have to pamper both of you,” Moshi said over her shoulder.

“No, I’m good. I just want some fresh air.”

Moshi nodded. “See you at breakfast?” she asked with a smile.

Zuko felt a weird warm spike inside his chest. “Um… I – yeah… sure.”

He sat on the ground behind the staff’s wing trying to comprehend this day. He felt a little proud that after he felt slightly nauseous, he hadn’t freaked out. It was the last effect of starvation that has been taking its toll on him.

He would gladly forget it has ever happened. Not that he believed it was possible.

 


 

Toph sneaked back to the estate, still without the solution for her bleeding, hurting problem.

But then she sensed the solution sitting outside the servants’ rooms.

Scribey.

 

 

 

Notes:

I'm getting repetitive with town trips but like.... sue me but I want to give Zuko some more Lee/normal kid time. the chapter still feels like a filler. I know I've been saying that many times before but now I feel like it slightly more.

Though as always I would love to read some comments! Zuko and healing have a serious romance and I love it. In his narrative, it feels like he acts normal.... In Toph's it would be a different story but who cares. Do you like chaotic maids? They are here to give Zuko some normal teenage scribe life but they are taking their time the best they can. Also, a bad influence... giving a drink to poor smool Zu.

We will see which story wins my attention but I will try my best to keep regular updates! Now, its your time to comment - I like than all... quotes, rants, predictions and analyses. We like diversity here 😆

Chapter 6

Notes:

I have no idea how this is so long and was created so fast

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

Toph has never witnessed Scribey this calm. As she came closer, she felt his heart beating almost at normal speed, still a little twitchy but comparing to the well-known heart attack he was relaxed. Before destroying his peace, she checked if no one could overhear them. A group of guards was behind the building but it wasn’t a problem for now.

Toph felt bad when she sensed Scribey’s heart speeding. But her priority was to avoid being grounded for the rest of her life. She would try to take care of Scribey’s peace of mind later.

“Hello, Scribey,” she greeted him waving with her uninjured arm.

“What are you doing here?” he asked cautiously. She could sense his stress not only through the earth but also through his voice.

“Don’t worry I’m not going to break your stuff again,” she assured. “Look! The Blind Bandit won and now she has this fancy belt.”

Scribey was quiet. Toph hoped he was admiring the belt, she also hoped it was at least half as pretty as it was heavy. “Um… congratulations,” he muttered climbing to his feet.

“Don’t run away!” Toph said rapidly. The plan was simple but asking for help wasn’t exactly her thing. “You are the only one who knows about it and… I, well… I need your help,” she forced the words through her throat.

Scribey hasn’t moved and Toph held her hand out to him. She heard a sudden inhale. “Um… it’s bad?”

 


 

Toph yanked Scribey towards the staff wing when she sensed the guards getting closer.

“What are you doing?” he hissed. “We are not doing this in my room!” He was angry but at least he kept his voice down.

“Sure. Let’s go to my room when the guards will spot us immediately and you will get in trouble for being there!”

After that, he quit his protests and followed her. He’d agreed to help her without hesitation which was surprising after she was kind of mean with destroying his stuff and all. Scribey still walked a little funny but he was really light on his feet. Without any troubles, they sneaked to his door. He unlocked it carefully and stepped aside to let her in first. After checking if the door were closed, he turned to her with a loud sigh.

“What happened?”

“I kicked a lot of butts and one of the losers was lucky. Not sure really, I was busy celebrating,” she said smugly laying her belt on Scribey’s desk. “Then it started stinging and bleeding…”

“I’m not a healer… You have to have a medic of some sort,” he grumbled, nonetheless, he got closer to her and with a much softer voice said, “Let me see.”

“Amazing idea!” she said sarcastically, letting him take her arm. Before he took it, he motioned them to sit on his bed. “I’m sure my parents will be so proud of my hobby! They can’t know about this!”

Scribey didn’t comment, focused on rolling her sleeve up. “Does it hurt?”

“It’s not bad,” Toph said. “But could you do something about blood and stuff? If anyone knows about it, they won’t let me out of the house.” She didn’t like the desperate tune that crept to her voice.

Scribey either ignored or nodded, she wasn’t sure while sitting on the bed. He was focused on the task. His fingers were gently poking around the wound, never touching the spot when it hurt the most. “It looks clean but it’s deep and it might bleed more later.”

“So, can you do something so I won’t get grounded for the rest of my life?”

He let go of her arm and gesticulated with his hands. “Maybe don’t fight in illegal tournaments for a good start!” he snapped.

“Sure,” she had to stop the giggle. “I promise not fighting for another two weeks.”

“And after that?”

Toph smiled sharply. “Everyone on Earth Rumble Six will want to challenge the champion. I can’t let them down.”

Scribey made a weird angry sound and got up from the bed muttering something under his breath. Toph put her foot on the ground so she could sense what he was doing. Well… walking back and forth with weird hand gestures didn’t seem normal. “Scribey… What are you doing?”

“Thinking,” he barked.

“Oh… right, sure. Think in peace and I will just bleed out,” she said sarcastically.

“You won’t bleed out,” he growled and took a deep breath. “I don’t have any bandages. How am I supposed to get them in the middle of the night and keep this secret?”

Now they both were thinking… Scribey in a more dramatic way than Toph.

Theoretically, they could use something that wasn’t a proper bandage but it would increase the risk of someone noticing it. Toph didn’t say her worries out loud but she hoped Scribey would know what he was doing, she didn’t mind scar or something like that but – again – discretion was crucial. Scribey was too stressed to question his medical skills right now, besides, he was her only option.

“Maybe you can pretend that you need it for something and ask one of your scribing buddies?” Toph proposed.

“No… What if they ask or – or want to see? I’m new. I – I don’t want to overstep by doing something suspicious… It’s not like people would just give me stuff…”

Toph had no idea why faking the need for a bandage sounded like the worst crime coming from him, but she decided not to press it. He was already helping her when he, technically, didn’t have to do it. She couldn’t just order him around.

“Um… fine,” Scribey said and stopped his pacing. “It might work… I, um… I can pretend that my limp got worse and ask for something to wrap it. Yeah… Do you know where I can find a healer?”

Toph shook her head. “I only know the family doctor. I’m pretty sure staffs’ medic is another dude.”

Scribey muttered something under his breath again, this time Toph heard some words – curses. She was starting to like the guy more and more…

“Fine… just stay here and – and I will try to find someone…” he mumbled more to himself than to her. “Yeah… You sure it’s fine and not – “

“I’m not dying, Scribes,” she said amused. “Thanks.”

“Yeah… cool… I’ll be back,” he muttered reaching for the door.

“Scribes?”

“What?” he barked.

“You gonna pretend your leg hurts, so don’t you think taking the cane would make it more believable?” Toph asked sarcastically.

Scribey muttered more curses and took something, but not the stone cane she could sense in the corner. He had to notice her confusion. “It’s the wooden one that Clipboard got me…”

“Clipboard?”

“Don’t touch anything,” he growled and left.

 


 

When Zuko was focused on avoiding maids he learned which corridor belonged to them, but he had no idea which room the three girls occupied. At least he knew they lived together from the conversation earlier this day. The maids were his only hope, he had no idea where to look for the staff medic or if he even existed. Technically, he could try to do it the Blue Spirit way, but his gut was telling him it wasn’t a good idea.

The cane was knocking loudly on the floor, the part of him devoted to stealth was screaming for making so much noise. Zuko was a bad liar, but he had a lot of practice in limping so it shouldn’t turn into a disaster. Besides, the leg was really hurting him, not to the point of needing aid but it should make the lying easier. And the maids saw him limping earlier so…

“Lee, what are you doing here? Sneaking to the girls’ room at night?”

Zuko turned around to see Moshi leaning over the wall, looking at him with a playful smile.

“No – I… not that. I am not…” Zuko stuttered, a blush already on his cheeks. At least maybe the embarrassment would cover the lies. “I was looking for you.”

“You found me,” she said, gesturing with her arms and pointing at herself. “Or rather I found you and stopped your boyish plans.”

“I wasn’t – ” Zuko growled, his voice echoing on the empty corridor. He took a calming breath and started again. “Do you have, um… a bandage?”

Moshi's playful mood disappeared. She glared at him with her hands on her hips. “You gotta be kidding me! You were playing with your sword?” she asked accusatorily.

“What?!” Zuko was took off guard by the ridiculous question. “No! Of course not!”

Moshi raised her eyebrow. “Then why do you need a bandage Mr. Swordsman?”

“I – I… my leg, it’s um… for my leg. To wrap it. It used to help.” Zuko pointed at his cane to emphasize the point and took the attention off his poor lying skills.

“Oh…”

“…Yeah. So, do you have it? I will pay you back or – or buy a fresh one.”

Moshi stepped closer frowning at the cane, then she raised her chin to look him in the face. “I don’t have it. I’m so sorry, Lee.” Zuko nodded, desperately trying to think of another solution. Blue Spirit was a really bad idea but if he wouldn’t have a choice… “We shouldn’t have dragged you through the entire town. Spirits… I feel so stupid.”

Zuko shook his head. “No – no it’s fine, really. It’s not your fault.”

He successfully lied for the first time in his life and he couldn’t be even proud of it because it made the girl upset, which made him feel awful. How did Azula do it?!

“It is,” she sighed and grabbed his arm, clenching to his side. “Come on.”

“Where?” Zuko asked slightly panicked.

“Doc likes me, he’s going to help,” she said with newfound confidence. Zuko couldn’t do much to protest. Her grip wasn’t making walking more difficult but she was certainly not going to let him ran away.

Toph really needed the stupid bandages. It was their third encounter but it was the first time she was genuinely upset. The cut wasn’t a bad one, it would heal fine even without treatment. But Zuko could relate to fearing parent’s reaction, so he clenched his teeth and limped with Moshi.

 


 

“Are you dying?”

A man in his fifties opened the door after Moshi knocked. He was short, shorter than both of them, and had funny round glasses on the tip of his nose. He wasn’t annoyed even though they just bothered him in the middle of the night.

“Never with you around, Doc,” Moshi answered without losing a bit, still tightly pressed to Zuko’s side. It wasn’t as uncomfortable as he thought it would be.

The Doc, as Moshi called the man, eyed Zuko up and down frowning slightly. “You are new.” Zuko nodded. “Since when you don’t want to murder all scribes, Moshi?”

“Since I started harassing this one and he turned out pretty cool,” she said. Zuko’s dumb cheeks of course covered in pink. Gladly, Moshi couldn’t see that and the doc was more interested by the cane he hadn’t spotted during the first glance. “We took Lee on a walking tour today and his leg got worse. Please, Doc, cure the guilt that is tearing me from the inside, put some stitches on my wounded conscience –“ Zuko glanced at Moshi surprised, she has never talked like that. She was purposefully making words longer, and her voice deeper.

“Ba told you… I’m never going to speak with her again,” the Doc said. Zuko had no idea what they were talking about.

Zuko cleared his throat. “Actually, I don’t need much, Sir… Just a roll or two of bandage so I can wrap it in the morning and um… it’s fine.”

The doc ignored Zuko and turned to Moshi. “Show him where is my office,” he sighed resigned but without hesitation, which was weird in the middle of the night. “I’ll be there in a minute.”

“You are the best, Doc,” Moshi grinned at him. Zuko wasn’t so optimistic about it.

 


 

The Doc’s office was a small tidy room with a bench, desk, and many lockers. The man walked behind the desk without speaking with Zuko, he’d just sent Moshi back and then nothing. Zuko clenched the head of his cane and cleared his throat.

“It’s not as bad as Moshi said, Sir. I – um, if you could give me a bandage, I would put it in the morning when I will have to actually move more and – “

“So you can cut off your circulation and then I will have to amputate the limb for you?” the Doc asked pushing his glasses back in place. “Not on my watch, kid.”

“I had it wrapped before,” Zuko insisted. “I know how to do it.”

“Once in my life I’ve trusted the patient and now he’s dead,” the Doc said with a straight face. Zuko had to stop the urge to step back. “Patients are idiots. Take off your pants and sit on the bench.”

Zuko took a step back. “What?”

The Doc gave him unimpressed look. “Exactly what you heard,” he said taking something out of his drawer. “I’m not a perv, boy, but I’m not a magician either. I can’t examine something I can’t see.”

“It’s old,” Zuko persisted. “It doesn’t need an examination. It just hurts sometimes. Could you, please, give – “

“No,” the man cut him off. “On the table. Limbs normally don’t hurt, which leads us to the conclusion that it needs an examination.”

Zuko felt that he wouldn’t persuade the man. He reluctantly untied his sash and took off his pants. All that for a stupid piece of clothHe should have done it the Blue Spirit way… As long as the man didn’t want him to take off his shirt it was fine. He knew it was a normal request for a medic, but it didn’t make sitting only in his undergarments less uncomfortable.

The Doc motioned him to lay on the table, Zuko reluctantly obeyed. The man asked him several questions, that Zuko answered in a more or less accurate way. After quick questioning, the man started touching his both legs, Zuko had to put much effort into staying still. It hadn’t hurt much, and the man seemed to know what he was doing, but it didn’t change the fact that it was making him feel vulnerable and week.

The Doc patted Zuko’s bad leg, it was light but out of reflex, he winced. “So, you had a torn muscle, quite nasty case, I admit. Good news – it’s mostly regenerated. Bad news – I have to make it worse.”

“What?” Zuko snapped, getting up from resting on his elbows into a fully sitting position.

“Only temporally,” the man explained and gently pushed him back down. “You look like a fit guy. If you want to use this leg’s full capacity, we have to get rid of the scar tissue. You have bumps in the places where it was torn and that’s what hurts you and make the limb stiff. Am I right?”

Zuko could recall some of those terms from the book he’d read. He did want to get back to normal. He nodded to the man and asked, “What do you want to do, Sir?”

“Restore the proper blood flow and loosen it up a bit,” the man explained. He took some bottle from one of the lockers and put an oily substance on his palms.

“How?” Zuko asked tensed, not taking his eyes off the man’s hands.

The Doc put some of the weird substance on Zuko’s leg, it smelled fine but the consistency was weird. Then he rubbed his hands together looking at Zuko.

“Okay, Lee, now you have to promise you won’t kick me. Curses and wriggles are allowed but don’t move this leg. I would prefer you won’t insult me personally but I can negotiate about this one… It’s going to hurt but you will thank me later.”

It was a sick joke…

Zuko was laying on a table in front of a man who just announced he would hurt him. And he had to agree to that. All that because Beifongs’ daughter was bleeding in his room and he needed a bandage to help her hide her ridiculous hobby in front of her parents. And he didn’t even have his pants on.

Zuko already knew pain. If there was a chance this would help, he could take it. It couldn’t be worse from the things he’d endured, and those were only meant to hurt.

Zuko looked the man in the eyes and nodded.

The doc put his both sticky hands on Zuko’s thigh. “Shall we begin?”

 


 

The cut would heal itself before Scribey comes back. Toph was patient… for the first fifteen minutes. How long could it take to grab some bandages? Did he get lost in the house or what? Scribey wouldn’t run away and leave her because she was sitting in his room and the guy seemed pretty attached to it.

She stood up from the bed, walking back and forth trying not to die of boredom. She walked into something that fell on the floor with a metallic thud.

Huh… Scribey owned swords.

 


 

It started fine. It was just a dull pain, occasional stab, and well-known weird pulsing. The man was sliding his palms over his entire thigh making it warmed up. Then, he started poking his fingers deeper and sliding them back and forth. Zuko had to clench his teeth but he could still take it.

He made the first noise when the man jabbed his thumb into one of the most aching spots.

“Fuck,” he hissed squeezing his eyes shut.

“Finally… You made me worry I lost my grip,” the doc answered calmly as he started twisting his thumb in the same fucking spot, applying stronger pressure. “Come on. You are a scribe you have to have more interesting vocabulary than that,” he said as he suddenly jabbed another spot.

“Fuck…” Zuko hissed again. “Can you come back to just rubbing not damned poking?!”

“No,” said the man and started twisting his thumb, getting deeper into Zuko’s flesh.

Whenever Zuko cursed or hissed the man always put more attention to the spot that caused the reaction. It was fucking obvious after the first two times but Zuko couldn’t stop. His entire thigh was on fire and the fucker just rubbed it stronger and stronger with a fucking relaxed face. He even dared to hum while doing it!

He has been tortured before, but at least then no one tried to convince him that it was for his own good… For Agni’s sake! For some time Zuko was gripping the edge of the table so he wouldn’t just punch the sadist’s face. How could he be so fucking relaxed?!

“Ouch! Not that – leave it – Fuck…”

Zuko squeezed his eyes shut when the man tormented the aching spot with a new jab-rubbing motion. At the beginning, Zuko had believed that it would really help, but now, when his leg felt just like in the canyon, he wasn’t longer sure. His mind was giving him many bad scenarios but he couldn’t focus because of the pain ripping his leg… He had to remind himself that he allowed this to happen to avoid pinning the man to the ground. Lee couldn’t pin men to the ground.

A light pat to his thigh snapped him out of his thoughts. “There, there… Humans breathe for a reason, kid.” Without opening his eyes, Zuko took a shaky breath. “That’s my rule – I stop when they stop breathing. No need to treat a dead man, right?” the man asked with a laugh and another pat to his leg.

Zuko opened his eyes and glared at the psychopath.

“Come on… It was funny.”

Zuko glared harder.

 


 

Weird double swords were a good entertainment for another fifteen minutes. Toph traced their shape carefully not to cut herself but a piece of steel wouldn’t entertain her forever.

What was the Scribey doing for so long?!

 


 

Zuko had some moments when he caught himself comparing this to the North Pole or the beginning of his run in the Earth Kingdom. He feared that it was the beginning of freaking out but somehow his mind stayed sane. There he had some control and he’d chosen to endure that – no matter how stupid the decision was.

“I think that’s all for now, Lee.”

Zuko quickly sat on the table. His thigh was red and he didn’t want to move it. During the torture, he forgot why he was here. “You won’t going to wrap it?” he asked panicked. He couldn’t endure all that and came back empty-handed.

The man took a towel and cleared his leg from the leftovers of the oil. Zuko involuntarily winced when he touched his leg. “You are being a baby,” he said. “But you didn’t kick me… So fine. I can wrap it but after the next session you have to be a big boy.”

“Next… what?”

“Every second day. You. Me. This office.”

“No.”

“Yes,” the man said elevating Zuko’s knee so he could, finally, wrap the stupid bandage around his leg. “You want to walk straight and go on dates with pretty maids? Then you will come.”

“I wasn’t on a date!” Zuko snapped.

The man used three roles of bandage to wrap Zuko’s leg and, finally, told him to put his pants back. Zuko did it a little clumsily, still sitting on the table. His leg wasn’t on fire anymore but it felt off – again. When Zuko put his legs down the table with slight difficulties the man already handed him the cane.

“Use it tomorrow… or rather today, it’s late,” he said. “Tomorrow you should be fine without it, unless, it will still hurt badly.”

Zuko grabbed the cane and… he was limping again. This time for real. He glared at the doctor after making the first few steps.

“Gotta get worse before it gets better,” he said cheerfully. “Sleep thigh… Did you get it? Thigh – ”

Zuko wanted to set him on fire. It would be fair. But to avoid arsons he stomped away as fast as his leg made it possible.

 


 

“What took you so long?!” Toph exclaimed when Scribey came back. He didn’t answer only made an angry huff. “And why are you limping for real? What the heck, Scribes?”

He stopped next to the desk and sat on it doing some weird motions. “The staff medic is a sadist,” he said like it was enough of an explanation.

After few seconds of shuffle, he sat next to her on the bed and cleaned her arm with something wet. “What’s that?”

“Just water,” he said, clear irritation in his voice.

It was an interesting change… He was barely anxious – which was so weird – his heart was still buzzing fast but fueled by a completely different emotion.

“I didn’t know you have swords, Scribey,” she said when he started wrapping a soft material around her upper arm. Even though he was irritated his moves were gentle.

“Decoration,” he barked. “You wasn’t supposed to touch anything!”

“You weren’t supposed to disappear for hours! I was bored.”

Scribey made more annoyed noises, he stopped wrapping her arm for a second. “It’s too long,” he muttered to himself. “Hold here,” he told her and got up to the place when she left his swords.

“Are you going to cut the bandage with a sword?” Toph asked with a grin.

“Sorry that I don’t have scissors,” he grumbled.

“Don’t be sorry. That’s badass. I like it.”

There were a lot more questions to ask. And Toph for sure would do it but not today. She had almost dozed off a few times while she had been waiting for Scribey, he didn’t seem to be in the mood for questions either.

“It’s done,” he announced. “Just better wear something long-sleeved for a while.”

Toph patted the finished dressing. Huh… it was nicely done and really small. Scribes was showing more and more talents.

“Thank you,” she said heading to the door. “Um, Scribes?” she asked uncertainly.

“Yeah?” Irritation disappeared from his voice, now he sounded just tired.

“Really. Thank you for that,” she said honestly, her voice uncharacteristically low. She wanted to ask something else but she bit her tongue in time. “You are pretty cool.”

“Um…” There it was – the well-known twitchiness. “Thanks. Um… you too.” She hid her giggle and reached for the door. “Toph?”

“What?”

“Your belt.”

How could she forget?!

She grabbed the belt from his desk and opened the door. “Of course I remembered.”

 

 

 

Notes:

Ok so when I say slow burn healing I mean it... but that's getting to an end. Who doesn't need a psychopathic doc in their life. If anyone of you had their injury/muscle massaged like this lets relate to Zuko's torment.
But like it was so amusing to write? And the Doc? Idk he appeared out of nowhere but I love him?

Also, yeah I promise Zuko and Toph will like you know *talk* in a normal way someday. Without threats and stuff.

This chapter turned out one of the longest I've written and it's weird because the main mission was patching Toph's arm. But tell me if the sequence with the doc was amusing or am I just weird?
I did consider making it more "traumatic" for Zuko when the doc was kinda hurting him but I decided against it. He had a lot of the time to somehow process what had happened - which doesn't mean it's all gone. But this painful situation was a controlled one. The leg wasn't injured in tortures. Maybe it would turn out more triggering if it all was about his back 🤔

That's it of my TED talk. Now I would gladly read your ted talks :DDD Come one, a payment for long and fast chap.
(at this point my comment begging is a tradition and a thing I'm doing auto-irronocally)

It's just a guess but from now the story will probably speed up a bit

Chapter 7

Notes:

A day too late to keep one week schedule but it's nong so take it and enjoy!

(I'm not under any real-real pressure but I like the imaginative schedule)

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

His leg fucking hurt. Again.

Zuko got up from his bed at sunrise, beams of light blinding his eyes through a small window, only to sour the whole mood with the first step. He sat in the meditative pose, trying to focus, but he could still feel the man’s fingers violating his flesh. He was glad that most of the bandage was still compressing his thigh. After an hour of mediocre meditation, Zuko glared at the wooden cane and took it with him as he left the room.

A few days ago he had been avoiding maids. Now, he would have to be as far from the doctor as possible.

The morning briefing was uneventful, just casual tasks, nothing new. All scribes, except for Eva, were ignoring him, which was fine. The woman kept staring at him as if she expected Zuko to talk with her – not going to happen. Or at least he wouldn’t be the first to speak.

Eva’s stare was ripping a hole in Zuko’s back as they walked to the canteen. It was slowly freaking him out… But he hadn’t done anything, had he? Clipboard allowed his yesterday’s day off. Shit… She couldn’t know about the matters with Toph. No, she couldn’t. There would be much more consequences if anyone knew about Beifongs’ daughter hobby, and that Zuko was somehow involved.

“Hello there!”

Zuko was so busy with his dark scenarios that he hadn’t noticed three girls outside the dining hall. After the eventful night and the poor sleep, he forgot about the promise of eating together. The maids apparently did not. “Um… Hi.”

The maids saved him from dining with the scribes, they surrounding him and marched to their table. The girls told him about changing their cleaning tactic, so they could finish before Zuko’s work started. The plan would work with supper too, but the dinner was off the table. Zuko felt weird, but it was nice. It left him with only one awkward meal with hostile scribes and creepy Eva.

“Do you feel better?” Zuko asked Ba when he recalled how green she looked when he’d last seen her.

The simple question evolved into an enthusiastic retelling of the previous day. Technically, Zuko started this conversation, so it shouldn’t be an issue that all he did through the rest of it was nodding and half-smiling when he was mentioned in the story. He started scowling when maids criticizing his beverage choices, again.

“Scribe Lee?” A man with a massive bag of packages and letters stopped next to their table. Zuko nodded unsurely. The man handed him an envelope. “Addressed to you.”

Zuko wanted to say that it had to be a mistake but Ba was faster. “A secret lover?” she asked with a giggle, then turned to the courier. “Do we have secret lovers too?”

“I’m afraid not,” the man answered, rolling his eyes with amusement. “Maybe next time.”

Zuko followed the courier with his gaze. He stopped next to another table and gave a bungle to the tailor lady. Zuko recognized the man next to her and immediately turned back to his food. His plan of avoiding the doctor was going wonderful.

“Are you going to open it or not?” Moshi asked looking at the envelope in Zuko’s hands. “Lee has a secret lover…” Moshi chimed with a silly voice, nudging Zuko’s side.

“I don’t,” he growled moving his chair to the side so she couldn’t poke him anymore. “It has to be a mistake.”

“There is no other scribe named Lee,” Oke pointed at the characters on the envelope.

Zuko shrugged and opened the letter. Lee hadn’t got anyone who would write to him. It has to be addressed to someone else…

Zuko read the first sentence.

“Aww,” the twins made a simultaneous sound. “You are blushing!”

“Who send it?” Moshi leaned over his side, again. “Um… Lee, there’s an insult in the first sentence. Why are you smiling?”

“I’m not smiling,” Zuko grumbled.

“What it says?” Oke asked from the opposite side of the table.

‘Dear Adroit Cripple, your letter was – ‘“ Moshi couldn’t read further because Zuko covered the letter with his palm. “Hey!”

“You won’t read my letter!”

“A second ago it was a mistake,” she retorted.

Zuko glared at her and folded the letter. “Well, it’s not.”

“Why is someone insulting you in a letter anyway?” Oke asked.

Zuko sighed dramatically. “It’s from my previous employer.”

“The Xaalo guy?” Moshi asked. Zuko nodded, he was glad that he already mentioned the noble when he was telling the girls his fake story. “Well, then… No wonders why you don’t work for him anymore.”

Zuko frowned. “What?”

“Insulting in a greeting is an asshole thing to do,” she clarified.

“Mr. Xaalo is an asshole,” Zuko admitted, denying that would be a lie. “But I liked working for him. He, um… he really helped me. He might be… well, eccentric? But I don’t mind. It’s not even close to the worst thing he called me anyway… Uh, I mean –“

Moshi raised her eyebrows. “I don’t want to know the worst thing if you grin after cripple.”

Scarface… probably. But it had stopped when Zuko asked him to stop. He couldn’t remember correctly but some things from before his employment could win this contest. Later the nicknames hadn’t disappeared but it became… casual. Yeah… Zuko practically always reacted for ‘brat’ for Agni’s sake…

“And now he is really thinking about this…” Moshi sighed, her eyebrows still raised. “About that… no, I mean, no! I’m not calling you a cripple, just –” Moshi pinched the bridge of her nose and sighed. “How’s the leg after visiting Doc?”

Zuko took a sip of the tasteless tea to buy himself some time. “He gave me that bandage…” Zuko grumbled. “After unleashing his sadistic tendencies on me.”

Zuko knew that – most likely – the man hadn’t tormented him for the sake of it. That it had some purpose and that it should really help… But his mind had some troubles with allowing someone to hurt him. The hurt he experienced has never had any benefits. That was new.

“I have some more to unleash.” Zuko froze when he heard a voice coming from his bad side. Fuck… The doctor stood right next to the table. “Tomorrow after sunset. Don’t be late,” the man fucking winked to Zuko. He walked away with a bouncy step, humming something under his breath.

Zuko growled and put his forehead right on the table. “He’s going to kill me.”

All three girls chuckled, a hand of one of them ruffled his fucking head when he wasn’t looking. “You are so dramatic, you know that?”

 


 

Zuko squinted at the handwriting worse than Mr. Xaalo’s shopping list, trying to decipher the words he was supposed to rewrite. He has been staring at this paper clueless for at least twenty minutes. From the corner of his eye, he noticed Eva coming to his desk.

Zuko did a ridiculous thing and spoke before the woman could. “Excuse me, Ma’am… I can’t figure out this handwriting and I – I don’t want to copy it with mistakes.”

Eva practically ignored what he said, only giving a brief look to the problematic paper. “A day with commonalty and he cannot read anymore…” she sighed shaking her head.

Zuko was taken aback but this subtle rebuke. Until now, Eva was the only scribe that wasn’t openly hostile – only creepy. But the comment was in her style, so no change in patterns. Zuko stayed silent. Defending himself or the commonalty, as she called the maids, wouldn’t give him any favors.

“Boy, you should reevaluate some matters. It’s undignified to eat with dust-cleaners.”

“It is not,” Zuko answered before he could stop himself.

Eva’s face was scandalized after Zuko didn’t agree with her. She wanted to say something else when the scribe from the desk on the right appeared just next to them, taking the problematic paper.

“Not this again…” he muttered taking the paper with him. He took a pile from his desk and put it in front of Zuko. “I will complete this nonsense, again, but you take care of mine pile. Deal?” the man asked Zuko.

“Um, sure… Thanks,” he muttered in response, surprised that the scribe not only acknowledged his existence but also helped. Zuko didn’t mind a larger pile.

Eva turned on her heel. “I hope the boyish stupidity will disappear soon enough,” she said under her breath loud enough for Zuko to hear it.

Zuko swallowed every rude thing he wanted to say and focused on the papers. The dinner was a nightmare. Eva kept calling him Honey and saying disrespectful things about maids and staff members.

Zuko felt relief when he noticed the twins, Moshi, and one empty chair at the supper. He had a moment of hesitation but then Ba or Oke – he had some problems with distinguishing them from a distance – waved at him. He could hear Eva muttering something but he didn’t care about the vile woman. It would be better if she started to ignore him like the rest of the scribes.

 


 

The scribe from the desk next to Zuko’s had a constant bored expression and deep shadows under his eyes. A day after he’d saved him from the unreadable paper, he sat next to Zuko during the briefing.

“Here’s the deal, lad… When you got more of those unreadable papers give them to me and I will give you a stack of normal ones,” he whispered leaning to Zuko but looking around the room. “I prefer to squint at one thing for the entire day than to change a paper every minute.”

Zuko could see how this deal would benefit the laziest of the scribes but he didn’t mind a lot of work. “Deal,” Zuko answered.

The man finally looked at Zuko and held out his hand – they shook on it.

After that, he started to nod to Zuko in the mornings and Zuko always nodded back.

 


 

Zuko naively hasn’t taken the cane with him when he showed in front of the doctor’s office.

What a foolish decision…

“Do I have to call one of your girls to walk you back?” the fucker asked as Zuko struggled with his pants. The sadist told him that he put less pressure than the previous time but it had to be a lie.

“They are not my girls,” Zuko barked and stood up from the agony table. “Before you touched me I could walk just fine!” Zuko hobbled his first steps with clenched teeth.

“Oh… you got me,” the man deadpanned. “I keep making it worse because you are such a lovely conversation partner.”

Zuko growled opening the door. Lee couldn’t punch this man.

“I already miss you,” the doc said with a fake sweet voice.

 


 

“We made bets,” Moshi informed him during breakfast. “Tell us what the Xaalo guy wanted.”

“What?” Zuko spitted just before taking a bite.

He was taken aback by the randomness of the request. What bets for Agni’s sake? He preferred to eat with the maids but the amount of talking it required was exhausting.

“The letter,” Moshi clarified. “You were so mysterious about it so we started making up theories,” she said with a sharp smile. The twins giggled, which didn’t bode well.

The letter was hidden in his drawer. Zuko was surprised that he could actually read Mr. Xaalo’s characters, the writing was a little wobbly but easy to read. Either the noble put a lot of effort into writing or the shopping list was just a joke on Zuko.

The three girls were looking at him, clearly expecting an answer. Zuko explained that Mr. Xaalo required information about Zuko’s safe journey, so he had sent one. But apparently, it hasn’t satisfied him. “He basically said that all I said was bullshit. I barely wrote three sentences saying that I’m alive!” Zuko was dangerously close to yelling so he cleared his throat and lowered his voice. “He wants me to, well… elaborate.”

You didn’t have a problem with rivers of words during your thrilling monologues so do it but on a paper. Also, cut some loathing if you please. This ‘everything’s fine’ smelled like bullshit…

The twins were disappointed. “Not even close,” Oke sighed.

“I was kind of close,” Moshi said without conviction. Twins only scoffed at that; Moshi didn’t argue. Zuko didn’t want to know those bets… “I hope you will tell Mr. Asshole about our lovely first and second meeting.”

Zuko smirked. “I guess I will… At least he will believe that.”

 


 

Zuko and his scribe neighbor’s deal was very efficient. Statistically once a day Zuko came across an unreadable paper that he traded with the man.

The woman from the desk in front of Zuko’s once borrowed a bottle of ink from his supply. She told him that the ones she got that day were too dense. Zuko didn’t mind, he has never used a lot of ink to avoid bolts.

Now, Zuko had two scribes with whom he greeted with a nod; matters with Eva haven’t changed though.

 


 

“So how do you like Doc?” Moshi asked during breakfast.

Zuko glared at the cane resting over his chair. He had thought he wouldn’t use it anymore but yesterday the sadist changed his technique. He had set on fire the parts of Zuko’s leg that have never hurt him before. The man said it should pass around midday but Zuko didn’t believe a word that left his mouth.

“He’s only making it worse,” Zuko grumbled staring at his tasteless tea. “And he enjoys it.”

Suddenly, Oke put her mug on the table with a loud thud. “Oh, spirits! You don’t know!” Zuko frowned. “Doc was an actor! That’s why he’s so dramatic and all… Ba once told him about a play when he was stitching her wound and he could recite the lines by heart!”

Zuko glanced at the twin with pale freckles. “You like plays?”

 


 

“ – and then the moron on the backstage took my belt. It was ridiculous! Only my character had a damned belt… And then –“

The doctor poked his fingers deep in the most aching spot on Zuko’s thigh. “Fuck!” he hissed clenching his fists on the table, so he wouldn’t punch the man by accident. The sadist grinned. “What was that for!?”

“You are not paying attention,” the man said, his fingers laying just on top of the aching spot, for now, without any pressure.

“I do,” Zuko said, it was the only right answer, even if it was a lie.

“Then tell me what was the deal with that belt?”

“Um… You took it from someone by acc –“ Zuko didn’t finish when the murderous hand sliced his thigh in a half. “Fucking damnit!” he hissed through clenched teeth.

“It was my belt!” the man exclaimed, making circular motions around the jabbed spot. “Pay attention,” he growled and got back to the steady abuse and his damned story.

Zuko carefully listened to the fucking story to the end, nodding in the right moments and keeping eye contact with the sadist. He survived the rest of the massage without sudden agonizing stabs, just casual suffering.

As Zuko walked – by some damned miracle without needing the cane – he heard the man saying, “I love when they listen.”

 


 

After breakfast Zuko found the courier and gave him the letter, hoping that Mr. Xaalo would be satisfied this time. He mentioned everything except for Toph’s illegal activities. Zuko couldn’t understand why his previous messenger wasn’t enough to pass as proof of life to pay the merchants. But nothing Mr. Xaalo ever did make any sense.

Following the example of Mr. Xaalo, Zuko tried not to think too much about the bending champion that lived in disguise in the same house. He didn’t need more stress in his damned life.

Zuko stepped into the staff’s garden and sat in his favorite spot – on the edge, just where the huge boulder separated the large Beifong’s space with sculptures, ponds, and other fancy stuff. Zuko wasn’t sure if the staff was allowed in the main garden but he didn’t care. Right now, the empty backyard was all he needed. The warm rays of the sun made his inner flame shimmer but he wouldn’t dare to perform any real bending. Meditation with a candle had to be enough for now.

Most of the staff was still working somewhere, only some scribes got an unexpected day off. Something was wrong with the newcome papers and only two of the most experienced scribes – Eva and Sideburns – stayed to solve the problem. A weird thing was that Clipboard stayed with them as well. Zuko has never seen him doing anything specific – just ordering people around.

Having nothing to do was weird. Mr. Xaalo was right that Zuko would be too busy to think too much. Being around so many people was distractive and surprisingly he wasn’t overwhelmed to the point of fleeing. He started to enjoy his days, especially after people had got used to him, and stopped looking at him weirdly.

He still woke up every morning with fear that today would be the last day. That his fraud would be exposed and he would be dead. But later he forgot about it and just lived. If only he could bend, there wouldn’t be much to complain –

“Hello, Scribey!” A voice came from his bad side, and the owner of the voice came through the bush. Zuko scrambled backward from his spot against the boulder. “Scribes, don’t freak out. This time, I come with peace. Just look at me.”

Zuko, indeed, looked at Toph, and well… a flounce dress wasn’t fitting her personality at all. Her hair was combed in some complicated bun with flowers and all her clothes were clean, not stained with dirt as usual. “Um… Hi, Toph… Uh, a nice dress?”

She chuckled. “Yeah, I really like how it looks.”

Zuko frowned staring at her milky eyes. “You do?” he said without thinking how rude it was. “Uh… I mean – “

“Don’t bother, Scribes, I was just bling-joke testing you. Congrats, you passed,” she announced, toying with the material around her shoulders.

Zuko climbed to his feet, awkwardly scratching the back of his head. “Um, thanks?”

Toph wanted to say something else but then two guards ran to the garden. Zuko immediately tensed and clasped his hands behind his back to look as unthreatening as possible. Being found by the panicked guards – earthbenders – with the Beifongs’ daughter could be a beginning of a disaster. He kept his eyes on the ground taking a step away from Toph.

“There you are, Miss,” the guard said relieved. “Please don’t wander away alone. It’s dangerous.”

What was so dangerous in the guarded gardens? Did they really fear someone from the staff could do something? It was bad… He was the only staff member around…

“I’m all right,” Toph said with a graceful shrug. “I’ve never been in this part before and Lee just agreed to show me around.”

So. Bad.

Both guards frowned at Zuko. “You are the teenage scribe, right?” one of them asked.

“Yes, sir.”

The guards looked like they were unsure what they should do with the whole situation. Toph walked to Zuko’s side and grabbed his forearm with a firm hold. “What are we waiting for, Lee? You promised,” she said with a pleading tone.

Zuko looked at the perplexing girl at his side. She didn’t need any help with moving around… They had sneaked together through the gardens just a few days ago. He anxiously glanced at the guards.

The taller man cleared his throat. “Fine. But take care of her, young man,” he said to Zuko, there was a threat hidden in those words. “In case of any emergency, we will wait right there, Miss.”

Zuko bowed stiffly. Before he could choose the direction, Toph tugged him in the way she wanted. After they walked out of the ear range she growled.

“Sorry for that, Scribey.” She squeezed his arm for emphasis. “They are hard to lose without changing into the Blind Bandit,” she explained with an evil grin.

“I don’t mind but… Why? You don’t need any help with moving around,” Zuko stated the fact, utterly confused.

Toph raised her chin, her milky eyes were staring into his face. She was smiling but it wasn’t the wide grin from before, it was more subtle. “Did I tell you that I like you, Scribey?”

 


 

The little miss walked away tightly clenching the boy’s arm. It had to be terrifying for her to be in the unknown terrain. Standing on the edge of the staff’s backyard they observed closely as the scribe slowly walked Toph around the garden. The guards were ready to intervene at any given moment; either if the miss got scared or the boy overstepped the boundaries in any disturbing way.

The two kids stopped at the opposite edge of the garden.

“I thought those were only gossips, but the kid really is a half-breed. He looks just like them.”

“Yeah… and that scar. They weren’t exaggerating.”

The guards tensed when the little miss stopped holding the boy’s hand. They were already half step to intervene, Mr. Beifong would fire them if anything would happen to that fragile girl. But the two kids just sat on the soft-looking grass.

The guards released a simultaneous sigh of relief and kept observing as the girl and the boy talked, no words reached their ears.

As long as the miss wasn’t distressed by the situation they allowed it.

 

 

 

Notes:

What were the maids' guesses on the Xaalo letter? That is the question. What those three chaos seekers thought of......

Zuko the grumpy lord fucking smiledddd (couple of times I guess) damm #give this boy a normal childhood 2021 (until the gangs arrives)

I know it is probably weird to love my own creation but I adore the doctor sadist (Zuko does not agree)

Here we goooo not death threat talk with Toph. The fragile poor little soul :DDDD

I like the pacing of this chapter I hope it worked fine! A lot of happy chilling and torture sessions (massage) happened in the chapter! As always I would love to hear from you and talk in the comments!!!
Damn I could babble about every segment it was really a joy to write. Just Zuko chilling. No angst. Nothing.

I'm an advanced comment beggar but if any artistic soul would want to bless this story with some art or meme go there!! --->

https://renegadeoftheworld.tumblr.com/

I barely use it but I will send a lot of virtual love to any creative human being. ZUKO SMILED!

that note was a real Zuko-level rumble..... well comment :*

Chapter 8

Notes:

Call me Speed. It was faster than one week!

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

Firstly, Toph hadn’t recognized Scribey behind that boulder because his heart was beating so peacefully. She has been thinking about hanging out with him for a couple of days. It was so cool to be able to talk with someone about the tournament. Also, she wanted to interact with him without blackmail or bleeding involved.

Oh… and the bandage was slowly getting smelly.

Scribey almost regained his peace when there were only two of them, then the guards came and he got back to having a heart attack. She could feel him standing stiff, most likely, with his hands clasped behind his back. At least he let himself be dragged for small sightseeing. Of course, Toph had been in this part of the garden, it had very soft grass so she pulled Scribey down.

“Why are you freaking out?” she asked.

It was hard to think of anything that could scare him so much right now. The last time with her wound, he was irritated but not scared.

“I am not,” he answered with a raspy voice and twisted his neck to the side.

Toph focused on the things on his left – only the guards, nothing else. “I can feel your heart beating crazy.”

“How exactly?” he asked, it sounded accusatory, a small tune of skepticism easy to hear in his rasp.

“I can see with earthbending,” she said with a smug smile.

That statement stopped his neck-twists, she had his attention. “How… how is that possible?”

The chances of Scribey being an earthbender were almost non-existing. Not with the light steps and timid personality. But chances for a twelve-year-old girl to beat everyone in the illegal bending area were low too. And here she was, the belt safely hidden under some rocks at the back of the garden.

“Are you an earthbender, Scribes?” No answer. His center of gravity didn’t change its place, so he was still looking at her, not to the left. “C’mon, it’s not a hard question.”

“Oh… sorry. No, I’m not.”

Toph frowned. “What are you sorry for?”

“I – um, I shook my head. It was stupid.”

Nods and shakes sometimes were too subtle to feel. She forgot about that. Toph hasn’t met anyone new in ages, and here, everyone treated her like she was helpless. Some of the people even introduced themselves while speaking to her as if she couldn’t recognize voices.

She shrugged off his reaction and began her explanation. “I can feel and see the world through vibrations. Badgermoles taught me how to do it. Not talkative fellas but amazing bending teachers.” She smiled at the memory of learning the basics and petting their huge noses. “Nods and shakes are usually off my limits but I can see you glancing to the left every second!”

Scribey focused on her again. “Badgermoles?”

“Yup,” she grinned. “The original earthbenders. No big deal.”

“Huh…”

“Yeah…Thanks to them I’m the greatest earthbender in the world,” she said but the Scribey’s neck was twisted to the side. Again. “What’s so interesting there?! I’ve just told you that badgermoles are my buddies and you keep glancing away!”

“Sorry,” he muttered while glancing to the left.

“Enlighten the blind girl and tell me what’s so interesting? A bird? A fancy cloud?”

“Nothing,” he muttered. Toph did her best to send him a glare to made him elaborate a little. She sensed him shifting his weight very slightly as if he was stopping himself from turning his neck. Finally, Scribey sighed. “Just the guards. They stare.”

Toph didn’t have him figured out completely but she would bet her belt that it was true. “That’s their job. There’s no one else they can, you know, guard.”

“They guard you, and watch me,” he said with an odd bitter tone in his voice.

Toph answered with her own bitter tune. “They always guard me. You know, because I’m helpless and fragile. They would change their mind on the bending ring.”

“But why do they think that?” he asked. It was his record – thirty seconds without glancing away.

Toph picked up a pebble from the ground, shattered it to pieces, and formed a completely different shape. Scribey wasn’t looking away, so there was a big chance he was watching her petty bending show.

“I guess they are the blind ones,” she said sullenly. The brooding aura of Scribey got into her. She shook it away. “Why do you think they watch you? Aren’t you a little paranoid, Scribes?”

He huffed angrily. “I am not,” he stated as if he was used to that question. “They watch me because they guard you.”

Toph laughed. “Are you so scary?”

“I – “ he started but the words died in his throat.

Toph only once witnessed Scribey closer to angry than terrified. “I won’t believe you are intimidating when you are scared all the time.”

“I – “ he began as if he wanted to argue but then he took a deep breath. “I’m new. They don’t trust me.”

Feels like truth. Weird but whatever. Why wouldn’t they trust someone her dad hired? Toph didn’t care that much to pry answers from him. Unfortunately, that meant she wouldn’t ever talk with Scribey without his heart going crazy when anyone could see them.

“By the way… Do you think I can take off the bandage? It’s starting to smell.”

“It shouldn’t bleed anymore. Does it hurt?”

“Not much,” she shrugged. “Will it scar?”

He tensed. “Probably but, it should disappear with time. Sorry.”

“What are you sorry for?” she asked confused.

“That it will scar.”

She rubbed the spot where the wound was hidden. “A belt and a scar after winning… Damn, I’m so badass.”

That got a weird shaky reaction from him. Toph couldn’t exactly classify the weird shifting and changing in his heartbeat. She wanted to ask what was that about but she sensed a familiar figure entering the garden.

“Don’t freak out! My dad is coming.” He freaked out in a second. “Stand up! Hurry! He will complain that I sit on the ground.”

He jumped to his feet. Toph grabbed his arm and pulled him towards the flowerbeds as if their walk never stopped in the first place. She felt Scribey shaking. “Hey,” she said squeezing his arm. “Scribes, it’s fine.”

He kept clenching and unclenching his fist. Toph tugged him towards the guards and he didn’t resist even though she felt his dread. Dad was his boss and he could have the intimidating aura, but not to that point. The way guards tensed a little after spotting her father was normal, the heart attack at her side was not.

“I was looking for you, Toph,” Dad said and turned to the guards. “What was happening here?”

Toph knew that tone – he wasn’t approving but it wasn’t outraging enough to straight forbid her from doing it. Scribey wasn’t taking her dad’s overprotectiveness well, he was still as a rock.

“Sir – “ the guard started uncertainly. Scribey’s heart literally skipped a beat.

“I asked Lee to show me around the garden,” Toph said before the guard could speak.

“Yes, Sir,” the guard continued. “We have been keeping an eye on both kids.” The phrasing kind of confirmed Scribey’s paranoid fears. Also, kids… That meant Scribey was younger than she had thought. Cool. “Everything was calm and peaceful, Sir,” the guard said slightly stressed.

“Lee is a good guide,” Toph added. She could live through the assumption that she needed a guide if it would save Scribey’s heart from exploding here and now.

A direct point where the person was looking was too subtle to feel, so Dad was looking either at her or at Scribey. “I’m glad you had a good time but your lessons start in a moment.” Dad stepped towards them and Scribey’s heart did a weird jump. “Come on, Toph.”

She squeezed Scribey’s hand for goodbye and grabbed Dad’s hand. Before heading off she turned to Scribes. “Thank you for taking care of me, Scribe Lee,” she said like a model daughter her father wanted to see.

Scribey cleared his throat. “Um, of – of course, Miss Beifong,” he said with his scratchy voice and bowed. Toph barely stopped herself from laughing but at least Dad enjoyed the performance.

Hanging out with Scribes would require more creativity than a garden trip.

 


 

When Mr. Beifong disappeared out of the eyesight, Zuko finally breathed. The man wasn’t pleased that his daughter had been in Zuko’s ‘care’ but he hadn’t said it openly. At least he wasn’t mad at Toph. The guards allowed this to happen, it wasn’t even his idea, and the walk wasn’t a dangerous thing to do.

But Zuko was a commoner and Toph was a nobleman’s daughter. In his past life, his own father wouldn’t be pleased either. Zuko shivered at the thought. Even though no one openly talked about his fake mixed blood, and Mr. Xaalo’s story included this fact so it wasn’t a secret, they were untrusting. Zuko had felt the guards’ stares, their postures on high alert –

Zuko flinched when he saw a hand coming, in the last moment he slipped from the hold. “Hey easy,” the guard said with a frown. “I asked if you are all right?”

It’s been a while since Zuko disconnected like that. “Yes, sir.”

“Are you sure? You’ve become really pale. We can walk you to the doc if you need –“

“No,” Zuko bolted, his leg throbbed with agreement after yesterday’s session. The sadist’s fingers left bruises. “I – I should be going if – it that’s all right,” Zuko stuttered, keeping his eyes on the ground.

A moment of silence made his heart race again.

“Sure it’s all right,” one of the guards said. Zuko bowed shortly only with his neck and turned towards his room. “Hey, kid!”

Zuko stopped and forced himself to face the guards. They were looking at him neutrally. Good… neutral was good…

"Boss might’ve looked mad but he’s just afraid for his daughter. He always reacts like that. Nothing personal,” the taller earthbender said with an assuring smile.

Afraid for his daughter…

The daughter who had won the tournament against grown men, times bigger than her; who could somehow feel his heartbeat, which was completely insane; who was just a short, walking embodiment of confidence.

What was he supposed to answer?

“Um, thank you. Am I dismissed?”

One of the guards released a soft huff. “You don’t have to ask. Just say bye and go.”

“Sorry,” Zuko said automatically. “Goodbye then.” He bowed and with fast steps disappeared to the building.

 


 

“You what?!” Moshi exclaimed stabbing her chopsticks into her food.

Zuko hunched his shoulders. He had had his daily dose of stress; he didn’t want to be yelled at during the meal. “You heard,” he growled. “I walked with Beifongs’ daughter around the garden and –“

She waved with her hand. “Not that... You had a day off?!” she hissed with rage behind her words. “Where’s justice in this world?! Scribes enjoy days off when we do the worst chores!” She stood up from her chair and slammed her palm over the table. “I announce riot!”

Oke yanked her down by her sleeve. “Would you shut up?”

Moshi sat down and without any real passion raised her teacup. “To fallen justice,” she said and gulped down the rests of her tea.

Zuko relaxed his hunched shoulders and smirked softly at that ember-island-quality performance.

“To fallen justice,” he joined her absurd toast.

The anxiety he’s gathered during the afternoon was slowly disappearing. The guards acted normally, and he walked past Clipboard without getting rebuked. Everything was relatively fine.

For the rest of the meal, Oke and Moshi planned their revolt. Zuko and Ba discussed the play they both read and despised. He had to admit that the twin had good taste. Zuko wished he could talk with her about Love Amongst the Dragons.

The girl liked costumes. There was a time when Zuko owned a solid replica of the Dark Water Spirit mask. If only it hadn’t been destroyed when his ship exploded. Ba would appreciate the arrow-proof craftsmanship, not that Zuko would mention that detail.

 


 

Scribey was light on his feet even when he had been walking in his funny way. Today in the garden she could barely feel the imbalance in his steps.

A quick sneaking trip to the badger caves shouldn’t be a problem for him.

He had his part in her winning, so maybe he would want to see what she could do.

Toph would love to show him what she could do. Someone who would finally see her – not the fragile and helpless blind girl, but the fearless ass-kicker.

Scribey was a perfect candidate.

Also, maybe the swords of his weren’t just decorations.

 


 

“You know – “

Zuko knew was that he was in fucking pain and that he hated the guts of the man tormenting him. He knew that he hated listening to every bullshit leaving the doc’s mouth to avoid a sudden stab in the most sensitive spot.

He knew a lot of things and he didn’t want to know whatever the doctor had to say.

How could he have so strong hands, for Agni’s sake?!

“ – it’s similar to talking with a girl. Firstly, you have to feel the ground.”

He started sliding his hands all over Zuko’s leg without putting much force into it.

“Then you have to find the approach that fits the best.”

He poked his thumbs deeper into his flesh and started sliding them only in one line. Zuko had to hold his breath for the first few slides.

“When you already know what you are doing, you have to wait for the right moment and –“

“Ouch!” Zuko hissed and involuntary grabbed the man’s wrist. His fingers remained pressed deep into his flesh. “Fuck…” Zuko kept clenching the man’s wrist but he didn’t pull it away. “Get off!”

The fucker smirked and didn’t move his hand. After a moment and a weird feeling inside his leg, he stopped. He patted his thigh like he always did after especially violent moments.

“When you do it right, you get the wanted result. Just like I did. But remember, young man, she has to agree to your games first. Just like you did,” he said smiling at Zuko in the fakest way possible.

He wanted to punch the fucker so badly but he only scowled, lightly rubbing the abused spot.

“Did you feel that?” the man asked. Zuko nodded; he had felt something weird. “It was a good sign. Your limb was stubborn but no one can resist my magical touch.”

Zuko refused to answer to that, he lay back down on the table when the pain eased.

“Now, I’m going to loosen the other leg –“

Zuko momently got back to glaring at the sadist. “What?! Why? Don’t touch it! It’s fine.”

The man pushed him back to the laying position and put the sticky substance on his good leg. “You has been overstraining it while limping, Moron. People have two legs for reason and you were jumping on one and a half for a while.”

Zuko scowled but allowed whatever the man wanted to do without further protests.

“So, which one of your maid friends you like the most? No offense, but I think Moshi would be too much for you... Unless you prefer –“

No sighs and glares stopped the man from his stupid reasonings. Zuko tried his best to ignore the doctor’s matchmaker attempts and just enjoy a massage that wasn’t agonizing.

 


 

“Lee, how do I look?”

Moshi stopped him on his way to the office. She looked, well… normal. Her hair was combed into a nice big bun with a braid, her eyes were big and shiny, and she was vibrating with energy.

“Um… like usual? Why?”

Moshi crossed her arms and scowled at him. “Scribe,” she snarled. Coming from her it was an insult. “Come on! You are a boy, say something more!”

“But what do you want me to –“

The tailor lady embraced Moshi from behind. “You look beautiful. The ribbon really matches your eyes, sweetheart.”

Moshi blushed and turned to the tailor. “Really?”

“Of course,” she smiled and gave Zuko a weighty look. “Right, Lee?

It matched her eyes but Zuko didn’t notice it earlier. Was it all about the ribbon? “Uh… yeah, the ribbon is… um, nice…”

Moshi scowled at him and almost ran towards the garden. The tailor sighed looking at Zuko. “Lee, sweetheart, Moshi just wanted to hear that she’s pretty from her guy friend.”

Oke and Ba run from behind the corner. “Did she already go to meet that gardener?” They asked excitedly. The tailor nodded. “Lee, did she look good?”

Under the stern gaze of the tailor, Zuko tried to smile. “She looked pretty.”

“Good!” Ba chipped. “Come on! We gonna see what is happening through the window!”

And like that, they ran away. Zuko had no idea what was wrong with these people… Or maybe it was his fault? The last time he thought about girls he was thirteen, unblemished on his face, and he had been just a child. He’d had Mai, but it was different. He hadn’t got much time to think about her during the banishment…

“You have a lot to learn,” the tailor sighed but she had a cheery smile on her lips.

“Don’t worry, my dear, I’m giving him lectures.” The doctor appeared just behind the tailor and embraced her with his arm.

What was wrong with these people? And why did they have to mix him into their weird affairs?!

“I’m late to the office,” Zuko said and turned on his heel. He could hear the doctor whispering something and the lady laughing.

When he, finally, sat in front of the documents, he realized that he genuinely missed Mai. It would be nice to see her again. Nice, but practically impossible.

 


 

Zuko just finished meditating before sleep when someone knocked. He had a feeling who waited behind the door. And he was right. “Hello, Toph.”

“Hi, Scribey,” the blind girl grinned at him. Zuko let her pass and closed the door behind her, knowing that if she wanted to enter she would find a way. “I appreciate that I wasn’t hit in the head this time.”

“Because you knocked,” Zuko said and leaned over his desk. “Do you want me to make another form for you?”

“No, champions don’t need forms anymore.”

“Oh... okay,” Zuko said uncertainly. He was used to people invading his room, but now, when he wasn’t sure what the girl wanted, he wasn’t longer so chill about it. “So, um… why are you here?”

“By the way,” she said ignoring the question. “My dad wasn’t mad. After his shock passed he even mentioned our walk during the dinner.”

Zuko nodded. Then, he quickly reacted using words. “Um… that’s good. I – I’m glad.”

Zuko realized that Mr. Beifong wasn’t mad when no one threw him out of the estate but another confirmation was good. He would still prefer to avoid the man though. Also, Toph wouldn’t come here only to told him that.

“I have plans for us, Scribey,” she said with a grin.

Zuko eyed her warningly. Despite the difficult beginnings in their relationship, he liked the younger girl. Zuko didn’t share her level of confidence but watching her was inspiring in some ways.

“What plans?” Zuko asked.

“Tomorrow you will sneak out with me and I will show you where I train!” she announced, excitement beaming from her. “I will come for you around this time and you can take your decorations with you. Who knows, Scribes, maybe you can do much more than cutting cloth?”

First of all – he could do much more than cutting cloth. He flexed his fingers at the thought of being able to train with his swords freely, without limiting himself. His leg barely hurt anymore when the sadistic doctor’s fingers weren’t close to it. He missed the confidence the swords had been giving him.

But… No.

He has been careful for too long to do something so reckless. The consequences could be catastrophic. Not only endangering for the Beifongs’ rage and real punishment but also, losing the job, betraying Mr. Xaalo’s trust, and wasting the opportunity he’d given him.

Zuko didn’t want to be out there on his own without a plan. Not again. Not yet. He barely recovered after the last time. He was afraid, as much as he didn’t want to admit it… He was afraid.

Things here were stable. He had people who tolerated – maybe even liked – him. He couldn’t lose it.

Suffocating his inner flame by his own choice was better than suffocating it while starving.

Lee’s life was better than Zuko’s had been for the last years.

“No,” Zuko said after a long moment of silence.

Toph put her hands on her hips, the previous amusement and excitement changing into anger. “What do you mean no?”

She had the facial expression of someone who wasn’t used to the word. Zuko knew that face, he’d seen it on Azula numerous times.

“I’m not going anywhere,” he repeated, adapting a more stable stance. The times he’d said no to Azula never ended well for him.

 

 

 

Notes:

Is that a cliff?

Nevermind. I've accidentally created an interesting (and not so planned) conflict of interest. I really wanted to send them to that cave but Zuko said "naaaah, not going to happen". The same Zuko is suddenly bitter about the fact that people are wary of him because of his look. Zuko your Lee the Scribe is showing.

Toph might be pretty egocentric but in my opinion, it's reasonable for this stage of her arc.

As always comments/reviews/rants/complaints/literally everything welcomed! (arts too if anyone feel artistic XD)

And here is my daily request: If you have any music that gives you the vibe of From the Ashes series or maybe my good old man Xaalo you may leave it in the comments. I want to make a mood playlist for three months and it's going *greaaaaat*. I desperately try to make "baby Xaa" times palyilst but it's going just ughhhh.
I already complained about it under Xaalo's story and do nothing. :DD

I think that's it!
*waiting for comments while desperately staring at my spotify*

Tumblr: https://renegadeoftheworld.tumblr.com/

Chapter 9

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Scribey was weird.

Toph had her first suspicions about him after he hadn’t been panicked about treating her wound. His moves were confident as if he had done this before. And then those swords… and his agile steps. All of that really suited someone who knew how to fight, or who, at least, would be enthusiastic about watching her performance.

Yet, Scribey’s heart went crazy after she mentioned the trip.

After his second refusal, he adapted a fighting stance. He was standing in a fighting stance and he refused to go for a fighting trip. It was ridiculous.

“What are you doing?”

His legs were shoulder-width apart, ready to dodge. “I’m not going anywhere, Toph,” he repeated.

“I asked what are you doing,” she said getting irritated. She heard that the first time. “I can feel that you switched into a fighting stance!”

His heart skipped a beat as he shifted his weight slightly. “I – I didn’t.”

There it was – he lied. It was a subtle change; she could’ve missed it if she wasn’t focused only on his reactions.

Toph made a reckless choice. She shifted into a bending stance herself, arms raised, posture stable and grounded. It was only to see what he would do, after all, he’d started this. There was no earth she could bend without damaging the house. Unless she would wreck his stone staff again.

Scribey ditched the fighting stance in a second, he flinched violently and backed against the wall. He raised his hands, not as if he wanted to strike back, but as if he wanted to cover himself. His posture no longer stable, one leg hidden behind the other. Not to mention his heart was about to explode.

Toph lowered her arms. “Scribes, I’m joking! Why are you acting so weird!?” she exclaimed, totally puzzled.

Toph didn’t know what changed since their talk in the garden. She had come here with hopes that Scribey – the closest person to a friend she’s ever had – would go with her. And now he was afraid of her. She didn’t mind when her opponents pissed their pants on the bending arena, but she didn’t like this in the slightest.

“Be – be quiet… someone might hear and – “

She was just as angry as he was scared. “You are not answering my question,” she said through gritted teeth.

Another flinch was barely sensible, but it was there. “Please leave,” he whispered, bracing himself for something.

Did he really thought she would attack him?!

Toph really wanted to punch something at the moment. She wanted a friend and all she got was rejection. After she’d shown him her true self, he didn’t want anything to do with her. She was so mad and… hurt.

She could do anything. Why couldn’t she make a friend?

Toph turned on her heel and slammed the door behind her before she would do something stupid.

 


 

Zuko forgot how terrible it felt not to be sure if he survives the day. He hadn’t slept that night and his head fucking hurt. He has gone so far and now, it felt just like the first days at Mr. Xaalo’s.

Toph hated him and basically hold his faith in her palm. Zuko remembered what had happened to the servants that endangered themselves to Azula. Powerful men know no half-measures. A word to Mr. Beifong about the imprudent scribe and Zuko is fucked. Those were Lee’s problems.

Zuko couldn’t close his eyes due to shame and anger that was tearing him apart. He had no control when he pressed his back against the wall. It was a coward’s reaction. He thought he had it behind him after he'd spent a day with Ho, or ate his meals in the same room as earthbending guards. But at the moment he recognized the bending stance everything looked like in the prison.

He hadn’t even had to stop himself from bending in defense. Cowards do not defend themselves. Toph was just a child, an extremely powerful one, but still a child. How would his pathetic mind react if it was a real combat situation?

Zuko was too angry at himself to think straight, he kept thinking about the same things without finding any solutions or answers.

A snap of fingers in front of his face made his pathetic body flinch back in his chair before he realized it was just Moshi. Three concerned maids stared right at him.

“Lee,” Moshi said in a low tone, “are you okay?”

“Yes.”

“You were glaring at your cereals for two minutes and you look terrible. No offense.”

Zuko wanted to argue, but she was right about the cereals, and if he looked how he felt then… “I – I just…” He tried to articulate something but three piercing stares weren’t helping. What answer would make them leave him alone? “I had a bad night of sleep. That’s all.”

Moshi straightened her back and leaned over the table in Zuko’s direction. “Why? Did something happen? Does your leg still hurt? Or maybe Eva? I bet it’s her or – “ Ba bumped Moshi with her elbow. “Ouch! What was that for?!”

“You talk too much,” Ba said, giving the other maid a glare. Then, her expression softened when she looked at Zuko. “Is there something we can do?”

“What?” Zuko had no idea where did the question come from. Ba didn’t say anything more, letting the silence loom over the table. Zuko cleared his throat. “Don’t mind me. I’m fine. Keep talking and, um… stuff? Just don’t talk to me. Ugh… no, I mean – “

“Got it,” Oke interrupted and changed the subject as if Zuko never spoke. He couldn’t be more grateful.

He continued staring at his food but he managed to take a few bites. He kept glancing where Clipboard was eating. This day is going to be like this – full of anxious glances at the doors and people who could enforce the consequences. Logically, Toph shouldn’t mention anything. It could endanger her hobby to be exposed. But it wouldn’t be hard to mix some facts in a way that the guilt would be only on Zuko. Azula would do this in her sleep.

Zuko didn’t really know Toph but she had been furious. She almost broke his door. Would she want revenge? But for what exactly? He had just said no…

He was a fucking idiot.

You can’t say no to the ones above you, for Agni’s sake! But he couldn’t have said yes either…

His awful tea got cold. The maids’ chatter was a comforting background noise but the pressure in his head kept growing. He rested his elbows on the table, covered his face in his palms, and started massaging his temples.

“Lee, if I talk to you, which I’m not doing,” Zuko frowned raising his head to look at Moshi. “I would say that if you feel as bad as you look, you should take a day off.”

“For once she’s right,” Oke said. She ignored Moshi’s glare and continued. “Half of a day would be enough. The afternoon is free for everyone. There’s some celebration in the town and Beifongs are the honor guests.”

“Staff has time off unless you are a guard,” Ba added.

“I like to have something to do,” Zuko said. Busy Beifongs sounded promising. Maids nodded and didn’t push the matter further.

Zuko wanted to start working as fast as possible. At Mr. Xaalo’s when his thoughts had been in a similar feral state, it used to help. Zuko would kill for a nice cup of coffee.

“Hey,” Moshi called when Zuko was already on his way to the office. “We are going to spend the afternoon in the garden. Come with us, unless you decide to get some overdue sleep. As you know, we are amazing background noise,” she said with a gentle smile.

Something inside Zuko’s chest loosen a little, it wasn’t a familiar feeling. “Yeah… see you there. And, um… thanks.”

“Sure, anytime,” Moshi said as if it was the most casual thing ever.

 


 

“Explain to me one thing,” Moshi said while wiping the floor. “Why didn’t we try to find out what’s wrong with him?”

Ba rolled her eyes and pushed a fresh bucket of water into her arms. “He gets all weird and shy when the spotlight is on him about casual stuff. Whatever it was today, it wasn’t casual for him.”

Moshi aggressively put the mop into the bucket, the water splashed around. “He is weird and shy all the time and I thought we like him.”

Oke stopped dusting the shelf and grabbed her chin with her free hand. “Well, technically yes, but today he was weird differently. Usually, he was awkward-weird, today he was anxious-weird. Look… he hasn’t been flinching since we stopped touching him from the scarred side.”

“Really dumb of us when I think about it,” Moshi sighed pinching the bridge of her nose.

Ba nodded. “Complete dumbassery… Though we were tempted. His hair is so soft when you ruffle it. Carry on.”

“Agree, he had it coming,” said Oke and get back to the serious tone. “Today he flinched again – anxious weirdness,” she said as if it was a professional term.

Moshi continued cleaning.

They had decided not to speculate about Lee too much because if they start they wouldn’t stop before finding out everything. The guy was private and there was a lot to discuss – his origin, scar, weird ex-employer, what happened to his parents… They loved good gossips but this time they stopped themselves.

“For the record, he’s not weird and shy all the time,” Ba said.

Oke raised her brow and smirked at her twin. “Secret dates we don’t know about? I thought you like older guys.”

Ba took a slow inhale and ignored what Oke just said. “When you idiots were planning that riot, we talked about a play,” she explained. “Lee spoke in long sentences. He might’ve even said more than me because I had to hide how stunned I was.”

“Lee? The scribe? Long sentences? That’s some real bullshit,” Moshi said categorically.

“Also,” Oke asked with a raised finger, “it classifies under weird. You were discussing a play.”

Ba threw a wet cloth in her chest. “Fuck off.”

Three of them giggled like maniacs during the cloth war. The enthusiasm disappeared when they had to clean the wet floors.

 

 


 

“Can I ask you something?”

The tailor’s hands didn’t stop taking her measures. “Of course, Miss.”

Toph wasn’t sure what the ask should sound like. Before the tailor came to her room, she hadn’t meant to ask anything at all. But now she was there, and Toph liked her. When Toph was younger the tailor used to tickle her when she was working on her new dumb dresses.

She was never a fan of evasion, so she chose to be straightforward. “How do I make friends?”

The tailor’s hands stopped for a second. “There is no one answer for that,” the lady said. Toph liked how she was hardly ever surprised or moved by what people said to her. She had witnessed the tailor listening to her mom’s really weird wishes. “Every friendship is different.”

Toph frowned and huffed. It wasn’t helpful.

The tailor chuckled. “Do you have someone specific in mind?”

Toph hesitated about sharing this but they were alone in the room, and the tailor wouldn’t tell anyone. “That new scribe… Lee. I’ve talked with him a few times but I don’t think he likes me.”

“What makes you think that?”

She couldn’t exactly say that by this point Scribey was probably afraid of her… “Um… when we talk, and we don’t talk much in the first place, he always kind of wants to flee from the conversation. I’m not sure how to describe it.”

“Who started those few conversations?” the tailor asked still poking around her dress.

“I did.”

“And who was talking more?”

Toph frowned. “Me, probably… It’s hard to get him to talk. He’s always stressed.”

The lady chuckled softly and started wrapping Toph with a new layer of fabric. “And did you let him speak at his own pace, or did you push him to do it?” she asked, but she already knew the answer.

Toph did her best to scowl at her. “The second one,” she muttered.

The tailor changed the fabric binding Toph and stepped away, probably looking for some pins.

“Personally, I don’t know Lee too well,” she started talking and fastening the silk. “But I know a group of maids is on a good way to be friends with him. I heard their beginnings weren’t easy either.” Toph wondered if the maids threatened him too… She slowly started seeing mistakes she had made. “Lee is an anxious kid and you are a daughter of his employer, Toph. It’s just my guess but that might be a factor why he seems stressed.”

Toph nodded even though she couldn’t fully understand it. Their relationship had nothing to do with his work as a scribe… Fine, it kind of had – he’d make that form for her. But did he think she would snitch to her dad? Ridiculous. Why would she?

“How old is he anyway?” Toph asked after another person called him a kid, while his voice didn’t sound childish at all.

“Sixteen I believe, but you may ask him about this yourself,” the lady said, finally taking away the heavy fabrics. “Try to listen to him, not demand things. You are observant. You should learn reading him quick enough.”

Toph cracked a smile. “Was that a blind joke?”

“Of course not, Miss,” the tailor answered with an obvious lie and amusement.

 


 

Zuko’s head wasn’t doing much better but at least his inner flame enjoyed the afternoon sun. A lot of staff members decided to go to the town for the celebration, so the garden was serene. The girls sat behind his back on the boulder while Zuko decided to rest on the ground leaning over the stone. The maids’ discussion was about gardening or gardeners? Zuko wasn’t sure and he didn’t need to know.

He felt calmer knowing that Mr. Beifong wasn’t around – at least Lee’s problem wasn’t an urgent matter. Zuko closed his eyes, enjoying the sun, and trying to fight off anger and shame. Or at least dull it to the previous bearable levels.

“Hi, Chung!” Moshi said suddenly. Zuko didn’t know the name, so he opened his eyes only to see one of Toph’s guards standing in front of him. “What’s up?”

The guard smiled at her and glanced at Zuko. “Miss Beifong send me to ask if Lee is up for another walk.”

Zuko felt his heart try to break his ribs.

“Um… Chung,” Moshi started without losing a beat, “I don’t think it’s a good idea. Lee is feeling a little – “

“I will go, Sir,” Zuko interrupted before Moshi could get in trouble for defending him.

Zuko climbed to his feet and for a second the world started spinning – fast movements and lack of sleep wasn’t a good combination. He had no idea what the girl wanted but one way or another she would get it. Zuko just would like to know the ground he was standing on before it slips from under his feet.

“Lee,” Moshi looked at him with concern, “I’m sure Miss Beifong will understand that – “

“It’s fine,” he said rapidly and turned to the guard. “I’m ready to go, Sir.”

Zuko avoided looking at the guard’s face. “Sure… This way, kid.” He pointed the direction with his arm and they both started walking. “Miss is in the main garden.”

Zuko nodded, trying to keep his breathing under control. What was the worst that could happen? A lot. With his damned luck… Zuko kept his gaze on the ground, from the corner of his eye he noticed Toph with the company of the other guard.

“I’m glad you came,” she said. Zuko wasn’t sure what he was supposed to respond but she continued. “We will be fine. I know this garden, I’ll show Lee around.”

“Of course, Miss,” said the guard. “As always, we will be nearby.”

Toph nodded to the guard and with a slow motion she grabbed Zuko’s forearm. He let her lead him towards the ponds, focusing on breathing calmly, getting ready for whatever she wanted to say. He thought about speaking first but it never ended well.

“I hope you can hear me with that crazy heartbeat because I’m not going to repeat myself,” she announced when they stopped in front of one of the ponds. “I’m sorry for being a bully during our every conversation, Scribey. I’m not used to… to this. And now, I see how it looked. Not see-see but I hope you get what I mean…”

“You, um…” Zuko had to clear his throat before speaking further. “You aren’t mad?”

“No. I was mad but I shouldn’t have been,” she said. “Someone made me realize that after you helped I never really listened to you. I was just doing what I wanted.”

This… This was not something Zuko had expected.

Toph rubbed her elbow, her milky eyes focused on the ground. “I want you to like me, not fear me. I – I’m really sorry for the last time.”

Zuko was speechless, but he had to say something. Toph wasn’t reminding him of Azula anymore. Right now, she actually looked vulnerable and insecure, waiting for his reaction. Azula didn’t know those words. Zuko knew them too well.

Zuko felt his heartbeat slowing down. “I – that’s, um… fine. I – I’m… thanks.”

Toph chuckled at his words. “I believe you only because I can feel your heart.” She took a small pebble from the ground and threw it into the water. “Can you tell me why you don’t want to go?” she asked, the same insecure tune easy to hear in her voice.

“I’m not going to risk my job,” Zuko said. And life, was left unsaid.

“I never got caught, Scribey,” she said affronted.

“What would happen if you did? Theoretically.”

She was toying with the silk over her shoulders. “I would get grounded for the rest of my life. And they wouldn’t catch me.”

“If they caught me with you I would surely get fired. I have nowhere to go, Toph.” Saying this out loud was hard but he did it anyway. Maybe the lack of sleep had something to do with this newfound openness. “And I doubt I would get away unpunished…” He decided to cut the details of his dark scenarios. He was still talking with a twelve-year-old child. No matter how mature she seemed. “It’s a risk not worth taking. Sorry.”

Toph was quiet for a moment. “I understand,” she said and raised her chin so her milky eyes were staring at him. “But… but if it wouldn’t be risky, would you want to go?”

The answer to that wasn’t simple. As he’d found out, he still wasn’t fine with earthbending. Pathetic. Maybe seeing Toph bend and forcing himself to be close would help.

“I would,” he answered ignoring the light pulsing in his leg. Zuko hoped the statement wasn’t a lie.

Toph nodded slowly and smiled. “That’s cool.”

She picked up another pebble and formed it into a new shape. Zuko tensed a little and scolded himself for that. Toph reshaped the stone again, and this time, Zuko just curiously looked at the stone smoothly moving in her palm.

“I would want to be a better listener but you are a terrible talker.”

Zuko’s lips twitched. “I’ve been told that.”

“So, unless you are in the mood to tell me something so I can practice listening, I can tell you about the tournament,” she said and added, “If you’d like.”

“I would like that,” he said honestly.

It sounded like something Zuko-before-the-North-Pole would’ve take a part in. Especially if the Avatar would be a trophy, he thought bitterly and cracked a sad smile at that poor sarcasm.

So many things changed.

 

 

 

Notes:

This chapter was a backslide for Zuko's anxious thinking but I think it was natural. All his dark scenarios and stuff weren't totally rational but it was more trauma speaking. I would gladly hear what you think about it.

TOPH! did some serious character development in this chapter. I like how she can be badass and vulnerable at the same time <3

Maids totally opened secret Lee (Zuko) support club (the tailor is a part of the club too)

I resolved the entire 'conflict' in this chapter without leaving Zuko miserable for any longer and I think it deserves a comment. We all know how much I love cliffs. Just saying 😏

Chapter 10

Notes:

Rumble time!

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

Lee made a simple request look like a military order. He wasn’t obligated to walk with Miss Beifong, especially when he felt under the weather. Moshi tried to talk him out of it but it made him only more determined to go with the guard. All they could do was exchanging concerned glances and continuing their conversation.

Lee came back to the garden before the sunset. His shoulders were slumped, he looked exhausted for the entire day, so it wasn’t surprising. He seemed disoriented when he stopped in the middle of his shuffling to rub his eye and yawn. Ba waved at him to catch his attention.

“How was the walk?” Oke asked when he approached.

“Nice.”

Classic Lee and his long sentences, she thought and chuckled.

Unfortunately, Lee noticed it. He glanced at her uncertainly and lowered his gaze on the ground. The poor guy was an embodiment of insecurity, it was challenging for Moshi to limit her actions that could be interpreted ambiguously. She wasn’t laughing at him… well, kind of, but not exactly.

Ba sent her a murderous glare. All three of them were getting better at recognizing the younger scribe’s reactions. Moshi was an only child, but for the past week, she felt oddly sisterly.

“Miss Beifong likes you,” she said the obvious with a smile. Lee shrugged; his cheeks already flushed. This guy… “So, what a scribe and a little noble girl talk about for over an hour?”

“Just stuff,” he said, trying to tame a  yawn. “She showed me the garden. It’s pretty… I like the ponds.”

“Gardeners hate those,” Oke said, discreetly winking at Moshi. “They say it’s a nightmare to keep them clean.”

“They do a good job,” Lee said, yawned,  and rubbed his both eyes.  “Um… I think I will try to get some rest.”

“Sure. Do you want us to wake you for the dinner?”

Lee shook his head. It wasn’t his brightest idea, he winced and started rubbing his temples instead of his eyes. “No, thank you. I ate with Toph in the garden.”

After barely two meetings Lee abandoned formalities with the Miss but he was stiffly sticking to sirs and ma’ams with everyone else. A weird choice but in his style.

“Sleep tight,” the twins said in their creepy synchronized choir.

Lee gave them his brand-shy smile. His general exhaustion made it even more awfully cute than usual. After he disappeared in the building and he couldn’t hear them Moshi asked, “How is he making every simple gesture look so… I don’t know… precious?”

“Because it looks like he’s doing those for the first time,” Ba said.

Could it get sweeter and sadder at the same time, Moshi asked herself.

 


 

Toph managed to drag Scribey for another walk a day before the tournament. They wandered through the main grounds again. Scribey’s heartbeat was almost normal – she took it as a win.

“The tournament is tomorrow,” she said preparing the ground.

“Yeah… I know. Good luck.”

Toph took a deep breath. “You can go as an audience and see me in action. If they catch me – even though they won’t – you won’t risk the job or whatever.”

Scribey’s heart speeded like it often did when he was surprised by something. Slowly, Toph started to learn his specific reactions. He wasn’t saying anything for a while, Toph hoped he was really thinking about it. It was nice to tell him about her bending, training, and fights, but she really wanted him to see that. Maybe after that, he would agree for –

“I’m sorry but I won’t go,” he said flatly.

Out of instinct, she wanted to get mad at him, but she thought about the tailor’s advice.

“You gonna miss a real show,” she said, hoping that it sounded casual, that the hurt tune wasn’t there.

Scribey was nice and he was a really good listener, but his paranoid precautions were really getting on her nerves. She was almost sure he knew some stuff about fighting. The questions he’d asked during her tournament report were too specified to come from a layman.

“You sure?” Toph really wanted to share the moment with someone.

“Yeah…” he said raising his hand up, probably to scratch his neck. “I don’t trust my luck.” The way he spitted the last word was quite concerning.

Toph nodded. It was fine. She couldn’t just tell him to do stuff… At least, she would have more things to tell him about after she wins another champion title. It wouldn’t be as cool as he witnessing it, but it was fine too.

“Umm… It’s not that I don’t want to… I mean you are right about the job. That I can’t risk and um – “ Toph frowned in his general direction. She couldn’t get why he got all twitchy when she wasn’t pressing the matter. “What I want to say is um…”

“What are you talking about?” she interrupted his mumbling.

“Uh – um… nevermind. Sorry. That… I’m not going to see you win, I mean.”

He definitely tried to say something but decided against it. Toph was an earthbender which meant she was patient. Scribey’s weirdness was a challenge she would overcome with time. Right now, she had to focus on the tournament.

“You should be sorry for the dudes I’m gonna smash into the dirt.”

Scribey chuckled lightly. “I’m sure you will.”

 


 

The next day in the office Zuko still thought about the last conversation with Toph.

He was curious about the girl’s performance in the tournament, and if her level of confidence really matched her skills. She was right that as a normal audience the risk would be low, especially if he would use his remnants of stealth skills.

Zuko wasn’t any good at reading people but the disappointment on Toph’s face when he’d refused was obvious even for him. He wanted to explain the other reason why he didn’t want to go, but the confession had died in his throat. Zuko didn’t want Toph to think that it was her fault.

Zuko couldn’t know how his wretched mind would react to so much combat bending. The fear was weak and pathetic – he knew that. He shouldn’t be like that anymore. Not after his leg almost healed and he was – more or less – capable of the eventual fight back.

Admitting that felt like finding excuses.

Zuko would probably challenge himself if it was only one of the two inconveniences. He was tired of being scared of something all the time. Though – maybe – Uncle would be proud of how careful he’s become. Zuko’s throat clenched at the mention of Uncle.

His thoughts got interrupted by Eva walking towards his desk. Zuko took a deep breath, preparing for whatever she wanted to say. This woman had a way of getting on his nerves and, technically, he couldn’t just yell at her.

“Tell me,” she said nonchalantly leaning over his desk.  “What do you think you are doing?”

Zuko glanced between her and the papers scattered on his desk. “I – um… I’m completing those forms, Ma’am.”

She huffed at him angrily. “You clearly have a problem with choosing milieu… First, dust peasants, now, futureless nobility.”

Zuko gawked at her. “I – what?”

“Beifong’s daughter is a waste of time,” she said, not even lowering her voice so other scribes wouldn’t hear that. “You must be stupid if you think pitying her will bring you any favors.”

“Pardon?” Zuko sputtered in the prince’s tone he hasn’t been using for a while. Eva furrowed her brows, taken aback by his attitude. “I’m not pitying anyone. And my acquaintances are my concern.”

“It’s painful to watch when you make such terrible choices.”

“So stop watching,” Zuko growled, holding the eye contact.

Eva chuckled humorlessly. “Youngster thinks he knows life better than a venerable woman. The way you speak already shows the peasants influence on –“

“Eva, just shut up,” said the scribe from the desk on the right, the one which whom Zuko had unreadable-papers-deal. “And leave the boy alone.”

Zuko gawked at the scribe, who just defended him, in pure disbelief.

“Excuse me?” Eva asked affronted.

“The lad wants to eat with cheeky girls? That’s his choice. He wants to watch the ponds with a blind girl? He wastes his own time. Though, I doubt the boss would be pleased if he heard how you speak about his daughter.”

“What’s the meaning of this?” Eva asked with a full scowl on her face.

The scribe rolled his eyes and put completed papers on the stack with much more force than necessary. “The meaning is that you criticize a teenager for talking with other teenagers. We are three times his age. Did you like being patronized by some old bags?”

“How did you call me?”

“I called us old bags,” he said leaning in his chair, looking at Eva with amusement. “The lad is actually too polite to call you that, so I’m doing it for him.” The man smiled falsely, which made Eva’s face turn red. “As long as the little womanizer doesn’t bring any of those maids to sit on his knee while he writes I couldn’t care less. You should too.”

Zuko felt his cheeks heat after another stupid comment but at least Eva got back to her desk without another word. Zuko glanced at the scribe who was writing his papers as if nothing happened, the others in the room completely ignored the quarrel. Zuko got back to his work as well, until he found a form full of scratches. He stood up as quietly as he could, not to get Eva’s attention, and walked to the desk next to him.

“I have another one,” he said to get the scribe’s attention. The man nodded and started choosing forms for the exchange. “Um… also, thank you,” Zuko added quietly.

The man smirked. “Inferring from the tone of your ‘pardon’ it wouldn’t have gone well… Old Eva’s heart wouldn’t take being scolded by some stripling,” he said and handed Zuko the papers. “Also, she’s too puffed up even for me, and I am pretty puffed up myself.”

A soft chuckle came from one of the front rows.

Zuko wasn’t sure what to think of that exchange. Though – as much as he didn’t like it – he saw some similarities between the way he’d been referring to people during his banishment and the way Eva spoke of the ones below her status.

A new kind of shame was all he needed, Agni fucking damn it

 


 

Toph threw herself on the bed after she sneaked back to her room. She wanted to yell but everyone around was asleep. She considered going to Scribey but she’d invaded his room at night enough times.

It just wasn’t possible! Whatever that kid did… It shouldn’t be possible! No earthbender moved like that!

And what was the deal with the weird things he’d said?

Toph was too angry to think about that. She let her face sink into the pillows and released a loud growl. After all, it was good that Scribey hasn’t seen that.

 


 

Toph couldn’t fine Scribey anywhere in the garden but – of course –  she found Twinkle Toes. Faking being scared in front of the guards has never felt so good. The cheater and his little band almost tripped when they ran back to the wall.

Toph smirked and went back to the house with the guards. She doubted she would find Scribey today, not with her schedule of dumb lessons and even dumber meals.

Twinkle Toes was delusional… with his talk about magic swamps and visions…

What was a vision? She was blind! She couldn’t care less about some visions.

And what was the business with being Avatar and defeating some Fire Noob? Toph literally didn’t care. As long as this fire dude wouldn’t show at the Earth Rumble Seven.

She had a lot of news to discuss with Scribey…

 


 

Zuko massaged his aching neck on his way to the doc’s office. Clipboard has gone mad. There was no other explanation for the enormous number of due dated forms he’d brought today. No one finished everything assigned to them, even though they had been writing for an extra hour. Zuko was almost glad that he would be too busy with his leg to think about the huge stack still waiting for him on the desk.

He pulled the handle to the office but the door was closed. Weird. The man was usually in the office when Zuko came for the tortures. If not for the fact that his leg really felt better after all the pain, Zuko would turn around and hide in his room. Instead, he leaned over the wall and crossed his arms, waiting for the doc.

After a moment, the man emerged from behind the corner with a huge bag in his hand. The short man’s steps were angry, his steps echoing on the entire floor.

“Sometimes I wonder if sacrificing one idiot would make other idiots smarter,” he growled, angrily putting the key into the lock. “I will fucking try the next time.”

Zuko cleared his throat. “What happened, Sir?”

The doc opened the door and nudged Zuko inside. He wasn’t enthusiastic about the torture session with a clearly angry sadist. It had hurt as fuck when the man was in a good mood.

“The Blunt Mowers mistook the shrubs they were supposed to cut with their fingers,” he growled throwing the bag onto his desk. “I don’t even know for how long I was trying to remove the fucking splinters without cutting their hands off. It would be less troublesome.”

The doc mentioned cutting something off way too casually for Zuko to be comfortable with it. “I  - I, um… I can come back tomorrow?” he proposed.

“Nonsense. After hours of precise work pushing my fingers as hard as I can, sounds like entertainment,” he said with too much enthusiasm. “Pants off and jump on the table.”

Zuko complied. After a moment, the man rolled his sleeves before putting the disgusting substance on his leg. At least, all the bruises that appeared after the rougher sessions disappeared and his bad leg looked almost like the good one.

“For the record,” the man said, after the classical warm-up he did before every massage, “I’ve planned this before the gardeners pissed me off.”

Zuko half-sat on the bench, leaning on his elbows, so he could glare at the doc. “Planned what?”

“I want to inflict your leg quite robustly today to get rid of the fragments of scar tissue that are still there. It’s not as extensive as it was two weeks ago… What I’m saying is that it might be your less favorite session.”

As if Zuko had a fucking favorite torture session…

He sighed and laid on his back. Zuko was pretty sure the less favorite torture session award belonged to the North.

 


 

Zuko’s jaw hurt from gritting it so tightly.

A while ago, when the warmup ended, he hid his face in the bend of his elbow. Zuko didn’t want to see how deep the man’s fingers were pushing. He felt every time the slides found one of the bumps on his muscle and then poked fucking deeper…

“Are we still breathing, lad?”

The man changed the line he was working on, it’d already happened before. The beginning was bearable before the real pain started. Zuko used the moment to relax his jaw, still covering his face with his arm.

“Couldn’t it just heal normally?” Zuko growled. “Without all of this shit being necessary.”

The doc chuckled. “I’m glad you finally admitted my shit, as you called it, helps.” Zuko raised his elbow for a second to glare at the man. “But, boy, seriously… Can you fully open your left eye?”

Zuko was taken off guard by the sudden question. He didn’t want his face to betray his feelings connected to the scar, so he didn’t move his elbow, even though he wanted to glare at the man so fucking bad.

“No.”

“Exactly,” said the doctor, his hands rubbing forceful circles close to Zuko’s hip. “Because it’s covered with a scar.”

“It’s different.”

“The origin of the scar is not the point here,” the man said, moving his hands lower towards Zuko’s knee. “The point is that it fucked up the mobility –“

The man stopped speaking when someone knocked.

“Do you mind witnessing a murder of a clumsy gardener?” the doc asked, stopping his hands in the middle of Zuko’s thigh.

“Um, no?”

“Good,” he said quietly and then turned his head to the door. “Get in!” he yelled.

“What?!” Zuko hissed in protest but the doc quieted him with a jab to the aching spot. He had to clench his teeth to tame a moan.

He was laying pantless in the middle of the tortures. He thought the doc committing murder or helping someone else would give him a break from pain and the uncomfortable topic.

Zuko didn’t want anyone to witness that!

The door opened slowly. Zuko decided to pretend he wasn’t here, just laying flat, with the arm over his face.

“Uh, hello – “

Fuck. Fuck. Fuck.

Zuko recognized the voice.

 

 

 

Notes:

There is new amazing art on my tumblr send by Tilda! Check it out, it's a scene from Rock Bottom. Great thanks for the artistic soul. I love arts!

Oh well? Cliff, huh? 😈😈

Comment theories if you have some, I love to read them! I would love to hear all rants and everything you might have come up with during reading! Maid's support club is working... Zuko has a friendly scribe... Would be bad if it ended wouldn't it?

Also, I'm *turning a blind eye* on the timeline... I mean I guess for now it works but I won't care if I make something slightly shorter or longer in the future :** I'm the king here f*** timeline all the way.

comment! predictions/thoughts/asks I'm waiting for all kind of feedback like starved Zuko on Xaalo's porch

Chapter 11

Notes:

Call me speed (again)

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“But Katara!” Sokka whined, sitting on a bed close to the window currently filled with Appa’s head. How could he know it would end like this? Katara was just being mean. It wasn’t his fault.

His annoyed sister stood in the middle of the room, with her hands on her hips, glaring right at him. “You ate more than Appa!”

“That’s not true!” he grumbled. First of all, it was rude to compare him to the sky bison, second of all, Appa ate hay! It was easier to digest than the fancy, ridiculously tasty noble’s food.

Aang was petting Appa’s nose, looking somewhere between amused and concerned by Sokka’s misery. “You ate a lot, Sokka. Maybe not as much as Appa though.”

Aang gave the bison’s nose two pats which granted him a lick that made Sokka’s stomach turn. Anything connected to food made his belly hurt. It was cruel – he loved food. And those muffins that servants left on the table just two meters from him looked really delicious.

“Can’t you just heal me?”

Katara gave him that motherly look of her. “You want to eat those muffins.”

Rude. She didn’t even put it as a question. “No, I want my healer sister to heal me.”

“Ugh! Sokka, I can’t just heal you after that. It’s not how it works.”

“Just like you couldn’t with those hooks in my thumb!” he growled, pointing at the two fair scars on his finger.

“I didn’t know I could heal back then!”

Aang left Appa’s side to stand between them as if they would start to fight. “Guys… Don’t yell, it’s stressing Momo.”

Sokka glanced at the stupid lemur who was doing ogle eyes at the muffins, completely ignoring them. “No, it’s not.”

 Aang grinned guiltily while Katara rolled her eyes.

“You know what? Fine. Saving the world? All the time. Healing Sokka? I can’t do this,” he mimicked Katara’s voice and the way she held her hands on her hips. He stood up from the bed and marched to the door. “Three muffins are mine,” he growled and left.

 


 

Katara glanced at Aang after the door slammed. The monk looked upset, his eyes big and glassy, probably already thinking about going after her dumb brother.

“Is he mad?” Aang asked.

Katara shook her head and took one of the muffins. “He’s not. Sokka’s just dramatic when food is involved. Don’t worry.”

Aang returned to Appa’s side. “He ate a lot before Toph throw the soup at me, and later that desert…”

Katara’s fingers were sticky with the sweet, fruity filling of her muffin. “Maybe it will teach him something,” she sighed and took another bite.

“Will you leave some for him?”

“I will,” she assured. “We don’t want to fight the Fire Nation and Sokka.”

 


 

Sokka felt slightly better after a short walk, but not good enough to taste the rest of the muffins. Besides, he wouldn’t go back without solving the problem himself. He would show Katara where she could stick her magic water. Also, the Beifongs’ house wasn’t a bad place for a little sightseeing. Sokka hoped he would find the way back to their guests’ room.

He entered a little less decorated corridor crowded with people. Sokka knew he should ask someone where he could find a healer, but those people didn’t look approachable. The guy with a clipboard was growling at anyone that came near him; one guy’s sideburns made him look like Douchebag Zhao, so avoiding him was obvious; the old lady’s bun looked like it could eat him alive.

Was this staff made of the creepiest people they could find? Was it a requirement?

Sokka spotted two girls, they were jogging as far away from the yelling guy as possible. Sokka ran after them, his stomach didn’t like it.

“Hello, excuse me!” Sokka said loudly when all three of them escaped the man's eyesight. The girls turned and… Oh… they looked the same. Was he hallucinating? No, they weren’t moving in sync, he was pretty sure a hallucination would do that. “Um... do you work here?”

The girls – twins, not hallucination you idiot – looked at each other and then on their clothes. It was a weird thing to do… Oh… their uniforms had the Beifongs’ emblem.

“We do,” one of them said. “And you are?”

He did a little wave with his hand. “Sokka. Hi. I’m just a guest looking for a healer.” His stomach felt like it was ready for the second wave of crumps. He wished he had Gran’s ugly syrup.

“Straight that corridor, two times left, the second door on the right,” said the twin on the left.

“Isn’t now the time of Lee’s appointment?” asked the twin on the right.

The first shook her head. “He should be done by now, though everything is a mess today.”

It was the time for Sokka’s retreat. It was pretty possible that the giant bison and sudden dinner party for the Avatar was a reason for this mess. “Thanks, nice talking,” he said as he went in the pointed direction.

 


 

Sokka hoped he found the right door. He feared what weird things he could find in this huge house.

“Uh, hello – “

Sokka barely stepped through the doorstep when someone asked, “Are you dying?”

“I – no?”

“Then you have to wait.”

Sokka had a feeling he should’ve said he was dying…

There were two people in the room. The man who asked him a question had rolled up sleeves and round glasses almost falling of his nose. He wasn’t paying attention to Sokka because his hands were busy with… With touching other’s guy leg.

Tui and La… what?!

The second dude was laying on the table on his back without his pants – thanks spirits he wasn’t naked. He was covering his face with one arm and the other one was clenching the edge of the table.

Sokka shook his head when he realized that he was gawking for too long at some pantless dude. Ugh… it was awkward. “So, um… are you a healer?”

The man didn’t look at Sokka, focused on poking his hands into this guy’s flesh. Was this guy alive? Why wasn’t he moving or saying anything? Sokka squinted looking at the dude’s chest. Fine – breathing meant alive.

“No, I’m a butcher.”

Sokka chuckled nervously, hoping that the pantless guy would chuckle too, as a confirmation that it was a joke. The guy on the table stayed motionless and silent. Sokka couldn’t even see his face. “A good one…”

“So why are you disturbing us?” the butcher-healer asked, his hands still on the dude’s leg.

“I didn’t know you do…um, whatever you do.” Really… What was this weird scene about? “I wanted to ask for some pill or syrup for stomachache.”

Sokka noticed how the pantless dude clenched his fist over the edge of the table when the butcher-healer moved his hands lower. The guy had quite muscular legs… Stop watching him, you idiot! Besides, Sokka’s legs were just as muscular.

“After I finish with that part.” The man glanced at Sokka. “Who are you, kid?”

“I work with the Avatar,” Sokka said, standing a little prouder despite the cramps. How could the man find the dude’s leg more interesting than that?! “We are just staying the night... What is that you two… um, doing?”

“I’m relaxing. Lee is not.” As if on cue the dude made a muffled groan, his hand gripping the table really hard. “Sorry, lad… This spot was really messed up.”

This… this room was so uncomfortable place to be. Sokka sat on the chair next to the man’s desk, it was less awkward than standing in the middle and gawking at the weird scene.

“Maybe you can tell me where I can find the medicine and I will leave you two alone?”

“So you can poison yourself?”

“You have poisons here?” Sokka asked suspiciously.

The man glanced at Sokka over his shoulder with an evil smile. “Maybe I do.” The pantless dude gasped and the psycho turned his attention to him. “I’m surprised by your good manners. If we were alone, you would brag with your sailor’s vocabulary.”

The guy – Lee – ignored the psycho, turning his face further away from Sokka. If it was an awkward situation for Sokka, it had to be even worse for him. After all, he was the one who laid without his pants in the grasp of the butcher-healer-psycho.

“Don’t mind me. Just do your… um, thing? I’m totally fine with it. Just a casual evening.”

Sokka hoped that their thing would end fast… He would murder Katara if she ate all of the muffins. He looked around at suspicious might-contain-poison lockers, fidgeting with his fingers, trying not to gawk at the weird scene on the table. It was rude that the guy didn’t even say hi, but, technically, Sokka hadn’t either.

“So, what I was about to say before we got interrupted was that scars limit motion range. Scarring in your leg isn’t visible, of course, but it’s there. This kind of treatment reduces it. It wouldn’t work with the face though… I could squeeze it all day and it wouldn’t change shit.”

Sokka couldn’t help getting intrigued by what the man said. He didn’t know scars can be beneath the skin, he bet Katara didn’t either. Also, the dude must have a facial scar. Was it the reason he was hiding his face from Sokka’s view?

His fist was clenched tight, even though the healer’s pressing looked lighter than before. Damn… did Sokka make him more uncomfortable by being there when the doc talked about it? He couldn’t explain a weird fellowship he felt with the dude… Maybe it was because thanks to him Sokka wasn’t alone in the room with the butcher-healer? Yeah, it was probably it.

He cleared his throat, leaning over the back of the chair. “I have a scar too. It’s on my thumb. I was fighting with a wild animal.” Fishhooks were almost like wild animals.

“Fascinating,” the man said flatly.

Sokka wouldn’t let himself be discouraged by his attitude. “My point is that you don’t have to hide your face because of the scar. They are manly. And besides, you can’t have it worse than this one guy I saw a while ago. Really, he had it huge and he wasn’t – “

“Water Tribe,” the man interrupted Sokka’s coming rant about Prince Jerk’s haughtiness. He stopped rubbing circles around the guy’s leg. He was looking at his face, probably, from his spot he could see at least a part of it. Then he glared at Sokka. “Advice: quit gossiping about people’s scars.”

Sokka raised his hands in pacifying gesture. “I didn’t mean anything – “

“Shut up and let me finish this quickly so I can torment Lee in peace.”

Sokka was ninety percent sure he would get poison.

He stopped gawking at the two of them, focusing on the third wave of his cramps. From time to time the dude on the table made a quiet gasp. Sokka didn’t say anything bad but the doctor’s glare made him feel guilty. It was stupid. He just wanted muffins – and Avatar’s earthbending teacher for that matter – and he ended in a room with a psycho and a half-dressed dude.

That was his life now… All of that because Katara was a mean sister. Great.

The guy made the loudest moan and Sokka involuntary looked up. He bent the knee of the leg that wasn’t constantly touched, his fist clenched really hard on the edge of the table. Sokka winced himself – it looked really painful. He glanced at the psycho’s fingers; his thumb was half of its length in the middle of the dude’s leg. Ouch… Sokka rubbed his own – just as muscular – thigh.

“I think we dealt with this part,” the healer said patting the dude’s leg. “Catch a breath and I will deal with Mister Stomachache.”

Sokka realized that he kind of curled on the chair like a child, now, he was glad that the other dude wasn’t looking at him. He sat straight when the healer was taking something from one of the lockers.

“I assume you ate too much,” said the man holding a bottle in his hand.

“I didn’t eat that much,” Sokka denied. “Something with the food had to be off.”

“Of course.” The healer poured a few drops of the weird liquid into the glass of water. “To the bottom,” he said handing Sokka the glass.

“It’s not poison?” he asked sniffling the thing suspiciously.

“Poison would have a color.”

Sokka drank the might-be-poison. At least, Katara would feel guilty for not helping him if he died because of that. He didn’t want to be in this room any longer.

“Good boy,” said the man, taking away the glass. “Now get lost.”

Sokka threw the last glance at the table guy on his way to the door. His chest was raising a falling terribly fast. Poor dude… The moment Sokka is gone the psycho would get back to him. But what he could do? The dude wasn’t restrained or anything, he could run away if he wanted.

It wasn’t Sokka’s business. “So, thanks for the medicine, and have a nice… this thing.”

The guy obviously ignored him; the healer smiled viciously. “Have fun too.”

Sokka closed the door as fast as he could. Something in his gut turned in a new, disturbing way…

Tui and La… Did he really drink the poison?

 


 

Zuko couldn’t fucking believe it’d worked.

He’d been in one room with the water peasa… the boomerang boy without being compromised. He couldn’t fucking believe it. His so-called luck was seriously fucked-up.

The fucking Avatar was in the same building. Right now. He hadn’t been thinking about the monk for weeks if not months and now…

The Avatar was here.

Zuko released a shaky breath he didn’t know he was holding. A pat on his knee ripped him out of his thoughts… Right, the tortures weren’t finished yet.

“I’ve given him a small dose of laxative,” the doc said with a smirk. Zuko finally took his arm off his face, trying to breathe as deeply as he could. The Avatar was here. “Don’t let what he said bite you.”

“Wh – what?” Zuko’s throat became dry.

“The bullshit about scars.”

“Oh… yeah, right.”

Zuko had been completely ready for Boomerang to start describing his scar, then for the doctor getting suspicious, and finally, Boomerang revealing his identity completely. The comment did bite him, but on an utterly different level.

“I’m serious, kid.” The doc put a new portion of the oil on his burning thigh. “A lot of things shouldn’t be compared, and scars are one of them.”

The doc started warming up another area when Zuko tried to wrap his mind around everything. What was he supposed to do now?! He was safe in that room as long as the water idiot didn’t hurt himself again. Outside of the room? With his damned luck?! The waterbender and the Avatar could be around every corner.

Zuko gasped more openly when the doc found another scarred area.

“Were you hiding your face because of your origin?”

“Kind of,” Zuko muttered. “The Avatar isn’t exactly a fan of fire nation features.”

Especially his features.

“Probably not…” the doc admitted. “With being the only survivor of the genocide… this can’t bring good memories.”

This wasn’t right, said the voice in the back of Zuko’s head. He heard the term before, and he’d seen it in one of Mr. Xaalo’s books. In the face of all his problems, he just refused to overthink that.

“But for the record, I doubt the little monk would blame you for any of that. You weren’t even alive, and your blood is just partly fire.”

The worst thing was that Zuko knew that. Despite everything it was the Avatar that had asked him if they could be friends. Stupid naïve child… The descendant of the man that killed his people. Zuko would felt better if the Avatar simply hated him. This… this was confusing.

The Avatar – the only way home – was here.

For the rest of the massage, Zuko was glad for the pain – it was distractive. His head was a mess. He had no idea what to do. He’s never before wanted the agony session to last forever.

Was bringing the Avatar to the Fire Nation enough to erase… everything? Zuko was a traitor. And since he was alone in the Earth Kingdom he has only done more traitorous things. But… maybe? Maybe it would be enough to redeem himself.

The last weeks at Xaalo’s, the past week here… He was grateful for that time, and… and for the people, he met. Good people. He wouldn’t be alive if not for the kindness of the Earth Kingdom. The kindness showed to Lee. He hasn’t been thinking about getting back. He had nowhere to be back.

But the Avatar was here… It was hard not to follow his old ways.

Zuko gasped when a sudden pain pierced his leg. “Sorry… It’s the last spot for today.”

Zuko squeezed his eyes and nodded.

Why was he even thinking about this? What would he do? Grab a powerful bender and carry him on his back to the Fire Nation? He’d tried something similar before and it turned out disastrous.

As long as the Avatar and the water tribe didn’t know he was here, his Lee life was secured. He couldn’t know how would they react… He wanted this blessed simplicity to thrive a little longer. Why were they even here?! This couldn’t be predicted… Maybe the next time Zuko would be ready to do something… To get back to his old life, but not today.

 


 

This… this had been disgusting.

Sokka wanted to erase his time in the bathroom from his memory. The psychotic butcher really poisoned him! It was a miracle he was still alive! At least after all that happened – yuck, just don’t think about that – his stomach didn’t hurt anymore. Probably because it was totally empty.

It was a miracle that Sokka had found a bathroom. Now, he had to somehow get back to their room. It was a hazard but he decided to walk past the psycho’s room – it was the only way he knew, and it was better not to get lost here.

He carefully checked if the corridor was clear. Damn… Someone was there. With a racing heart, he glanced from around the corner once again. The pantless dude with his pants on.

“Hey!” he called him. The guy froze, his back turned at Sokka. “Do you know this doc is a psycho?! I’m glad you are alive – “

“Sokka?” Katara’s voice came from the opposite end of the corridor. “Where were you?!”

Sokka saw his sister when she noticed the guy. In a second she uncorked her waterskin.

“I’m here sis! What are you doing?”

The dude between him and his sister slowly turned, so he could see both of them at once. Sokka saw his profile. The scar.

Holy shit.

 

 

 

Notes:

*cliffhanger dance* 😈 it never gets boring

This whole concept is a little ridiculous but, honestly, (I tested) Sokka wouldn't see his face. And he had absolutely no reasons for expecting the dude to be Zuko. Also, gawking at a pantless guy is not ~manly~.

I love the psycho doctor even though he "poisoned" - yuck - Sokka.

Thank you for the huge number of comments under the last chap, don't be shy and break the record here 😆😆
No really, I'm really curious what you think about the absurd of this chap and Sokka's pov, it's been a long time and he literally couldn't shut up.

I doubt this cliff will be resolved that fast but who knows (no, I really doubt it)

Also, Zuko's thoughts at the end made me really sad. Poor guy is CONFUSED.

** also, it will stay gen fic 😆 Sokka's thoughts about Zuko's leg muscle came out from insecure teenage jealousness not the beginning of a gay crush 🤣 Just saying

Chapter 12

Notes:

Thank you for all the comments and reactions to the previous chap!!! It was just woahhhhhh <3 <3

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

Sokka has seen a lot of peculiar things in his short life – a pair of copulating turtle seals when he was just a four-year-old, Katara’s experimental cooking that looked as if it could eat him instead of the opposite, and of course, over a hundred-years-old monk frozen in the iceberg. From that moment in his life, Sokka has been ready for absolutely everything.

Yet his mind couldn’t wrap around the fact that he’d seen Prince Jerk laying without his pants, getting some weird things done to him.

Was the butcher-healer’s poison affecting his mind?

 


 

It took Katara a lot of time to find some peace after the siege. It had felt like an escalation of the raid when her mother died, her culture attacked by the cruel men, plenty of sorrow and loss. After they left Fong’s base, the same fear overwhelmed her once again. But with Aang’s vibrant energy and Sokka’s plans and bad jokes keeping their little group together, she’d overcome it.

Looking for the earthbending teacher for Aang wasn’t easy or safe. But she stopped thinking only about the worst scenarios, and let herself be dragged with Aang’s contagious enthusiasm.

Katara wanted to do everything she could to help Aang, and not to let the tragedy and destruction of the North Pole happen ever again.

She couldn’t believe her eyes when one of the faces from her nightmares stood between her and Sokka. The flood of questions rushed through her head…

Was Aang safe? Had Zuko already done something to her brother? Was it a trap? Why was Zuko here? How did he track them? How did he escape from Fong?

There was no time for answers. She uncorked her waterskin.

 


 

Zuko.

Prince Jerk was supposed to be in prison, not five meters away from Sokka. Fong turned out to be absolutely crazy in the matters of Avatar State but imprisoning Zuko was a mutual goal. During the last encounter with him he’d been harmless – the North took care of safe transport. Sokka still remembered the muzzle and how Jerk almost choked in it. Other than that, it had been an utterly awkward but calm flight. Even the time in the cave was all right and free of threats. An occasional glare and snarl had been manageable, amusing even.

But now?!

Sokka was ready to see flames at any second while the firebender wasn’t restrained. After Zuko turned, no one moved or spoke. Honestly, Sokka was surprised that Katara or Zuko – he was definitely more surprised about Zuko – didn’t attack.

They have gotten comfortable without worrying about Zuko jumping from behind a random tree. Well… they had a lot of other psychos to worry about, but one crazy prince less was still better than nothing.

Zuko kept turning his head – and glare – from Sokka to Katara, paying more attention to his sister. Sokka didn’t want to be the first one to be set on fire, but ignoring your former prison guard like that was just simply rude. He moved forward which gave him Zuko’s full attention. As Sokka moved closer, Jerk backed against the wall. There were a lot of things he wanted to ask before bending would be involved, but when he opened his mouth he realized a certain thing…

“You poisoned me!” Sokka’s voice echoed through the empty corridor.

Zuko glared at Sokka harder than before. “Wha – “

Water floated over Katara’s hands as she came closer. “He did what?!” Zuko was cornered by both of them. “Sokka, are you all right?” she asked glancing at him with worry.

“I had no idea what he gave you!” Zuko growled, his back pressed to the wall behind him. Still no flames.

“You think I’ll believe you? Getting rid of me must be a part of your plan!”

“Sokka, what happened?!”

Sokka stopped glare-battle with Zuko and look at his sister. “I’m all right. I’ve found out about this attempt on my life early enough.”

The puff of smoke came out of Zuko’s nostrils. “It wasn’t an attempt on your life, you idiot! And I had nothing to do with it!”

Katara saw the smoke, the water above her hands froze, forming itself into sharp ice daggers. Sokka saw Zuko clenching his fists, but no fire appeared.

“You tried to hurt my brother,” Katara accused in a terrifying low tone.

Zuko was breathing weird, just like on the pantless-table when the psycho had his fingers inside of his leg. Was it the firebending bullshit-breaths he’d talked about back then on Appa? “The doctor gave him some laxative because he ate too much.”

Katara’s ice melted as she raised her eyebrow at Sokka.

“So how do you know what he gave me?” Sokka queried.

“So that’s true?” Sokka refused to look at Katara right now. He was sure she had her ‘I told you so’ look that he hated.

“It’s obvious he told me after you left!” Zuko barked, another puff of smoke escaped his mouth. “I haven’t said a damned word when you were inside!”

“What were you and your psycho-butcher buddy doing in the first place?” Sokka exclaimed, trying to move this whole confrontation away from his time in the bathroom.

“That’s none of your business, Water Tribe.”

Sokka huffed, really surprised that nothing was on fire. “There’s the Prince Jerk I remember.”

Zuko’s face twisted in one of his angry scowls. Sokka was ready to become a torch at any second. But Jerk only gritted his teeth and turned to Katara. “Stop aiming at me! I’m not here to fight you.”

Katara laughed humorously, the water still floating above her hands. “Why are you here? How did you know we would come?”

“And how did you escape Fong?” Sokka added. He wished he had his boomerang with him, the suspense Jerk was creating by doing absolutely nothing wasn’t good for his nerves.

Zuko frowned at Sokka. “What?”

“Last time we’ve seen each other? Any bells? After the invasion, we caught you, bison-prison, Fong’s base?” Sokka listed. Did Jerk has amnesia?

“He – he hadn’t told you?” Zuko asked, every word pronounced really slow. His gaze jumping between them and finally, he shook his head. “I had no idea you would come here of all places!”

Sokka laughed. “You think we’re going to believe it’s a coincidence after you used to appear everywhere we went? What’s your plan this time? Was the psycho your buddy? Seriously, abandon this act and start throwing fire already because we are not gonna fall for this.”

Zuko growled under his breath.

It would be easier, and more familiar if they fought already. They had an advantage unless Zuko had more of his fire buddies somewhere around the corner. Waiting for the first flame was the worst… He glanced at Katara in her fighting stance, never looking away from Zuko.

The firebender’s weird breaths caught Sokka’s attention once again, but before he could do something about it, he heard steps behind him. Zuko was the main threat but Sokka wouldn’t want to be ambushed from behind by his fire buddies, so he turned.

A lady entered the corridor. Sokka wouldn’t take her for a Fire Nation spy at the first sight… She had similar clothing to the rest of the Beifongs’ staff and a piece of fabric over her shoulder. When she spotted them she crooked her head.

At the same moment, the door to the butcher’s office opened. Sokka’s heart and stomach did a weird thing. Without thinking what he was doing, he jumped as far away from the psycho as he could – which was almost shoulder to shoulder with Zuko.

The psycho smirked at him. “How’s your stomach, Water Tribe?”

Damn… did both of them were Zuko’s buddies? Now, their advantage was gone. Sokka glanced at Katara, her water still circling above her hands, she had to be thinking the same thing as Sokka.

“Hello, my dear,” the lady greeted the psycho-butcher. “I got bored waiting for you.”

“My apologies, technically, you should blame the garden idiots and Lee over there,” the man said and turned his eyes to Zuko. “What is going on here?”

“Nothing, sir,” Zuko said with a quiet rasp.

Sokka had to be delirious… What was that?! He gawked at Zuko but he couldn’t read anything from his facial expression because of the scar.

The psycho chuckled. “Really? Maybe you gonna tell me, Water Boy?”

Sokka’s tongue didn’t want to cooperate. What he was supposed to say?! Was this guy Fire Nation or did Zuko brainwashed him onto his side? Sokka gaped at Katara who looked even more clueless.

“For me, it’s two against one.”

“What?” Sokka spitted. Why did the psycho say it like he and Katara were the bad ones, not the crazy prince between them? “It’s him –“ Sokka gestured at Zuko who… flinched?

“Shut up, Water Boy,” the psycho growled. “What I see is you two gang up on a staff member –“

“He’s Fire Nation!” Sokka exclaimed. Were these people blind?!

“And you are a racist,” the psycho deadpanned. “I don’t care that you are the Avatar’s buddy.” The man pointed at Katara. “You, Fountain Girl, better not spill a single drop. The maids are very vengeful creatures and they are fond of this lad,” he said pointing at Zuko.

“It’s fine,” Zuko said. “We are just talking.”

The psycho chuckled. “Of course, Lee,” he raised his eyebrow at freaking Prince Zuko, not some Lee! “I’m serious, Water Girl, put that water back to that bottle of yours.”

Sokka looked at his sister who was just as equally dumbfounded. She put the water back into her pouch but her hand stayed close to the cork.

“Kids should be sleeping at this hour,” the psycho said in a stern voice. “Go to your rooms or I’m going to anesthetize you to sleep.”

The lady grabbed the psycho’s arm and winked at them. “He’s not joking.”

It was Zuko who moved first. He walked past them when they were too stunned by this whole situation to do anything.

“Goodnight,” Zuko muttered to the psycho and lady. “Sorry.”

And like that he stomped away.

The psycho glared at Sokka. “If I hear you two bothered him further I will find a real poison, Water Boy.”

“I – “ Sokka tried to say something but the psycho walked away holding hands with the lady.

Sokka looked at Katara with his mouth open agape.

“Was it all real? Or did he really poisoned me?” he asked.

Katara looked too stunned for it to only be Sokka’s hallucination. After a second she shook her head, panic crept over her face. She grabbed Sokka’s hand.

“Move! He walked away in Aang’s direction!”

 


 

Zuko heard them running through the staircase, so when a hand grabbed him from behind he was ready for the second round. Or as ready as he could be with his heart trying to break his ribcage. The little false life he had created wasn’t done collapsing yet.

“Stop right there!” Boomerang – Sokka – tried to yank him but Zuko just went along with the movement. Now, the boy was right in front of him, gripping the fabric over his shoulder. Zuko glanced at the waterbender on the right, it was her he feared more. “We are not letting you anywhere close to Aang.”

Zuko had gone beyond panic when he’d thought his identity would be revealed in front of the doctor and the tailor. But they had… defeated him. Or rather Lee.

It hadn’t changed shit. It was obvious from the looks the water siblings were giving him. Zuko was so fucking done.

“If I would want to go to the Avatar I would take the other turn,” he growled, barely stopping more smoke from leaving his mouth. Now, Sokka’s face was so close to his, that it could be taken as an attack. “I’m going to my room. What do you want?”

“Your what?!” the waterbender asked, her hand never leaving her porch.

“My room,” Zuko said, knowing perfectly clear that the time he could call it his room was coming to an end.

“Like… you really work here?” Sokka asked in disbelief.

Zuko gave him a slight nod. He didn’t owe them any explanation. Not this time. “What do you want?”

Sokka took his hand away from his shoulder and crossed his arms over his chest. “An explanation maybe? Oh… and also, Your Fireness back in prison where, I repeat, you should be! ” he bawled.

“Keep your voice down, for Agni’s sake,” Zuko hissed.

The Avatar hadn’t told them that he basically set Zuko free from prison…

He didn’t want to see the monk but the water siblings wouldn’t fucking believe his words. Not that it mattered when his cover was already seconds from blowing.

“Keep your ass in prison the next time and I will shut up!” the boy retorted.

A shiver ran down Zuko’s spine. The water aimed at him earlier and reminders of how his imprisonment ended weren’t helping with keeping some control over the situation. But he couldn’t be weak in front of them.

It was hard to keep composure when the water siblings seemed to remember the person Zuko had been before better than he did.

“Ask the Avatar why I’m not in prison,” he said carefully.

Zuko wanted to keep them from blowing his cover as long as he could. But not letting them drag him back to prison was a fucking priority.

It seemed they wouldn’t attack as long as he hadn’t. He wanted to keep it this way. Not only he was out of practice, his leg felt off fresh after the session, but most of all he didn’t want to fucking fight with them. What would be the point?

This time the girl huffed, in the same way, her brother did earlier. “You want us to lead you to Aang.”

“I’m not. I know he’s probably in the guest wing,” Zuko said, the look between the siblings told him his assumption was right. It wasn’t even that hard to deduce. They weren’t expecting him here, so the Avatar was in the most obvious place. “I could tell you the same story but you wouldn’t believe me.”

“Out of the two options I prefer to listen to your ridiculous lies than to lead you straight to Aang,” said Sokka.

Zuko took a calming breath that did nothing to slow his racing heart. “Fine.” He didn’t expect them to agree… He didn’t want to tell them about how he was beaten to unconsciousness, or what had happened before. The worst flashback of his life and the aftermath of it with Colonel Huong. No. Agni… let his pathetic lying skills somehow tell it without details. “I’m not going to talk here.”

The siblings glanced at each other. “Why not?” asked the boy.

“Someone might hear.”

“And realize that you aren’t Lee?”

Zuko gritted his teeth glaring at the boy. “Yes.”

“Sokka, this might be a trap,” said the girl.

Zuko would really want to be as good at planning as they thought he was. He pinched the bridge of his nose, his temples pulsing with a dull ache. “Then let’s go to your room, unless I’ve set a trap there as well. You will not believe me without the Avatar confirming my version.”

Sokka narrowed his eyes at him, Zuko had no problem with handling his glare. Actually, he was surprised how good his composure must’ve looked comparing to the shit rattling in his mind.

“Katara, come with me for a second,” said the boy and they both walked few steps away.

The waterbender kept an eye on him during their whole whispered conversation. Zuko crossed his arms, mostly to hide the tremble that started to show. The first shock passed and he started to think about the consequences… About the break that had come to an end.

In through the nose… Out through the mouth… Don’t lose control now…

The siblings turned to him. “Swear you will not attack Aang,” demanded the boy.

“I swear I will not attack the Avatar.”

Sokka raised his brow. “On your honor?”

“On my honor.” He hadn’t got much left anyway. The words didn’t carry the same weight anymore.

“Fine,” Sokka said and started undoing the wrapping around his forearm. “Better safe than sorry… So many memories, huh? Give me your hands.”

Zuko stepped back. “I am not going to let you tie me,” Zuko said categorically. “I am not your prisoner anymore.”

“Oh really, Lee?” Boomerang mocked. “Sorry for not trusting you.”

“I am not going anywhere with my hands tied,” growled Zuko. “Besides someone in the house might see that. Good luck with explanations,” he huffed humorlessly. Zuko had seen how the idiot had been scared of the doc.  “That might change who has an advantage in this situation. The staff knows me,” he said, all of that just bluff. Zuko was sure he wouldn’t be so lucky the second time.

Zuko could burn through the fabric in Sokka’s hands in a second. It was about having any control over this doomed situation. His chest felt too tight from forcefully controlling his frantic breaths. He saw how the siblings were debating, using only their stares.

“It seems the staff knows Lee, not you, Zuko,” the waterbender snarled his name as if it was a curse.

At which point those two became different people? He couldn’t tell, but there was some truth in it.

“Fine.” Sokka pointed his finger at him. “You try one fishy thing and we drag you straight to the prison.”

Zuko’s heart skipped a beat at the thought of stone walls cutting him away from the sun. “Fine,” he growled with as much confidence as he could muster.

 


 

They walked in a weird formation with Zuko quite close on Sokka’s right and Katara on Sokka’s left slightly in front of them, glancing at their not-prisoner every few seconds.

It was definitely Prince Jerk but something about him was different. Sokka couldn’t tell what exactly but the change was really triggering his gut feeling. He had to plan something with this whole Lee-thing... He was too sure that Aang's story would match his one – whatever the story was. Damn… Had they made a mistake taking him straight to Aang?

But they wanted some explanation!

Without Jerk attacking them first, it felt wrong to just knock him out and drag him back to the prison. The staff’s attitude towards Zuko was the most confusing of all of this. Well, the psycho-butcher was definitely crazy but the lady seemed normal. Sokka had seen her smiling fondly at Zuko. Also, what?! Zuko using polite phrases, not calling everyone around ‘peasant’?

Sokka had a really bad feeling about this. He glanced at the not-prisoner who was ignoring them… or planning something. Zuko had a real obsession with Aang. Sokka just couldn’t believe he would let an occasion like that slip. They outnumbered him in a fight but Sokka still felt uneasy.

It felt like a dirty move, but it was the guy that had tied his sister to a tree.

“Um… Katara.”

She turned her head, the tension visible in her whole posture. “Yes?”

“If Zuko tries something, aim at his left leg.”

“What? Why?”

“He’s injured there or something,” explained Sokka. From the corner of his eye, he noticed Zuko gritting his jaw. Other than that, he hadn’t reacted. Sokka still couldn’t comprehend the fact that it had been Zuko – pantless and gasping in pain. “I’ve seen in the psycho-doctor’s office.”

Katara nodded and kept walking.

Sokka’s gut still screamed that it was a terrible idea.

 


 

The Avatar was sitting on the bed petting his smaller animal. He grinned at his friends and parted his lips in surprise when he noticed Zuko. Whatever the monk wanted to say died in his throat.

“Aang, don’t panic,” said Sokka.

“I am not,” he answered, airbending his staff to his hand and jumping to his feet. “Are you guys hostages?”

“More the opposite,” said Sokka.

Zuko glared at him, careful not to give them any reasons to attack. “I’m not your hostage.”

“Why is Zuko our hostage?” asked the Avatar. “Oh, and hi, Zuko… It was rude not to start with that,” he grinned nervously.

Zuko crossed his arms, standing still as close to the door as possible without making it suspicious. The waterbender walked to the Avatar’s side without taking her eyes of him. Her brother stayed closer at the opposite side of the door. Zuko glanced at him when he saw a weird movement… He just discreetly picked up a holster with his boomerang.

Zuko leaned over the wall with crossed arms, not looking at anyone specific. This whole situation felt unreal. “Why are you here?”

The boy on Zuko’s right glared at him. “We are the ones asking – “

“We are looking for the earthbending teacher for me!”

Sokka made a weird sound, waving with his weapon. “Aang!” he scolded the monk. “Can you not tell our plans the enemy?!”

“I thought he’s our hostage now,” the Avatar said confused.

Zuko barely stopped himself from screaming. “I’m not a fucking hostage.”

“Language!” the waterbender rebuked, her hand gripping her waterskin.

Zuko wanted to scream all the curses he knew – after his time as a sailor and at Xaalo’s he knew plenty of them – but he realized something. “You… you want Toph to be your teacher.”

“How do you know her?” asked the waterbender.

“I’m working in this forsaken estate! How many times do I have to repeat that?!”

Sokka pointed his boomerang at him. “It’s your fault she doesn’t want to agree to teach Aang!”

“…What?” This was getting fucking ridiculous.

“It’s convenient for you when Aang doesn’t know other elements, isn’t it?” the boy said in a smug tone.

Zuko pinched the bridge of his nose. How could he believe it would work? He was a fucking naïve idiot in a room full of people that wanted him dead or imprisoned at least.

He took a shaky calming inhale. “Toph doesn’t know who I really am. It wouldn’t make any sense – “

“Who are you, Scribey?”

The little earthbender appeared in the doorway.

 

 

 

Notes:

Triple cliff!!!! sorry guys, remember that I adore you

4 fucking pages of comments.... it's so mindblowing 🖤🖤 I hope to hear from all of you again!!!!

Well... I don't know what to say. A lot of POVs. Our two main parties know shit about each other.
[*] - for Zuko's break

I'm so proud that Zuko learned to think before acting but I guess almost dying do that to people.

A quick applause for the true hero - the doc 🖤

I can't wait to see your opinions about the resolution of the previous cliff (and the current cliff). Any rants/screams comments on the WHOLE GAANG welcomed!!!
Can't wait to chat with you!

Chapter 13

Notes:

Hi! If you were here when I was updating Rock Bottom you probably remember how I was telling you that the next chapter would be the last one for like 7 chapters, right?

Now, I'm announcing that I'm fairly sure that we are behind the midpoint of this story.

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

 

 

The whole fucking Spirits’ World hated him.

Zuko felt as if someone put a boulder on top of his chest, he couldn’t take a deep breath anymore. It was making him fucking panic and he couldn’t do this right now. He wouldn’t be surprised if his frantic heart broke some of his ribs. This would fucking explain why he couldn’t inhale as much air as he needed…

“Scribey?” Toph tugged his sleeve.

Zuko snapped back to reality and looked at the worried face of the little earthbender. Then he looked around the room. The Avatar was staring at him with a worried wrinkle on his forehead, the waterbender stood close to him with his hand on her pouch. Only Sokka wasn’t looking straight at Zuko’s face but on the spot where Toph tugged his shirt.

“What is that?” Sokka asked in disbelief. “And – and what this Scribey thing means?”

“Really?” asked Toph. “It’s not even a complicated nickname. You know… he’s a scribe.”

“This is not my hallucination…” Sokka muttered under his breath. “That means either Zuko’s plan to capture Aang is really good or he’s actually working here.”

Hearing his name, Zuko saw some dark spots dancing over his vision and he forced his collapsed lungs to take another inhale. It was over. He wouldn’t persuade them to not reveal his identity when they already did it.

Toph stopped holding his sleeve and crossed her arms. “Wait… Who’s Zuko?”

Sokka burst out with laughter, looking with a raised eyebrow at him. “Oh, your Scribey Lee over there is, in fact – “

“Shut up,” Zuko growled, his voice raspier than usual due to the lump in his throat.

The waterbender’s fist clenched over the cork, Zuko never stopped observing that hand. “Don’t talk to my brother like this!”

Toph took a step forward, her finger pointing straight at the waterbender. “Don’t yell at him! Are you people blind or what? A minute longer and this dude will literally faint.”

The Avatar gripped his staff loosely in only one hand. “Um… Zuko, are you all right?”

“Oh yeah, because we should be sorry for him, that his lies will be revealed,” deadpanned Sokka crossing his arms on his chest. “Look how sorry I am.”

The Avatar was looking at Zuko with a worried expression all the time and he hated that. It meant his composure was collapsing just like everything else. He forced himself to take a couple of deep breaths to face whatever was coming with at least scraps of dignity. He wouldn’t dare to uncross his arms, sure that they would shake worst than Mr. Xaalo’s.

“I don’t want you to be sorry for me, Water Tribe,” Zuko snarled at Sokka which, at least, made the boy’s sarcastic smirk disappear. “I came here with you for another reason.”

“Oh… Actually, I wanted to ask what did you bring Zuko here,” the Avatar said in a light tone that didn’t fit the tension of the room in the slightest.

“Wait,” Sokka said to the Avatar, then he walked closer to Zuko. “For starters, I would like everyone in this room to be aware that this,” He pointed at Zuko with an overdramatic gesture, “is not some scribe but Prince Zuko of the Fire Nation.”

 


 

It wasn’t a lie.

Not often something could surprise Toph like this but… What?!

She turned towards Scribey, his heart beating at the highest speed she has ever witnessed. She couldn’t distinguish his emotions because there were so many of them embodied in his crazy breathing pattern and explosive heart. The others were just tense.

“Is that true?” she asked.

Scribey shifted his weight and inhaled slowly. “It was. Not anymore.” Both true.

The secret explained why he was constantly stressed. A prince? Scribey?! Now, she knew why he didn’t like to be around the guards. He was terrified that someone would know. Why did a literal prince work as a scribe in her home? Nothing added up here, but Toph knew neither of them lied.

“What do you mean not anymore?” Angry Queen demanded. Toph already knew that demands didn’t work well with Scribey.

“That’s none of your business,” he barked between his short breaths. Toph felt how his weight was constantly shifting as if he was stopping himself from something.

“Wait for a second…” Toph said pointing at Twinkle Toes. “You asked me to help you defeat the Fire Lord.” No one said anything or moved, unless so subtly that she couldn’t feel that. “Scribey, that’s your father?”

“Yes,” he answered hoarsely.

“Why are you answering her and not us?” Sarcasm Dude exclaimed.

“I owe her more explanation than I owe you and – “

“I’m not so sure about that… Unless, you chased her around the mansion as you chased us, you know, around the whole world!”

What the heck?! How on earth it wasn’t a lie?

“Maybe he’s answering me because I’m not yelling at him?” she prompted almost yelling at the dude.

She understood there was some bad blood here but she really feared about Scribey’s health at this point. Toph felt a weird need to defend him, even without knowing all the facts. He had helped her more than once even though she had been awful to him. At this moment, she didn’t care if he was some prince or not.

Sarcasm Dude laughed. “I have every right to yell at him after I had to listen to his screams about ‘honor and the Avatar’,” he said in a poor parody of Scribey’s voice.

Toph didn’t know what he was talking about but it made Scribey cringe.

“Maybe let’s not yell at each other, guys?” proposed Twinkle Toes.

“Fine,” Sarcasm Dude said. “My not-yelled question is, why aren’t you mad that Zuko lied to you? Also, what did he do to sway you onto his side?”

Toph already took a deep breath to told him how dumb he was, but Scribey spoke first.

“Leave Toph out of it,” he growled.

Toph had to admit that he could sound pretty intimidating despite the cacophony inside of his chest. She was intrigued by that version of Scribes.

“Somehow I’ve never thought of asking him if he’s a prince,” she deadpanned. Right now she was too occupied with defending Scribey to think if she was mad at him for hiding that little detail. “So careless of me.”

“But he made you think that he’s just an ordinary scribe,” Sarcasm Dude said. “On the side note, I’m still not buying that completely.”

Toph sighed loudly. “All he did while living here was being just a scribe.”

Twinkle Toes stepped forward leaving Anger Queen’s side. “Toph is right. And I still don’t know why did you bring Zuko here but maybe let’s let him explain why he’s um… a scribe?”

“No, actually,” the Angry Queen spoke in her cold tone. “We wanted to establish why he isn’t in prison where he definitely should be.” She turned to Twinkle Toes. “Aang, he says you know something about it.”

 


 

“So that’s why you were so casual about my illegal tournament!” Toph grinned at Zuko. “You could’ve told me! That’s so badass.”

Sokka abandoned his sarcastic smirk to glare at Toph even though she couldn’t see that anyway. “Toph, he hadn’t done some petty crime. Zuko was a part of the siege of the Northern Water Tribe. Their princess had to sacrifice herself to save everyone, many warriors died, the damage was huge! That’s not something to joke about.”

This information made Toph turn her head back to Zuko with slightly opened lips. “Is that true?”

Zuko knew she was using her exceptional skills on him. He could feel the phantom chill on his skin. Those were the questions the Northerners had asked, and no one had believed him.

“I was there,” he said carefully. The earthbender didn’t react. “But I wasn’t the part of the siege, and I’ve already told you that.” In the cold cell, with a bloody back, and arms chained to the ceiling. “I had come there only for the Avatar.”

From the corner of his eye, Zuko noticed how the monk took a cautious step back. The little earthbender who had defeated him from the beginning stayed silent. She had never met the person Zuko had been back then, but the accusations were enough to make her cautious.

“Whatever,” Sokka said. “The point is that a couple of months ago we left you in the Earth Prison, and now, you are here.”

Zuko tried his best to take some of the meditative breaths before starting but his lungs felt as if something was crushing them. His fake life was destroyed. He couldn’t let them drag him back to the mess belonging only to Zuko.

He hasn’t even tried to think of a way of putting that life together. He had lost himself in the blissful break. And now it was over. He barely recovered after the last time. He didn’t want to get back to being Zuko just yet.

“The Avatar got me out of there.”

Sokka laughed. “Think of something better – “

“He isn’t lying,” said Toph, her tone neutral.

The Avatar glanced anxiously around the room. Zuko would be dead if the monk decided to lie. No one had ever believed his words.

“Sokka,” the Avatar started slowly. “Zuko is telling the truth.”

 


 

“What?!”

Zuko barely moved since they brought him to this room, standing with his crossed arms and permanent scowl glued to his face. Sokka expected him to try to kill them at some point, but the only act of violence were his murderous glares. Since the whole thing about prison was – finally – brought up, Aang had his guilty face. Sokka could already feel the headache coming. What pacifist’s bullshit told him to set Zuko free?!

“Aang, what are you talking about?” asked Katara.

Aang was throwing Zuko anxious glances, but the firebender wasn’t doing anything suspicious at the moment. Except for the murder-glare, of course.

“After we left the base, I’ve told you that I’m going to fly around to see if no one is after us.”

“I remember that,” nodded Sokka. He had been busy with taking care of his sister after she had been almost buried alive. “What does it have to do with Zuko?”

Aang scratched his neck. “I took a quick look around, but my main goal was coming back to the base to see if Zuko was okay.”

Sokka glanced at Zuko who didn’t change his pose in the slightest. He was scowling straight at Aang but he didn’t move an inch so it was still fine… Probably? He hoped? Not-capture Zuko was stressing him more than capture Zuko.

“Why?” Katara asked confused. “I mean, what do you mean by okay? He was supposed to be a prisoner. I doubt he was okay with that.”

“I know, guys, that you were happy that he wouldn’t chase us anymore. I was too,” said Aang, this time doing everything to avoid looking at Zuko. Even Sokka felt kind of weird talking about it, with Zuko standing right there. “But after what Fong did to us I was afraid he could break the imprisoning terms we had agreed on.”

Well… it made sense. He and Katara were just happy to have one problem less but, of course, Aang was worried about the guy that tried to fry him multiple times. But it was a logical fear – Fong was definitely crazy. With of all Sokka’s love for planning that thought never crossed his mind…

“Did Fong break the terms?” Katara asked.

“Skip the details, Avatar,” Zuko growled at Aang making him squirm a little. It sounded too much like a threat.

Sokka clenched his boomerang tighter and pointed it at Zuko. “Hey, Jerk!” he did his best to match Zuko’s glare. “Don’t speak to him like that. Besides, we want to know the details.”

Aang looked at Zuko for an uncomfortably long moment. It looked as if they had a silent conversation that ended with Aang’s nod. “It’s fine, Sokka. The details Zuko speaks about aren’t that important.”

“So are, you two, mind-reading buddies now?”

“Just continue the story, Aang,” Katara rushed him, clearly not liking the tension in the room.

Aang waited for Zuko’s nod of approval, only after that he continued. Maybe Sokka was hallucinating after all?

“The earthbenders hurt Zuko,” said Aang. Sokka glanced at the firebender who was glaring at the floor, constantly doing his weird fire-breathing. “It was unreasonable and wrong.”

“What did they do?” asked Katara, a tiny bit of worry in her voice.

Sokka felt a spike of guilt. Zuko had been already injured when they brought him to the prison. He was a stupid and obsessed Jerk, but they didn’t want anyone to purposefully mistreat him. Maybe a tiny bit of bullying for every single thing he’d burned while chasing them but not like… literal abuse. It would be wrong and they were the good guys.

Now, when the events of the North weren’t so fresh, it was easier to think about it with a clear head. The earthbenders were only supposed to lock him up, not take any kind of vengeance.

Aang glanced anxiously at Zuko. “They – “

“That’s none of your business,” he growled at Katara. “Go to the point, Avatar.”

All of the pity he started to feel for Zuko evaporated. “Why are you such a Jerk?! Aang is defending you and all you do is snarling at him.”

“He is not defending me,” Zuko said turning to Sokka. “He’s retelling the actual events.”

“A fair point,” said Toph, who until this time was just enjoying the show leaning over a wall, quite close to Zuko.

“Events of which details you don’t want to share,” Katara pointed out. “Not a good move if you want us not to be suspicious of you.”

For the first time in that room, a puff of smoke escaped Zuko’s mouth. “So you can know more of my weak points besides the leg?!” He gave a glare that actually made Sokka take a small step back, his boomerang ready for a defense against the furious firebender. “So you know where to strike when I try something?”

Fine. Sokka felt a little bad about that low blow, but it was a tactical move. Nothing personal. Maybe a little. But the way Zuko put it, really made him feel bad. Stupid good guy’s morals… It was obvious to use every advantage they could get in face of an eventual fight… But he was sure his sister didn’t want to know the details because of that, it was her inner healer speaking.

“Zuko,” Aang said with a soft voice, “calm down. I won’t tell anything if you don’t want me to.” Zuko nodded reluctantly. “Do you want to continue?”

“No. Just go to the end.”

“That Colonel… um, what was his name.” Aang started scratching his head with his staff. “Colonel… Muong? No, not that – “

“Colonel Huong,” Zuko said. “That’s irrelevant.”

Sokka found the detail quite relevant. Also, he didn’t like this little finishing each other sentences thing that Aang and Zuko were doing.

“Oh, right! Thanks.” Great… thank the jerk, Aang. Why not? “So, Colonel Huong was Zuko’s guard. He told me it was better to get Zuko out of there because it wouldn’t be safe for him anymore. I took him close to the Fire Nation colony and um… we talked a little and I got back to you guys.”

“Why didn’t you tell us, Aang?” Katara asked, not quite mad at Aang but clearly upset. “Our lack of knowledge could’ve ended terribly.”

“I’m sorry, but you guys wouldn’t have thought clearly just after the North. It was more personal for you and I understand that. I believed that Zuko wouldn’t chase us anymore,” said Aang smiling at Zuko.

Back then they would definitely drag Jerk straight to the prison without asking questions. Now though… everything became inconveniently complicated. Sokka was really close to just asking Zuko to attack them.

“You have to tell us about stuff like that, Aang,” said Katara, her arms crossed on her chest. Sokka knew she wasn’t really mad at Aang. Or at least wouldn’t stay mad for too long, not with the puppy-eyes that could melt your soul.

“I know and I’m sorry.” Aang did the puppy-eyes at his sister. “But what they did to Zuko could’ve really killed him, if the colonel hadn’t intervened in time.”

Sokka glanced at the firebender. What did the hell happen, to make Aang so certain about the rightness of his decision? Zuko was tensed but he still wasn’t throwing any flames, or snarling at Aang for saying too much.

“All right,” Sokka said after a long moment of silence. He could totally do this the diplomatic way. “Zuko, I still don’t understand one thing.”

“What?”

It was a hostile what but Sokka didn’t expect him to answer at all, so he would take it without complaining. “Why are you in the Earth Kingdom working as a scribe?”

“Yeah…” Aang looked at the prince with a slightly crooked head and confused expression. “Why didn’t you go to that colony, Zuko?”

 


 

“That’s – “

Sokka interrupted him before he could finish. “And don’t say it’s none of our business. It wouldn’t be if we hadn’t got a list of reasons to be distrustful of you.”

Zuko wouldn’t tell them that he was a traitor to the Fire Nation and that there was a warrant on his head. They could use it against him. He was already fucked. They couldn’t know that he wasn’t allowed in the Fire Nation.

It was pathetic, and disgraceful, and –

Zuko took a shaky breath, after almost losing control again. “I’ve said, I’m not here because of you. That’s all you should care of.”

“No, Zuko!” Sokka said with a stern voice. “You did a lot of reckless damage just because you wanted to catch Aang. A quick change of mind and all of these people will be in danger! We won’t let that happen.”

Honestly, just starting throwing flames around sounded like a good solution. The best even.

“Guys,” Toph spoke after a long time of just listening. “This whole thing you have was so intense that I am tired of it, not to mention him.” She pointed at Zuko with her thumb, still staying close to his right. Even after everything hearing the truth. “My proposition is a small break, so I can deal with what I came for.”

“Why did you come here, Toph?” the Avatar asked curiously.

Zuko couldn’t be more grateful to the little earthbender for that break to gather his thoughts. His head fucking hurt. He couldn’t think when he was spending all of his energy on pretending that he controlled the situation. When, in fact, he was stepping on the edge of panic, since Boomerang walked into the doctor’s office.

Zuko couldn’t lose it in front of them. He wouldn’t survive the humiliation.

“I’m sorry about the dinner. I wanted to offer a truce,” said Toph, ripping Zuko out of his spiraling thoughts.

The Avatar smiled widely at the earthbender. “Sure! That’s cool!”

“I can speak my mind better when I’m closer to earth,” she said rubbing her elbow. Zuko recognized the stressed gesture. “Come with me for a walk, Twinkle Toes.”

The Avatar grinned at her. “I would love to walk around the gardens!”

Zuko decided that this could be his moment to flee of that damned room before he loses control. Or freedom. It took one step towards the door for them to have a problem with that.

“Where are you going?” asked Sokka.

Zuko’s jaw hurt from gritting it so tightly. “To my room.”

“Just give him a break,” sighed Toph. “All he said was true if that makes you feel better. You can finish this tomorrow.”

“How do you know he said the truth?” the Avatar asked curiously.

“I’m gonna tell you on our walk, Twinkle Toes.”

Zuko took another step only to feel Sokka’s hand on his shoulder. ”Wait…” Zuko turned. The waterbender was just a few steps behind her brother. “Fine, we can finish this tomorrow but we are not comfortable with Zuko being here, and Aang being out of our sight. It always ended badly.”

“I’m not going to take all of you. The guards will spot us,” said Toph.

The Avatar stood uncomfortably close to Zuko. Just at his arm’s length. So close. And he wasn’t doing anything about it.

“I want to go with Toph,” the Avatar said.

“All right,” said Sokka massaging his temples. “We finish the matters with Zuko tomorrow, you go for a walk with Toph, and Zuko stays with me and Katara until you are back. Is everyone content about that solution?”

“Sure,” said the Avatar.

Zuko crossed his arms tighter around his chest. It wasn’t making breathing any easier but he couldn’t let the trembling show. He knew Toph could sense that, she turned her head in his direction.

“Whatever…” Toph shrugged. “But don’t bomb Scribes with questions anymore or I’m going to bomb you with rocks.”

They were all looking at him, the siblings’ hands close to their weapons. “Fine,” he said finally, it was the only right answer.

He was a fucking hostage.

 

 

 

 

Notes:

I will never let these people be in one room with so many issues ever again. This chapter turned out to be a damned brick of dialogue. It wasn't supposed to end here so some of the stuff might seem not fully established but I WOULD NOT edit 7k monster. Not in this life.

After a quick rant THE GAANG in one room. Finally. Well, now you can be real judges if they were in character, considering the stuff that happens in this story, not only in the canon.

Just like below the next chapter thank you for the HUGE comments section and I hope to hear from all of you again 🖤
Any analysis of our lovely kids is welcomed. There is no such a thing to bright my day as a comment that doesn't fit into my phone screen in my mailbox <3

Also, I wouldn't say that's a cliff so be grateful for that. XD

Chapter 14

Notes:

I think it's the biggest chapter I've wrote 🙄😶

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

For a moment, Aang had been within Zuko’s reach and nothing happened. No fire. No capturing. Nothing. Sokka couldn’t believe it was the same Zuko they had fought at the North. Zuko who dragged the unconscious monk through a blizzard, now didn’t even spare Aang a single look. He was just standing with his hands crossed, glaring at some random spot on the floor.

It was weird to admit, but Zuko looked… normal. His hair grew back from the weird not-quite-bald state when they’d seen him for the last time. Of course, it wasn’t any close to the perfection of Sokka’s hairstyle but it looked all right. It was so weird to see Prince Jerk in simple green clothing, not the spikey armors and angry red outfits. Technically, in the bison-prison he’d had something normal on him but the chains kept the evil vibe.

Sokka was standing in the middle of the stupid room contemplating Jerk’s style choices.

He glanced around, looking for a comfier, less awkward, but still tactical spot to observe Prince Jerk. Katara was leaning over a wall close to the window, so Sokka should stay somewhere in the middle of the room. The table looked perfect and…

“Katara!” Sokka cheered. From the corner of his eye, he saw Katara jumped. Oh… right. Random name yelling was probably not the smartest thing to do when they were supposed to watch Prince Jerk. “You left them for me!” He pointed at the plate. “You really love me, sis!”

She rolled her eyes. “I can’t believe that’s what you are thinking about,” she muttered lowering herself on the couch. It was obvious she was still watching Zuko, despite her less alert position.

“I eat when I’m stressed,” Sokka said sitting on the chair. He grabbed the closest muffin. “And Zuko the Scribe is really stressing me out.”

Zuko didn’t react, still glaring at his spot on the floor.

Back in the corridor things had been simple. Their goal was to drag Zuko back to prison. But now? Everything became complicated.

Hey, Zuko, would you like to try a different prison because I sleep better when I know you won’t fry Aang? Maybe they won’t try to do anything awful this time? Let’s give it a try? Yeah, I know it ended badly the last time but you kind of committed a couple of serious crimes, arsons, and stuff…

Sokka took an angry bite of his muffin glaring at the object of his inner moral debate. As much as he didn’t want to, he felt bad that something awful happened to him and it was partly their fault, well, not quite but still. Stupid Jerk and his stupid glaring at the floor.

Sokka took a deep breath after he chewed the last bite. “So…um, Zuko,” he started. The bender glared at him, “would you like to, uh… sit?”

At this moment, he was their guest-hostage-not-prisoner so it was a nice proposition. The last time they were hanging out, Zuko had to be quite uncomfortable with chains and stuff... Maybe this Scribe Zuko – not that Sokka utterly believed that –  would appreciate the change.

“No.”

“Come on! The wall won’t collapse without you propping it.”

Zuko glared at him harder.

Sokka leaned in his chair and crossed his arms to match Zuko’s position. “You are making this already weird thing even weirder.”

Zuko kept glaring but not at Sokka anymore… Jerk found the floor more interesting. It was obvious he didn’t want to be there but he could just pretend.

“Seriously, can’t you just –“

Zuko turned his whole head to scowl at Sokka with his both eyes. “Will you shut up if I sit?”

Sokka would… for three minutes at best. “Sure.”

Zuko took a very slow fire breath before making the first step – if he was doing this to stop himself from setting anything on fire, then Sokka couldn’t complain. He walked to the table stiffly and sat opposite Sokka. The chair was very comfy but Zuko’s rigid posture made it look as if it was made of thorns.

The firebender briefly glanced at Katara before he got back to his glaring. Sokka was fairly sure that Zuko was staring right at his muffins. Rude – muffins didn’t deserve it. Sokka quickly grabbed another one before it could rot from Zuko’s bad energy.

Zuko jolted the table leg just a second after Sokka took his snack.

“Um… You wanted this one?” he asked confused. Attacking the table was a really unconventional first act of violence.

“No.”

“So why did you assault the innocent table?”

“Accident.”

“Zuko, if you want the muffin just ask,” Sokka said irritated. “They are way too good to be given to table assaulters but perhaps we can negotiate about it.”

 


 

“You were supposed to shut up,” Zuko growled but other than that he didn’t do anything alarming.

Her brother was an absolute idiot. Not really… but he preferred to talk through silence and absurdity of this whole situation what made him sound like an absolute idiot.

Sokka took another muffin from the table, this time the firebender didn’t kick it. “And Zuko the Scribe wasn’t supposed to attack.”

Katara was prepared for the moment when this whole conversation would change into yelling but Zuko made a tight line from his lips and didn’t answer. Her brother took that as a win and eat his snack as if it was a trophy.

Meanwhile, Katara was playing with the water inside of her pouch, creating small waves that no one could see. This whole Zuko-situation was stressing her out. They hadn’t had an opportunity to discuss what they intended to do. Their entire plan for that moment only involved keeping an eye on Zuko until Aang comes back. But what next?

She hoped that Sokka would have some good solution because they couldn’t rely only on Aang’s optimism. Katara remembered how furious she’d been just after the siege and that Zuko received most of her anger during their trip to the Earth Kingdom. He had deserved it but… not to that point. Katara knew it had to be serious from the look on Aang’s face when he had been telling the story.

“So…” Apparently, without the muffin occupying Sokka’s mouth, he couldn’t stay quiet. “How’s being, um… a scribe going?”

Zuko didn’t answer, not even turned his glare at Sokka. They didn’t know how Zuko behaved in noncombat or nonprisoner situations. But whatever was happening now was strange, at least. No throwing fire around, no yelling, not even calling them peasants.

“Are you going to answer me if I’ll call you Lee?”

Apparently not. Katara had to admit that Zuko was quite good at ignoring Sokka’s attempts.

“Hey, Lee, you know how similar you are to that one guy I met?” Sokka asked in a silly voice.

No reaction.

“Absolutely, dude, you must be twins or something.”

Still, no reaction. Katara began to think that she would get irritated faster than Zuko.

Sokka crossed his arms. “Seriously?! You were more talkative in that stupid cave,” he grumbled.

Katara wasn’t sure if it was still his stress blabbing or was he really upset that Zuko was completely ignoring him. Whatever it was – she felt quite amused by it. It was impossible for Zuko to hold this stone expression forever. Not with Sokka’s exquisite gift for being annoying.

“You are our no-prisoner, our no-interrogation is on a break, and I’m just trying to make a decent conversation!” Sokka exclaimed gesticulating widely. “Are you more comfortable with writing letters, Mr. Scribe?”

Katara chuckled after that one, but Sokka was too focused on getting some reaction out of Zuko to notice. She reached for her water once again – she had to be ready to save Sokka when Zuko finally snaps and sets him on fire.

 


 

It was too late for any visitors. Moshi was already in her pajamas and slippers when she shuffled to open the door. The day had been exhausting and all she dreamed about was to throw herself under the blanket and never get out.

“We are not dying here, Doc,” she said confused when she saw the man behind their door.

“But your scribe might.”

Moshi’s sleepiness disappeared in a second. “What?”

“Well… not literally,” he explained. “I hope.”

Ba and Oke get out of their beds when the doctor was retelling the events of the evening. Moshi felt anger arousing inside of her chest when she heard what happened in the corridor between the Avatar’s companions and Lee.

Their Lee.

The young scribe didn’t deserve any prejudice directed at him because of his appearance. His eyes were pure gold, so what? It didn’t change the fact that he was kind, temperamental yet still gentle, and that he was a theatre nerd, and…

He just deserved some good things after the past he wasn’t speaking of.

They already had made the mistake of judging him too fast during their first day. It was the time for redemption.

“I scared off the water kids after Lee bolted to his room. He had been twitchy before they jumped on him, so just go check if he’s okay.”

Ba already took some random robes from their closet; they were ready to go. Moshi wrapped the material around her shoulders to shield herself from the cold and prying eyes. She knew exactly how gossips worked in this estate.

She hugged the doc. “Thank you for telling us, Doc,” she said. “It’s so cute that you care.”

The man stepped away from her embrace. “That’s what inflicting pain does to people.”

“Uh… what?’

“Making you attached,” the man explained as if it was obvious.

Moshi smiled and patted his arm. “Your humor is gruesome, you know that?”

“Lee likes it.”

“A day after your meetings he always swears you are a psychopath,” Ba said.

The doc shrugged with a smirk on his lips. “That’s what I said.”

 


 

In the beginning, Sokka had been just stress-talking but now he was honestly angry at Jerk for ignoring him like that.

“You are the jerkiest jerk alive,” he said after trying out all of his ideas to make Zuko talk. Sokka didn’t even want to get some information out of him! Just casual stuff… and maybe some information later. “It’s the first time we are in one room on peaceful terms and you, instead of proving us that maybe you are not bad to the bone, are doing this!”

“Peaceful terms,” Zuko scoffed with a raspy voice.

“I offered you a muffin, we are just sitting here, and no one is threatening anyone,” Sokka listed the stuff that was extremely decent despite the fact that Zuko should be in prison. “Pretty peaceful to me.”

“And you aren’t tied to that chair,” Katara pointed out.

Right… Katara has never stopped being bitter about that tree incident. Zuko glanced at her for a second but quickly turned away. “Exactly. We are being extremely friendly considering well… everything.”

Zuko crossed his arms harder. Sokka wondered if the prince wouldn’t strangle himself. “You are talking to make me snap, so you both have an excuse to stop your peaceful terms,” he said without looking at any of them.

“You can’t expect us to trust you when you are not explaining anything!” Katara was still sitting in her spot but Sokka recognized the tone when she was close to losing patience.

“I don’t owe you any explanation!” Zuko finally raised his voice. Sokka put his hand on the boomerang, just in case. “If not my damned luck, you wouldn’t know or care what had happened or that I am here.”

Sokka couldn’t decide if unawareness would make it better or worse.

Katara stood up from her spot and slammed her both hands on the table. “We might hate you for what you did to us but we are not monsters! The earthbenders shouldn’t have broken the terms we had agreed on!”

Sokka put his hand on Katara’s closed fist. “Sis, calm down,” he tried to soothe the whole situation. It was pleasant without flames and water flying around and Sokka preferred to keep it this way. He turned to Zuko. “Every time we met you tried to kidnap Aang! You have to explain this somehow if you want to – “

Someone knocked on the door.

Sokka narrowed his eyes at Zuko. “Who’s that?”

Zuko was taking very slow fire breaths, glancing between Sokka and the lobby. “I don’t know.”

Sokka traced his fingers over the boomerang when he heard the sliding door opening. He couldn’t decide if he should watch Zuko or the incomer. Could it be Zuko’s plan to ambush them when Aang wasn’t around?

Three girls emerged from the lobby. Two twin-hallucinations who had shown Sokka the way to the psycho-butcher’s office and a redhead who looked as if she wanted to murder someone. Her expression softened for a second when she glanced at Zuko.

“Can you kids explain why didn’t you listen to the doctor when he told you to leave Lee alone?” the redhead asked with fake politeness.

One of the twins glared at Katara. “Better don’t spill that water of yours, loopy girl.”

“What – what are you doing here?” Zuko asked.

“Getting you out of that bullying party.”

Of what?”

The redhead gave Katara a murderous look. “I am not speaking to you, girl, besides, you heard me clearly the first time.”

“Moshi, I – it’s fine…” Zuko started with a hushed raspy voice. Sokka looked at him totally perplexed by this whole situation. “I – uh… we, I mean… we knew each other… and we – I am explaining something,” Zuko stuttered.

Then he looked at Sokka and there was panic in his eyes. Sokka had to blink twice to be sure if he was seeing this for real.

“Uh…” He turned to the girl that was just seconds from murdering him and Katara. “Yeah... Lee. Lee the scribe, our old times' buddy.”

The girl looked at her companions and they all moved forward to the table. Sokka had no idea who those girls were or what was their relationship with Zuko-Lee. Why everything connected to Prince Jerk had to be so confusing these days?!

The twins sat on the unoccupied chairs uninvited. Katara had to step back to avoid having her foot crushed. The redhead – Moshi – walked to Zuko and reached for one of his crossed hands. Prince Jerk, who has been strangling himself since they entered the room, let the girl uncross his hands without any protest.

“Come with me for a moment,” she said gently, without the murderous tune.

They were part of the house staff – Sokka had seen them before he discovered Prince Jerk Scribe Lee… All of this didn’t make any sense.

Zuko stood up with the girl still holding his wrist. “Moshi, I – I can’t leave the room yet. I – we have to finish, um… the thing.”

Oh right… They couldn’t let Zuko leave the room. Sokka completely forgot why they were sitting here in the first place when the murder twins were just a meter from him. It was weird that Zuko didn’t use this unconventional escape opportunity when he clearly didn’t want to be here.

“All right,” the girl said. “I just want to tell you something without water kids snooping.”

Sokka was sure that the girls weren’t old enough to call them kids, but he didn’t vocalize his objections bewildered by the fact that Zuko let the girl lead him to the corner without any protests. The twins started to chit-chat-intimidate Katara but Sokka wasn’t listening, more focused on Zuko.

He saw only the scared profile of the firebender, so he couldn’t see much of his facial expression except for the scowl. They were whispering something, the girl still held Zuko’s wrist loosely in her hand.

Sokka’s jaw almost dropped to the floor when the next thing happened.

Prince Zuko Jerk Scribe Lee was embraced in a hug.

Sokka had to be delirious.

 


 

Zuko wasn’t sure how he happened to be in the corner, he couldn’t remember standing up from that chair, or when Moshi started to hold his hand. But the hold was still there, soft fingers held his wrist gently, not rough or too tight, it was fine. But something kneaded his stupid lungs, stopping him from breathing properly…

“Lee,” Moshi said the name softly, squeezing his wrist a little tighter. Zuko blinked a couple of times and looked at the maid. “Did they hurt you?”

“N – no.”

But they could do this at any second. Only one word and maids wouldn’t longer care about him. They care about Lee. Water Siblings knew he wasn’t Lee. They wanted him to be out of their way permanently.

Just fucking breathe… don’t let them see this.

“We are taking you out of there right now,” Moshi said.

“No,” Zuko choked out.

He couldn’t leave the room before the Avatar returns; he couldn’t give him the reason. If anything happens to the monk, he would be blamed. He would be blamed anyway but… He promised to stay in the fucking room and –

His wrist was squeezed gently. “Yes,” Moshi said without leaving any room for protests. “I don’t care what’s those brats’ deal.”

“No,” Zuko repeated. “I – I have to… to finish it.”

“I can feel you shaking.” Moshi started rubbing small circles with her thumb. “I can think of some excuse for you. You don’t have to be there, Lee.”

“No… I want to – to finish this,” Zuko said through the clenched throat. “I – thank you. But… it would be easier if you go… Please.”

The water siblings could reveal his true identity at any second when the maids were here. Zuko didn’t want them to know. He didn’t want them to hate him.

“We can’t just leave, knowing how miserable you are,” Moshi said. “Friends don’t do that.”

Friends… “Just… please.”

Moshi sighed, never stopping rubbing his hand. “Are you completely sure of that?”

“Yes.”

“And you are not in any danger?”

“I’m not,” Zuko lied.

Moshi released his wrist only to embrace him with her both arms. There was no height difference between them so she easily put her chin on Zuko’s shoulder. He didn’t know what to do, too occupied with breathing and all the thoughts scuttling through his head.

“Okay,” she whispered into his good ear. “After you are done, our room is open for you. If you need to talk or just some background noise.”

“Thank you,” Zuko murmured into her shoulder.

Moshi squeezed his frame – it was pleasant not like the phantom force choking him – one last time and let go. Zuko immediately crossed his arms back. He felt the maid was close to his side when he, somehow, walked back to the chair.

“You don’t want to meet me when I’m angry,” Moshi said in a low tone. “You better not harm a hair of Lee’s head.”

The twins joined Moshi at her sides, sent the water siblings the last murder glare, and left the room. Zuko couldn’t believe it hadn’t turned into a disaster.

Just hold the fucking composure a little longer.

 


 

Tui and La… what just happened?

Well… he and Katara had been secretly threatened by a couple of murderous twins when Zuko was cuddling with another terrifying girl. From the look on Katara’s face, he knew it wasn’t only his delusion. And Zuko… he was just sitting there as if nothing happened, back with his hands crossed and the glare glued onto his face.

Prince Jerk… cuddling. Like a normal human being.

Sokka cleared his throat. “Uh… Zuko, mind to explain?”

“I didn’t know they would come,” he growled without looking up at Sokka.

“Sure… but who were they?”

“Maids.”

“Who were they to you, I mean,” Sokka clarified still stunned after witnessing Zuko the Hugger.

Zuko shrugged. “We work together.”

Sokka nodded slowly. He turned to Katara but she looked as clueless as he felt. Sokka wouldn’t ever suspect Zuko of acting so… normal. Either his plan was so spectacular, with prepared disguises and stuff, or… Zuko just worked as a scribe and befriended those girls. Like a normal person. Well, the girls seemed quite murderous so at least that detail hadn’t changed.

“So, uh… that was Lee the Scribe?” Sokka asked.

Zuko looked up for the first time since the maids left the room. “You hadn’t told them.”

“Told them what?”

“Who I am.”

Sokka scratched his neck, completely confused. “I guess we were a bit stunned by witnessing Lee the Scribe.”

Zuko glared at him. “Nothing happened.”

Sokka raised his hands in pacifying gesture, the glare the firebender gave him was different than the previous ones. “Geez… Zuko, I just mean that – “

They heard a loud thudding coming from the corridor. In the next second, a group of guards and Mr. Beifong appeared in the room.

“My daughter and the Avatar have been kidnapped!”

Out of instinct, Sokka glanced at Zuko, logically he knew it couldn’t be his fault but hearing Avatar and kidnapping in one sentence usually lead them to one conclusion – Zuko. Well… not this time.

Katara jumped to her feet. “What?! What happened?”

The guard stepped in front of panicked Mr. Beifong. “Come to the gardens. Hurry!”

Sokka and Katara were ready to go just a second later, he wasn’t sure when, but Zuko stood up as well. Before they left the guard frowned at Zuko when he spotted him.

“Lee? Better go to your room, kid. It might be dangerous.”

Zuko bowed to the man. “Yes, Sir.”

Sokka was too shaken by the fact that Aang was kidnapped to notice when Zuko took a turn into another part of the house. There will be time for that…

Right now, they had to rescue Aang and Toph.

 


 

Everything that happened in the bending arena was insane. Toph was insane! Most important, Aang and Toph were both safe and unscratched. That girl was an absolute force of destruction! The Boulder can take lessons from her! Sokka couldn’t believe the girl walking in front of him with her dad’s company just single-handed beaten all of them!

“Aang,” he whispered to the monk walking on his left, “you have an amazing taste in bending teachers.”

“Thanks, Sokka!” He grinned. “Oh… by the way, where is Zuko?”

Crap. He looked at Katara but she only shrugged. They didn’t have time to talk about any of this. “You won’t believe me when I tell you.”

Aang crooked his head. “What happened?”

“Prince jerk hugged a maid.”

Aang frowned. “Like… Zuko has a girl here?”

“It looked more like friendship,” Katara with a grim voice. “What are we going to do about him?”

Sokka scratched his head with his boomerang. Why couldn’t things stay simple? “Absolutely no idea.”

“Nothing,” said Aang, with the wise-monk smile on his face. “Zuko wronged us in the past but he seems to find his peace here. We can’t take it away from him.”

“I can’t believe that I’m not rejecting this idea immediately,” said Sokka. “I wanted to dump him in some prison but I’m not sure if my good-guy conscience would handle it now.”

Aang smiled. “Maybe Zuko will change his mind one day… Well, he didn’t try to capture me. That’s something.”

“Fair point,” said Sokka. ”Katara, what do you think?”

She shrugged. A wrinkle between her brow told Sokka how confused about the right choice she was. “I’ll do what you think is right, Aang.”

 


 

Zuko’s body started to shake uncontrollably he second the closed the door behind him. The only thing he could hear was his heart trying to break out of his ribcage. He knew he was breathing too fast but the air just refused to go into his lungs.

He didn’t have time for this…

He tried to get to his swords but with the first step, the whole world swirled in front of his eyes.

He didn’t have time…

Zuko was on the floor on all fours, his arms shook so hard that he couldn’t get up. Somehow he crawled to the corner of the room. He didn’t have time for this… Yet he tucked his knees close to his chest, resting his head between them, and tried to breathe. The world couldn’t swirl this way. Zuko tried to imagine Uncle's voice from years ago.

Just breathe, Prince Zuko, it all comes from the breath…

He didn’t know how much time he had already wasted sitting in the corner, trembling like a pathetic child.

He had seen the way Sokka looked at him after the guards informed them that the Avatar had been kidnapped. Zuko was fucking right about the fact that he would be blamed! He’d used the commotion to flee away from them but right now he was just wasting time on being pathetic.

They couldn’t find him like this.

He wouldn’t summon a flame or say that it wasn’t his fault without any air in his lungs.

Zuko wasn’t sure how long it took for the room to stop spinning. He still couldn’t breathe properly but it was enough. He climbed to his wobbly feet – pins and needles sensation tearing them, making him unbalanced – and grabbed the stone staff.

Then the sheath with swords, and money, and his bag, and some clothes.  

With a trembling hand, he scrawled a few sentences on a stained piece of parchment he’d found on the desk.

Zuko took the last look at his room and fled into the night.

 


 

Toph made the decision.

She wouldn’t let her parents keep her in the house as if she was a fragile glass doll. Father has seen everything and still forbidden her from doing what she loved. She didn’t want to live like this anymore.

Saving the world was a pretty-goddamn reason to run away from the home.

Could something be more badass than that?

But before she would catch up with Twinkle Toes and his gang, she wanted to talk with Scribey. Once again she sneaked towards his room.

 


 

“I can’t believe we don’t have an earthbending teacher for you because she was grounded,” Sokka said climbing on Appa’s saddle.

Aang just shrugged. The monk was sitting on the edge of the saddle with an uncharacteristically downhearted face. Katara wrapped her arms around him. It’s going to be a depressing flight. Sokka took a seat on Appa’s head.

“Yip-yip,” he said. Appa growled and swung with his tail. “We have a teacher to find.”

 

 

 

 

Notes:

*exhales*

I'm not a fan of rewriting the exact events from the show so pretend that things off-screen just happened the same way. The ending of the episode is *slightly* different though......

I think that this chapter was a little evil from my side... I'm still confused if what I did is brilliant or an act of dumbassery. Though, I think I like the pacing and the changing attitude of the siblings... Idk just vibe???

I know you may rage on the siblings for not noticing that Zuko is um... not fine, let's say. BUT, you don’t pay attention to details about things you don’t care about. Slight confusion – yep; feeling bad that he had been hurt? – also yep. Still mad at everything he had done – big YEP. For such a long time he was just a big bad villain for them. Only at the end of the chapter Sokka *discovers* that Zuko acts like a normal human (woahhh Sokka how are you so perceptive).
I mean yeah how often you suspect the guy you pretty much hate (hated) of basically having a panic attack in front of you when you are 14/15? And the guy is “big bad” not an obviously abused child???

Ok, that's my point but I'm open for discussion if anyone is up to it. Either if you share my view or not.

You might fight me but maid's pov and maids rescue mission (AND CARING DOC) was the fluffiest cutest shit ever.

Also, what a pity that responsible boy Zuko wasn't there for the chapter and panicked flight or fight terrified Zuko had to make life-changing decisions 😶😶😶😶 This might be illogical but not from his pov (this is the thing I would also gladly discuss about)

Well, I would discuss absolutely anything. Who am I kidding... I hope you don't hate me and you won't bury me under the furniture thrown at me.
It's not that bad. I repeat - not that bad. Only panic Zuko running around, and Toph who missed her Appa flight... As I said ---- not bad.

*disappears into the comments with a shield*

Chapter 15

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

 

 

The low mountain range surrounding Gaoling turned out to be a place that Zuko’s half-aware agitated mind decided to go to. It was a better decision than most of his fully aware choices.

After he climbed to the cave he was panting from the lack of air in his shrunken lungs. Only after laying flat on his back, trying to make the knots in his chest loosen, Zuko managed to slow down his heart rate. His limbs were heavy when he finally sat on the cave’s floor and really looked around.

Well… his panicked self was quite good at finding hideouts. He remembered only parts of the road here – scaling the wall with swords and staff strapped to his back, then a lot of running, and finally the pain in his leg during the climbing. His legs were trembling slightly when he walked to the edge of the cave. He could see the entire Gaoling; at the same time, it was unlikely anyone in the town would pay attention to his stone shelf hidden behind trees.

Zuko shivered when the chill wind blew over the tops. He wasn’t sure if it would work since he barely could breathe in general, still, he inhaled as deeply as he could. With an exhale puff of fire escaped his mouth. The warm feeling radiated from the center of his chest to the rest of his body.

AgniHe missed firebending.

And the worst thing was that in the end, his bending withdrawal was for nothing. Zuko exhaled another puff, savoring the feeling of chi shimmering in his chest. He made a small flame on his palm, the orange tangles throwing dim shadows around him. He’d been bending at Mr. Xaalo’s but something about this small fire felt different.

A huge shape rose over the town. Zuko immediately extinguished his fire and pressed his back to the wall. The Avatar’s bison just flew over the nearby valley. Zuko followed the creature with his gaze until he couldn’t see it anymore and got back to the cave.

Although they weren’t at the estate anymore he couldn’t go back. No matter how fucking much he’d enjoyed his fake Lee life. It was over.

They could’ve already told everyone about his true identity. Even if they hadn’t, Zuko wouldn’t stand living in uncertainty, knowing that his next day depended on the whim of people who hated him.

It had been a nice life.

Zuko naively hoped that the staff wouldn’t hate him for disappearing… Fuck. He didn’t want them to know that all of their kindness had been given to a pathetic deceiver.

 


 

The letter was full of scrawls, bolts, and crossed-out words, it barely looked like Lee’s handwriting.

 

I’m sorry I had to I… there’s money for the clothes I took.

I’m sorry, I had to go. Sorry for disappearing sorry It has nothing to do with the job, I shouldn’t abandon I… Mr. Xaalo didn’t know.

I’m grateful for everything I’ve received here but I have to go.

I am sorry, Goodbye,

Lee

 

The mentioned pile of coins laid on the desk. The bed was neatly made, without any creases suggesting that someone had slept in it. The closet was half-open, the wooden cane Lee had been using was lying on the floor buried under some shirts.

“I – he…” Ba tried to say something but she couldn’t find the words. “Did he… fled? In the middle of the night?”

“But… why?” Oke asked reading the wobbly words once again.

Moshi clenched her fists. She remembered his terrified gaze from the previous night, the way his hands shook, how disconnected from the moment he’d been…

What did those fucking water children do to him?!

 


 

They went to the doctor’s office. The man was the first one to witness the water idiots harassing Lee. Moshi wondered what could’ve been so triggering to make him run away in the middle of the night. Lee had said that they knew each other… than it had to be some bad blood from the past? Or just fucking racial bullshit?

None of them could think of any logical reason.

“It’s partly my fault,” the doc said.

“What?!” Moshi snapped.

The doc shrugged, sliding his glasses back in place. “If not me, running wouldn’t be physically possible for him,” he said. “Why do I have to be so good at my job? Oh… and also, I could’ve really poison the water prick.”

 


 

They found the Head Asshole in the crowded mess-hall.

“What do you want?” he rebuked Ba who grabbed him by his shoulder.

Normally, Moshi preferred to avoid the man at all costs but they needed his help. “Lee is gone. We have to find him.”

The Head Asshole pressed his clipboard to the middle of his forehead and muttered some curses. “Not another one... Like it wasn’t  chaotic enough.”

“What are you talking about?” Oke asked.

“It’s possible that the Avatar kidnapped Miss Beifong,” he said, already scribbling new things on his clipboard. “Mr. Beifong is furious. No one leaves the estate today; the investigation is in the process.”

 


 

Moshi tried to eat the dinner but she kept glancing at the empty chair at their table. Lee never talked much but the lack of his occasional grumble made the meal flavorless. Neither Moshi nor the twins were in talking mood after the Lost Beifong Interrogation. No one was doing anything about the fact that Lee was gone too.

It was hard not to see some correlation between those two disappearances. Lee and the little miss liked each other and, in both cases, the Avatar or his band were involved. But Lee couldn’t have been kidnapped – he’d left the letter in his room, there were no signs of struggle… It didn’t make any sense.

When they were finally leaving the canteen Moshi overheard a snippet of Eva’s bullshit.

“ – I don’t know about the Miss, but the boy was a lost cause since the day he’d said that dining with dust-eaters is normal. You hear how – ”

In one second Moshi’s blood boiled, and in the next, Eva had a bowl of ragout on her face.

 


 

Being assigned to the toilets duty for an entire month was absolutely worth seeing Eva’s stupid wrinkles covered with a hot sauce. Moshi would do it again only for satisfaction.

It was so frustrating that they couldn’t do anything. The guards were busy looking for the miss. No one was allowed to leave the house but even if they could, it wouldn’t change shit. Moshi was a maid – she could find dusty spots, not people.

She and the twins were sitting on the floor in their room for over an hour now.

“I can’t believe Lee really told Eva to fuck off when she started talking shit about us,” Ba said.

Moshi frowned. “Why? I thought we agreed that Lee wasn’t an asshole.”

Ba waved with her hand dismissively. “Not that. Lee. The anxious Lee, who bows to guards and speaks with sirs and madams. This Lee, saying Eva to fuck off on our behalf…”

“Oh…”

Oke bumped her twin with a fist. “Stop that or I will start crying… Damn, I hope he will come back after they left. Maybe he just wanted to hide… like temporally?”

Moshi was close to crying.

They should’ve gotten him out of that room and calm him down… From what they knew, Lee had nowhere to go, unless he ran back to his previous employer. In this scenario he would be at least safe, not alone. Not that she completely trusted Lee’s judgement about Mr. Asshole.

Moshi sighed and laid flat on her back. “Is it bad that that currently I’m wishing a couple of morally questionable things to the Avatar and his band?”

“Probably,” Ba said flatly.

Moshi shrugged. “I don’t care.”

“Same,” Oke nodded.

Ba laid just next to Moshi. “I hope he comes back… They put on a play in the city in a month. I wanted to bring Lee with me. He said he’s never read that one.”

“Nerds,” Oke grumbled affectionately.

“He will come back,” Moshi said trying to convince herself. “You don’t protect people from Eva only to disappear without a goodbye afterward.”

 


 

Zuko lit a small fire. Staying in one place for too long was dangerous but not more than swooning on the cliffside. The attack he’d experienced in the room was still taking its toll on him – his limbs were wobbly, chest crumpled by phantom rocks, but at least he could think semi-clearly by now.

He didn’t know where to go anyway.

He could go after the Avatar; he knew in which direction they flew away but… he wouldn’t stood a chance against them. No without backup. Agni… he didn’t even know if the Avatar would be enough to deserve another chance from Father. Not after everything. Fuck… Zuko wasn’t sure if he wanted to get back to the feral chase. When he’d been in the room with them, the desire to capture the monk wasn’t as strong as it should be…

No. He couldn’t be too far gone. He hadn’t wanted to capture the monk as much as he should only because he’d learned to respect the odds. Nothing else. It was his destiny but he wasn’t able to follow it at the moment. It was temporary. It…

The pressure in his temples increased from the lack of answers.

Zuko would set off in the morning. Where? He would figure it out later.

Now, Zuko took off the shirt with the Beifongs’ emblem and ripped it off with the tip of his sword. The fitting cuffs and flexible material weren’t good only for writing. They would do just as well with swords or firebending, though he would use it as a last resort. He hoped not looking like a fugitive would help to stay out of trouble.

The small stripe with a boar turned into the ashes in the fire.

There was no turning back.

 


 

It was going so well…

Toph hadn’t found Scribey and then Twinkle Toes and his gang disappeared too. She was confident about her rebellious choice, but she didn’t know what to do. It was the middle of the night, not that she cared much…. Thanks, blindness.

The last time she had gotten lost, she’d found the Badger Caves, so why not to look for some answers there? She had to get away from the house. Not so long and someone would notice her disappearance and Dad would send a search party after her.

Toph adjusted her backpack and turned towards the Badger Hills. It was funny how no one in the town knew that freaking badgermoles were living as their neighbors. Running away with a bunch of other kids to teach earthbending was an amazing idea, but running away alone… Toph wasn’t so sure about this one. But she couldn’t turn back, they would make her a prisoner of the house and she didn’t want to live like that.

Toph felt something odd – someone was there. Not in the caves but on the top of the hill. She was too far away to sense anything more specific. Toph began the climb. She wanted to discover the mysterious stranger and find out what were they doing near her secret caves.

As she came closer, she recognized that hectic heartbeat.

 


 

Zuko grabbed the swords in the second he heard someone approaching his hideout. It’s been months since he properly trained with them, but everything about the stance felt natural. The intruder couldn’t know he was here, the fire wasn’t visible from the outside.

A small figure stopped in the middle of the cave entrance.

“I knew those weren’t only decorations, Scribey,” Toph said with a grin.

Zuko didn’t lower the weapon, even though he knew the swords were no match to Toph’s earthbending skills. “What are you doing here? Where are they? I am not going to – “

“Hey… relax,” Toph said raising her hands and stepping closer to him. “It’s just me. I don’t know where they are… and that’s the problem,” she muttered.

Zuko lowered the blades, never taking his eyes off the girl. “What are you doing here?”

Toph walked past Zuko and sat next to the fire as if she had been invited. If he hadn’t seen the bison flying away, he wouldn’t believe her so easily. Zuko sheathed the swords and leaned over the wall on the opposite side of the campfire.

Toph put her head on her palm. “So… I ran away from my house. I wanted to go to my caves but I sensed you – “

“You ran away…” repeated Zuko. “Why?”

“Long story short… I saved me and Twinkle Toes from kidnappers with my badass earthbending. My dad saw that and I thought… I thought he would understand,” she said in a low whisper. “He didn’t.” Her voice became steady again. “I decided that I’m sick of them treating me like I’m helpless. I wanted to go with Twinkle Toes but they… I guess I missed my flight.”

Zuko nodded, even though the girl couldn’t see that. “The bison flew away a while ago.”

“I guess that when I couldn’t sense a tone of fur nowhere around,” she grumbled. “I lost some time looking for you but, surprise, you weren’t there either.”

Zuko leaned the sheath over the wall and sat down. “You were looking for me?” he asked confused. Toph nodded, which was kind of unfair that only she could nod in this conversation. “Why?”

“Hmm… I don’t know actually. Why I could be possibly looking for you, Zuko?”

 


 

Toph felt him cringe after hearing his real name. Maybe her tone was a little harsh but she was lowkey mad at him for running away, which made her miss the bison. And it was a seriously mean move to just flee without saying goodbye.

She’d wanted to say goodbye to him.

“I’m sorry,” he said, his heart had a weird rhythm after whatever had happened in that room but it felt sincere. “I – I, um… sorry.”

She shrugged. “I’m not mad about that. I have a lot of questions though,” she said, which made Scribey tense. He hadn’t been acting around her so timid for a while. “Scribes, does the fact that your ass is royal changes stuff between us?”

His heart was beating noticeably faster. “I – no. I mean… I was lying to you. To everyone.”

“Well, yeah… But you couldn’t have been faking the person, just the name and some backstory stuff, right?”

“I guess…”

“Then I still like my garden’s sightseeing partner,” Toph said the blind joke, hoping that Scribey would catch that. No reaction came from him, other than his unsteady heartbeat. “Are you okay?”

“What?”

“I felt your heart in that room,” Toph said. She had been really afraid about him when his heart literally skipped a bit few times in a row, not to mention how crazy he’d been breathing. “For me, it felt like avalanche and tornado at once, inside of your body. And those dunderheads hadn’t even realized.”

Thanks Agni for that,” he muttered so quietly that she barely heard that. “Thank you for taking my side, even though you had no reason to do it.”

Toph crooked her head. “You didn’t answer my question.”

“I – “ He started but the words died in his throat. Toph felt him sitting more comfortably, with his knees close to his chest. “I… I’m not.” Not a lie. “But I’m better. Thank you again.”

Toph mimicked his position, resting her chin on her knee. “So are you going back after they are gone?” she asked hesitantly.

“No.”

“Why not? You seemed to enjoy being a scribe.”

His heartbeat speeded once again. “Just no. I don’t want to talk about it.”

Toph shrugged. She had her suspicions that it was something connected to the whole prison and prince stuff. She wouldn’t ask him about it today. One interrogation a day seemed like enough. Also… she was happy that she wouldn’t be alone. No matter how selfish the relief was.

“Are you going back?” Scribey asked after a moment of silence.

“No,” she said certainly. Toph didn’t know what she should do now, but a prospect of lifetime house arrest wasn’t appealing. “Um… can I stay with you for now?”

“Yeah, um… sure.”

Toph hugged her knees closer to her chest. “Cool.”

 


 

Zuko was staring into the fire, bending it to match his breathing. Toph sat directly opposite him, the glow made her milky eyes shimmer in golden shades. He tried his best not to think about the next day, just focus on breathing. He was tired but he knew that sleep wouldn’t be for him that night.

“Wait a second… you are a firebender Scribey, aren’t you?” Toph asked.

Zuko inhaled slowly, keeping his focus on the fire in front of him. “Can you sense that as well?”

Toph chuckled. “I’m not that good yet. I figured that you have to be since you are a fire prince and stuff.”

“I was a prince,” Zuko corrected her. He was too tired to be embarrassed about the stupid assumption he’d made. “But yes. I am a firebender.”

Zuko watched Toph closely for any reaction that could indicate that she wasn’t fine with that, but the girl only continued to stare at the fire.

“Are you bending it now?”

“Kind of.”

Toph frowned. “What do you mean ‘kind of’?”

Zuko inhaled and the fire grew along with his breath. “It matches my breathing. It’s not a real bending.”

Toph got up to her feet and walked around the fire to sit close to Zuko’s side. “Then show me something real,” she demanded.

Zuko hesitated.

“Come on! What are you stressing about?”

The list wouldn’t end quickly.

“But you can’t see that,” Zuko said.

Toph huffed. “But I can feel the heat just fine.”

Zuko shook his head even though she couldn’t see that. “I don’t want to burn you.”

“I am not a fragile blind girl,” she said with a deadly tone.

Zuko took her hand and put it around his wrist. Then, he summoned a small flame onto his open palm. This way, he knew Toph would be sure where the fire came from and nothing dangerous would happen.

Toph smiled when she felt the heat and reached to the flame with her other hand. Zuko barely stopped the urge to extinguish it immediately.  Toph would probably punch him for that.

“It feels so steady,” she said almost touching the little flame. Zuko used all the control he possessed to keep it as cool as it could be. “I’ve never been so close to fire before.”

“Be careful,” Zuko said keeping the flame small and stable. “Too close and it might burn you before I manage to put it down.”

Toph released his wrist and cupped her both palms around the fire as if she was catching its heat. Zuko let her do it for a moment and then put the flame down.

“Hey! Give it back.”

Zuko found himself cracking a smile. “There’s an entire bonfire on your left. I’m not going to be your personal spark rock.”

Toph smiled widely. “That’s brilliant!”

“Uh… what?” Zuko asked puzzled.

“I’m changing your nickname, Sparky.”

 


 

Zuko spent the night on breathing exercises and listening to Toph’s snoring. He felt quite centered considering the state he’d been in yesterday, the little earthbender’s presence helped as well. He didn’t want to wake her up so he just waited with everything until the girl would rose by herself.

Zuko noticed the moment she opened her eyes.

“So, Sparky… I was thinking…” She started hesitantly, which was unlike Toph.  “They said you had been quite good at tracking them, didn’t you?”

Zuko frowned at her. “And?”

“Are you up for a tracking trip with me?”

 

 

 

Notes:

Toph is taking care of everything herself... even about her field trip 😆 Now, Zuko has to agree to that.

You know how weird it felt to write this slower chapter after 3 BIG CLIFFS packed with dialogue??? It was a pain, but it's fine. Now it's done and we are *this* close to the missing field trip.

Now it's the time for my shameless comment begging. But honestly, I'm really curious what you think about that turn of events. It was unexpected (at least I think so) not to make Zuko simply "join the gang". I anxiously curious how you like that change of patterns

I'm gonna miss my Beifong crew 😥 but any of those dump children want to go back to the house :<

OH, and this cave is full of ~siblings vibes~

Seee ya below ✌

Chapter 16

Summary:

... field trip?

Notes:

I'm no longer "speed" but one week schedule is still a thing.

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

 

The fact that Zuko was back to chasing the Avatar, not for his own gain was the epitome of irony. The universe truly hated him and it’d stopped being subtle. The look on Toph’s face when he’d agreed to help her was saying a lot about Zuko’s sanity. He had nothing better to do. At least, he was experienced at both, chasing the Avatar and wandering through the Earth Kingdom. None of it had ended well though…

Toph was a better bender than Zuko, more confident and smarter than him, but she was still twelve. It was no age to travel alone without a precise destination, chasing a bunch of powerful, unpredictable kids.

Zuko already missed the simplicity of Lee's life.

At least he’d seen the direction the bison flew away, so at sunrise, they headed that way. Toph was oddly quiet, Zuko suspected that she was afraid that he would change his mind about helping her. He understood why she wanted to leave that house, even though his feelings about it were utterly different.

Zuko would love to be just a scribe for a little longer but there was no turning back.

 


 

The forest around Gaoling was dense, they could walk along the trading road and stay out of sight easily. Not tripping every few minutes was harder, the sleepless night and everything that had happened before left its mark on Zuko. They were walking roughly in the same direction the Avatar flew away. Zuko didn’t want to follow the monk head-on, they needed to get to the town first.

When Toph asked to show her the way Zuko pointed with his finger like a complete idiot. Toph realized what he’d done but she took pity on his embarrassment and didn’t comment. Zuko quickly corrected his mistake and pointed the direction but this time he used Toph’s hand to do it. The moment Zuko strayed off-track Toph noticed it immediately.

“Sparks, I’ve heard that you are a professional in Avatar Hunting but I don’t think going sideways will help us catch up with them,” Toph said still stomping at Zuko’s side.

Zuko traced his fingers over the worn-out surface of his staff. “We need to get to a town before – “

He stumbled over a root again, barely supporting himself with his staff. He cursed under his breath as sharp pain radiated through his foot. He would lay with his face in the grass if Toph wouldn’t help him regain his balance.

“Damnit, you weren’t so clumsy when you were limping,” Toph griped. She raised her chin so Zuko could see her annoyed expression but after a second her face softened. “Are you all right?”

His limbs were heavy and sore after the first long-distance run after the injury. He was still agitated after the pathetic ordeal he’d endured. The sleepless night afterward made him feel completely drained.

“We need to get supplies,” Zuko said ignoring the question. He wasn’t sure how much the girl could feel with her creepy lie-detecting abilities. Besides, he was fine and he could walk for another few hours. Zuko knew too well how going without food resulted, at least this time he had money to buy it. “We might get some information there. People talk about furry ancient creatures flying over their heads.”

Toph crossed her hands. “I can’t feel any town around.”

“How far your sense can reach?”

“I’m not sure,” Toph said. “I’ve never used it like that.”

Zuko flexed his sore foot, the rest of the pain began to pass, leaving only the well-known numbness. “I know there are towns. I saw some maps on my way to Gaoling.”

Toph sighed dramatically. “You better be right, Sparky.”

 


 

Zuko was sure there had to be a settlement nearby. He had seen it marked on the merchants’ map and loaded carts had to go somewhere. He found some edible berries and shared it with Toph but it didn’t help with the hunger that started to settle in his stomach. It agitated Zuko’s shattered nerves to the point where his mind spiraled about every fatal outcome at once.

Zuko didn’t notice a hole in the grass and his foot fell right into it. He hissed when his ankle twisted. “Fucking holed piece of shitearth.”

Toph grabbed his arm in time – again – when he bent down to rub the sore joint. “Nice one, Sparky,” she chuckled and Zuko realized that he just swore in front of a twelve-year-old and she liked it. “But don’t you dare to insult my element ever again.”

“Your damned element hates me,” he growled testing his ankle. He could move it so he hadn’t messed it up too seriously. “It’s mutual.”

“Sure it does, Prince of Drama.”

Zuko straightened his back and put some weight on the ankle. Fine – it wasn’t bad. “Don’t call me that.”

“A prince or dramatic?” Toph asked letting go of his arm.

“I am not a prince anymore.”

Toph crooked her head playfully. “So you know you are dramatic?”

Zuko growled under his breath and resumed the walk at a slightly slower pace, paying much more attention to the ground. “I’ve been told that.”

                                                                                                         


 

Toph was worried about Sparky because of his unsteady steps, irregular breathing, and crazy heartbeat that changed every minute. She had plenty of questions but she knew it was no time to ask them. The nickname change turned out to be more than a fancy wordplay. She couldn’t fully understand how he seemed to be the same, yet a different person after his true identity had been revealed.

Sparky was as shitty conversation partner as Scribey had been – nothing changed there. Toph was getting hungrier with every minute, her feet started to hurt from several hours of walking. Not to mention that Sparky’s limp began to show a while ago and he was supporting himself with his staff, probably hoping that Toph wouldn’t notice.

She felt strong vibrations as another cart ride past them, in the direction of Sparky’s imaginative town. Toph was sick of this walking tour, the plan how to change their mean of transportation started to form in her head.

 


 

“Could we be mistaken for siblings?”

The sudden question took Zuko off guard. “What?”

Toph shrugged. “I know that our age difference fits but are we any similar in our appearance? This could be a convenient fake story if someone asks why are we traveling alone. And it’s important for both of us to hide our true identity.”

This… this was a very good idea. He looked at Toph’s dark hair and pale skin, both shades quite similar to his own. She had something local in her, when most people Zuko ran across noticed something foreign in him. He suspected that extraordinary golden eyes always fueled their search for a refugee.

“So… can you be my older bro, Sparks?” Toph asked, irritated after Zuko lost himself in thoughts for too long.

“I – um… Our skin and hair shade is kind of similar but uh… people here have always taken me for a half-breed,” Zuko witnessed, the term felt bitter on his tongue. “Our supposed kinship could endanger you for prejudice too.”

Zuko didn’t like the smile that crept on Toph’s face. “I don’t care, fake-bro,” she said grinning at Zuko. She stopped and put her hand on the ground. “Come on!”

“Where? What’s happening?” Zuko asked panicked but Toph already ran towards the trading road. He sprinted after her. “Toph! What are you doing?!”

Branches were hitting him in the face as he ran after the smaller earthbender, his swords clinking on his back. The sudden shot of adrenaline let him forget about the tiredness in his legs. Toph stood on the side of the road, the cart only meters from hitting her. Before Zuko could yank her out of its way he heard a loud crash.

Toph was laying on the ground. In the next second, Zuko was at her side, checking if something happened to her. There was no blood but the impact could break something… Why did she…

Toph squeezed his arm to get his attention – she had an unsettling smile on her face. Zuko couldn’t understand a thing… Then he noticed the unnatural bump in the ground just under the cart’s wheel.

A woman got out of the cart. “Spirits! What were you thinking! Child, you came out of nowhere! You have to look where are you going! Are you all right?!”

“Love, don’t scream, you gonna scare the ostrich horses.” A man appeared behind the woman. “Are you two all right?” he asked.

Zuko was kneeling next to Toph who slowly sit up leaning heavily on him. “I’m sorry,” she said with an uncharacteristically weak voice. “I – I’m sorry,” she sobbed.

The woman pulled on her hair. “It’s too late for sorry! You have to look where you are going!”

Zuko knew that whatever happened wasn’t real but adrenaline and fear were still buzzing in his body. He glared at the woman. “Sure, tell the blind to look around!”

That made the loud woman shut up, she was looking at Toph with wide eyes.

“Everyone, please, calm down,” the man said and crouched close to them. Zuko was ready to intervene if he made one wrong move. “Are you hurt?”

“Then you should watch her!” the woman accused Zuko after her shock passed.

“It’s not Lee’s fault!” Toph wailed before Zuko could set the woman on fire. “He… he told me to stay close and – and I didn’t. He’d been injured… he couldn’t run after me fast enough.” Toph pushed her face into Zuko’s chest. “I – I’m sorry, brother.”

“It’s all right,” the man said calmly. “Are you hurt?”

 “No… no I don’t think so,” Toph said testing her arms.

“Good.” The man looked at the woman. “Love, it was just a misadventure. Don’t stress the kids further. The most important is that everyone is all right.” He glanced at Zuko from the corner of his eye. “We are very sorry. Can we help somehow?”

Zuko wanted to yell at the man. It’s been a long time since he properly yelled at someone. But Toph spoke first. “We could use a ride.”

 


 

Toph was a damned genius. She stretched her arms and legs as she laid on the pile of hay. In this position, she was actually blind but it was better than walking through this stupid forest. Sparky didn’t say a word since they climbed on the trailer. She suspected was sitting in some corner – it seemed to be a Sparky thing to do.

“You are good at improvisation, Sparky,” Toph said in order to localize where he was sitting. He didn’t say anything. “Come on! They won’t hear us. It’s a perfect ride.” Stupid hay and lack of seismic sense. “Fine. You are mad, I get it. Just to let you know… I am completely blind right now, and I don’t even know where you are.”

“A meter from you on the right,” he said flatly, his voice tired.

Toph rolled on her stomach and crawled closer to Sparky. Resting after walking for hours was cool, but being blind was not. She found his bag first and then she smoothly sat next to him, their shoulders barely brushing. Toph guessed he didn’t want her to feel his heart when just a second ago he was trying to ignore her.

“Listen… I’m sorry it happened so fast but it was a good plan,” she said. The excitement acquired during her performance started to drain. She’d felt that Sparky had been really scared that something happened to her. Guilt settled in her chest. “For my defense, I know how lying is stressing you out!”

Sparky laughed humorlessly. “Not more than thinking that you were hit by a cart.”

She turned her head to him and raised her eyebrow. “You seriously think I would just jump under the wheels. I am not a helpless – “

“I know that!” he interrupted. Toph felt the air around them became warmer. “I… it was a rough day, all right? I didn’t have time to think when it was already happening.”

Toph hugged her knees closer to her chest. The way he was worried about her was different than the overprotectiveness she’d been receiving at home. She wasn’t sure how to cope with that.

“I’m sorry, Zuko.”

She felt him looking at her. “Getting a ride was a good idea,” he admitted with a heavy exhale. “I – just… sorry. I don’t have the best memories of traveling through the Earth Kingdom. Warn me before you want to scam someone again.”

“Sure thing,” she said, relieved that it hadn’t changed into a serious argument.

Toph knew that there was a huge story hidden in these memories even without using her bending, but it wasn’t the right time to ask. She took the tailor’s advice seriously; she would wait for Sparky to open at his own pace. As long as she had enough patience…

They sat in silence; the sounds of the cart made a comforting background noise. Toph took some pieces of hay and started tangling them into knots. Being blind was so boring. Sparky wasn’t doing anything interesting either. Toph suspected that he hadn’t been sleeping that night, that would explain why he’d been so clumsy during their hike.

At some point, Sparky leaned over her side and put his head on her shoulder. Toph was surprised by the gesture but she didn’t mind, when she could feel his presence she wasn’t completely blind. She just got used to the weight on her shoulder when Sparky violently straightened.

“I’m sorry,” he said hoarsely with a soft tune of embarrassment.

“No offense, Sparks, but I think you could really use a nap after you stumbled over every root in that forest.”

“That’s not –“ He started to speak but cut himself in the middle of the sentence. “Fine,” he growled under his breath. “I stumbled over almost every root. It’s just… a rough day.”

Toph was used to being pampered but not pampering others, but in this case, bullying into self-care would be a better term. She leaned over Sparky’s side, getting comfortable while tangling herself over his arm. He was so warm. “Whatever… just don’t wake me, Sparks.”

She felt his heart beating with confusion but he didn’t protest.

 


 

“Love, calm down,” Ra said to calm his wife. Keyki has never been good at stressful situations. “Nothing happened to the girl and it wasn’t your fault.”

Keyki put her head on his shoulder and rubbed her face with her palm. “But I said those stupid things. What was I thinking? I’m so stupid.”

Normally, Ra would give her a comforting hug but after the accident he preferred to focus on the road more than usual. They were just entering the town, despite the incident they managed to arrive before the sunset. “You are not stupid,” he assured.

“I told the blind girl to look around.”

Ra chuckled, pulling the rains to the right in the barn’s direction. “Maybe a little stupid.”

That comment earned him a light punch to the shoulder as he stopped the cart. It was high time to check on their passengers once again and maybe offer them some more help as a redress. Ra suspected that if not the girl’s pleads her brother wouldn’t let that pass, the kid had been looking at him – but mostly at Keyki – with pure fury.

They walked to the back of the trailer and found both kids asleep. The boy was slumped in the corner, his head turned to the side which made the horrific scar the first thing Ra noticed. The girl was embracing him as if she was a human-catopus.

“Do we wake them?” Keyki asked.

“We need to unload the trailer before it rains,” Ra said. “We have to wake them.”

As they talked the girl stirred carefully raising her head, her brother didn’t move still deep in his sleep. “Are we in the town already?” she asked and yawned.

“To be precise we are on our farm but the town is five minutes from here.”

“Great,” the girl smiled. “Sleepyhead, wake up.” She gently shook her brother’s shoulder. Ra smiled at his wife observing the adorable scene. “Come on, rise and shine, Sparks.”

The boy opened his eyes and tensed, looking around with a wary confusion. Ra supposed that he hadn’t planned to fall asleep when he’d been relucent about the ride in the first place.

“Sparks?” Keyki asked about the weird nickname.

Ra noticed that he grabbed the swords laying at his side, all without taking an eye from them. His little sister wasn’t aware of his hostility and she playfully squeezed his middle.

“He has a sparkling personality. True sunshine,” the girl explained grinning at the boy. “Especially when someone wakes him.” He turned his glare at the girl when she tugged on his sleeve. “Come on!”

The kids grabbed their stuff and with wobbly movements get to the back of the trailer. Ra noticed the confidence in movements he wouldn’t have expected to see in a blind girl.

“Do you need a hand?” he asked when she hesitated, leaning over the edge.

After a moment shrugged and reached with her hand. “Sure.”

Ra wanted to take her in his arms and put her on the ground, but the second she grabbed his arm, she jumped by herself. He was surprised by the girl's good coordination. Then he looked at her brother, struggling with holding the bag, swords, and a stone staff at once while balancing on wobbly hay. “Need a hand?”

The boy glared at him and jumped over the trailer’s edge. He winced when his feet touched the ground but quickly hid it and walked to his sister’s side. “No, sir. Thank you for the ride. It’s time for us.”

“Before that,” Keyki started; the boy took a small step back. “I want to apologize. Lee, right?” The boy nodded stiffly. “I don’t know what I’m saying when I’m stressed. I can see you take good care of your sister.”

“And we apologize for the accident once again,” added Ra. “Is there anything else we can do for you?”

The girl grinned and waved with her hand. “No hard feelings… Getting hit was worth the hay bed.”

“Are you sure you don’t have to see the healer?” Keyki asked. “We can pay.”

“I’m sure I wouldn’t see him anyway,” the girl said waving her hand in front of her milky eyes. Keyki turned red from embarrassment. “I’m fine.”

The boy cleared his throat looking in the town’s direction. “We have to go,” he said to anyone specific.

His little sister grabbed his hand. “All right, all right, Mr. Impatient… Your hay is the most comfortable I’ve ever touched.”

“Um… thank you?” Ra said taken off guard by the odd compliment.

The siblings walked away quickly; the boy looked over his shoulder a couple of times before they disappeared from their eyesight. Ra wasn’t surprised by his lack of trust; he’d heard stories about how unfairly mix-blooded people were treated in some places. Fortunately, most people in this part of the kingdom were rather open-minded.

“I did it again,” Keyki sighed, overreacting her another unfortunate word choice.

“Don’t worry.” Ra patted her back. “She looked quite amused.”

His wife made a dramatic sound and grabbed the rake.

 


 

Zuko brought as many supplies as they could fit into their bags. It turned out that the ride took a little over an hour, so a small dose of reckless sleep wasn’t enough to give them the energy to travel during the night.

Toph used the same scam on the elderly couple who run the inn. She lied almost as easily as Azula, which was quite terrifying. At least with her leading the show, all Zuko had to do was pretending to be a broody older brother – he was good at that role.

After Toph finished her scam they got a cozy room and a warm dinner. The lady charged them only a quarter of the actual price. “If you hadn’t shown her the sack, I’m sure I would manage to get the room for free.”

“Toph, we could’ve easily afforded the full price,” Zuko muttered.

She shrugged, throwing herself on the bed. “But where would be the fun in that?”

Zuko didn’t have the energy to argue. Before he started to worry about another sleepless night his eyelids became heavy, he drifted to sleep hearing Toph’s soft snores.

 


 

The Avatar had flown over that town.

They overheard that when one excited merchant was telling the story to his customers. It wasn’t valuable information – they already knew the direction. Thanks to Toph’s stolen money Zuko proposed buying an ostrich horse so they could travel faster, without risking any more rides with strangers.

Toph named him Shriek, and it was painfully accurate name. Zuko hoped that the animal would finally stop making those terrible noises, maybe it was only the excitement of getting new owners.

They were ready to go but Zuko had one more thing to do. He traced his fingers over the letter he wrote this morning, he stopped himself from reading it again, sure that he would change his mind about sending it. He had to send it. There was a stall with messenger birds on their way. Sending a stupid letter wasn’t hard…

“What are you stressing about?” Toph asked.

“Nothing.”

Toph bumped him with her elbow. “Come on… Spill it.”

Zuko sighed not seeing the point in hiding the truth. “I have to send a letter.” Toph didn’t say anything, patiently waiting for more explanations. “To the man that got me a job for your family. He… I have to apologize for wasting the opportunity he gave me.”

It was obvious that Toph had questions but – thanks Agni – she wasn’t asking them. “I wouldn’t call it wasting… You wrote for me a neat tournament form.”

Zuko smiled at Toph’s attempt to light his sullen aura but the guilt was still heavy on his chest. His palm was sweaty when he was paying the courier. He couldn’t make up his mind if it was good or bad that he wouldn’t get a letter back…

Mr. Xaalo’s words of disappointment in him would hurt, so maybe it was better that way.

 


 

They haven’t found any new leads. The second day of the search was coming to an end and they were in the middle of nowhere. At the beginning of the ride, Toph was sitting straight in front of Zuko, but now she was leaning against his chest, making it hard to move the reins.

“We need a place for the night,” she said tiredly.

“I’m looking for something.”

Toph straightened in the saddle. “Stop for a second and let me see.”

Zuko could only imagine how uncomfortable riding with her feet in the air had to be. He stopped Shriek and Toph immediately jumped on the ground.

“There’s a cool cave nearby, we could sleep there,” she said pointing the direction. Zuko saw how the corner of her mouth lifted into a smirk. He knew he wouldn’t like the idea she came up with. “Scribey had said no but… What would Sparky say for a small sparring session?”

 

 

 

 

Notes:

Ok, so first of all I would like to announce that during this mean chapter I've experienced an existential crisis. 1k words were rubbish and it had been annihilated. But after tones of frustration, this long monster was created.
I truly hope it's fine because after the shit I deleted everything seems like poetry 🤣

Ok, enough of my Zuko-inspired self-loathing. Actually, a lot of things happened 🤔 fluff! (I'm an absolute sucker for their cute siblings' time, and that's why I put here oc's pov. sue me but I decided that it's the cutest way)
The forest (and earth) officially hate Zuko
Toph began her scamming much earlier and granted Zuko a heart attack
Letter to Xaalo 🥺

yeah a lot happened in this existential crisis chapter 🤣 I need some comments so you can tell me if it all makes sense now. I would say how long I plan this field trip to be but we all know it would be a lie!

Cure my crisis breakdown and comment! (I'm so low making emotional appeals 🤣) I just want to experience all ways of begging for comments

 


see ya!

Chapter 17

Notes:

Ok so my flawless schedule had been destroyed and I'm two days too late but I'm going to blame crazy over 30 Celsius degrees temperatures
I can't work when I'm melting

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

The cave was hidden under a low hill, Zuko would never spot it by himself, which made it a perfect place to stay for the night. The entrance was wide and it led to a half-open space where they could safely leave Shriek out of eventual prying eyes. Zuko prepared some food for the ostrich horse and secured him with a rope that Toph bent to the ground.

Toph pointed at the narrow space at the back of the cave. “That tunnel leads to a cavern, we could use it for our sparing,” she said rubbing her hands with a grin on her face.

It turned out they weren’t as exhausted as they thought. After getting off Shriek’s back and having some dinner, energy returned to them. Zuko had agreed for the sparring but he’d thought they would wait to the morning and he would have more time to mentally brace himself. He wanted to get rid of the absurd bending fear for good. He couldn’t wander through the Earth Kingdom and recoil every time he saw earthbending.

Surprisingly, he wasn’t afraid of going deeper underground. He lit a small flame in his palm so he could see something. He wanted to avoid dumb injuries like it’d been happening in the forest. His unlucky ankle still felt a little tender after stepping into that hole.

Toph widened the tunnel in some places where Zuko had trouble fitting between claustrophobic walls. It was, well… terrifying – the walls moving around him, the lack of control over it, only trust that Toph wouldn’t decide to narrow the tunnel and trap him here. Zuko knew she didn’t have any reason to do it but his mind refused to stop playing similar scenarios. Azula would do this for fun.

“You don’t like caves, Sparks?” Toph asked as she moved a huge boulder out of their way.

Zuko made his flame a little brighter. “Not when they are so narrow.”

“Then you should like this,” she said proudly.

Zuko felt that they entered a much bigger space because his shoulders weren’t constantly brushing over rough walls. But he could see only the small area where his flame glowed.

Toph crossed her arms. “You don’t like it?”

“I – well… I can’t see it.”

Toph frowned visibly confused. “Why?”

Zuko smirked at the irony. “Toph, there’s completely dark.”

 


 

They got outside to gather some wood to start fires so Zuko could see anything. Honestly, he should’ve seen that coming – it was obvious there would be too dark to see anything. Apparently, he was too occupied with bracing himself for witnessing real combat bending for the first time since the earth prison.

“No offense but it’s lame that you need light to see stuff,” Toph grumbled with her arms full of dry wood.

Zuko just rolled his eyes, more focused on balancing the huge pile of his own. According to Toph, the cave was huge, so Zuko decided that they needed to build four bonfires. He’d been worried that they would run out of oxygen with all the fire but Toph assured him that the cave had an exceptional airflow.

Getting through the tunnel with hands full of wood was problematic. Toph couldn’t make it wider without destabilizing the whole cave, so they took several turns. Finally, the piles of wood were placed in the cavern’s corners. Zuko took a deep breath and with a swift motion, he sent four blasts straight into the wood.

Zuko opened his mouth, looking around. “That’s… a really nice cave.”

In some places the stone walls were covered in shimmering minerals, it cast a shine on the floor, making it look like water. It flickered alongside the fire movements, changing its color when the light caught different crystals. Zuko inhaled slowly and took control over the flames – now the dancing light matched his breathing.

It looked astonishing.

 Zuko glanced at Toph, it was the most beautiful thing he’d seen since he began his wander through the Earth Kingdom. The girl stood with crossed arms and a proud smirk on her face, she wasn’t looking at any –

She couldn’t see it, Zuko realized suddenly.

Toph crouched and put her palm on the ground. “It’s a pity you can’t see that, Sparks.” Zuko must’ve misheard unless Toph started reading his mind. “The structure of that cave is so good that I would take it as my work. The tunnel was crappy but here I can bend and nothing will collapse on our heads.”

Zuko was sure Uncle would have some proverb about different perspectives, something about how we all see beauty in different things, and more similar stuff. Uncle would adore that cave – he always had a thing for shimmering trinkets.

 


 

Toph cracked her knuckles. “Shall we begin?”

“I – um… I would prefer to run through my katas first.”

“Don’t tell me you need a warm-up after carrying that wood,” Toph grumbled.

Sparky shifted his weight from one leg to the other, Toph had it classified as his nervous manner. “Not that. I – “ He hesitated which only made Toph more interested in what he was about to say. “I’m out of practice since I’m in the Earth Kingdom,” he said bitterly.

It made sense – Toph has never witnessed any firebending here. On the Earth Rumble she’d fought with that one dude who called himself Fire Nation Man, he was just a mediocre earthbender. But the public always reacted with sick enthusiasm when he was falling off the ring. How would they react for a real Fire Nation Prince?

That would be a rocky welcoming…

“How long are you in the Earth Kingdom,” she asked. It was obvious why he wasn’t bending whenever he wanted, especially because he was a convict. Damn… Toph was so curious about that story.

“Over three months… maybe four. I’m not sure.”

“You weren’t bending for that long?” Toph asked shocked.

Sparky shifted his weight again. “I was,” he said rapidly as if he was defending himself. “Some minor stuff… um, meditation, and actual moves a couple of times.” He sounded ashamed. “I will do it quickly and – “

“Do your fire dance, Sparks,” Toph interrupted. “I will practice my sculpturing.”

She felt his heart slowing in relief, he didn’t say anything which meant he probably nodded. Toph couldn’t imagine not bending for such a long time, she would’ve gone mad without her precious earth. She doubted someone could forget how to bend but if Sparky’s confidence needed a warm-up, she could wait a little longer.

Toph sat close to one of the bonfires and made herself a stone to practice on. The heat smacked her skin and she started wondering how would it feel to duel with different kinds of benders. The fight with Twinkle Toes had been tricky. Sometimes he was invisible to her but after their kidnapping, she learned to predict some of his jumps and landings. She had never fought with waterbender or firebender but it should be easier than airbending.

After a boring beginning, Sparky switched into some more interesting sequences. She heard some whooshing when he was kicking and punching. The dynamic was similar to earthbending, though his moves were more fluid, nowhere close to Twinkle Toes, but still. Toph began to guess which move Sparky was about to perform just based on his footwork.

She noticed that the bonfire was doing something weird. It grew when Sparky kicked or punched as if it wanted to match his rhythm. He finished another sequence and the fire next to her cooled down.

“I’m ready,” he said, panting softly.

Toph cracked her knuckles – this time for real. “I’m not a fan, but what are our rules?”

“Um… No attacks that will seriously injure?”

“That what sparring is about, Sparks,” she laughed. She liked a fierce fight but it wasn’t the goal in this case. “We fight until the opponent’s back hits the ground?”

“All right,” he agreed, his heart still pounding fast after his fire dance.

Toph walked to the center of the cavern. Sparky bowed to her and she barely held her snicker. Toph joined this weird performance and bowed back – apparently they were using Fire Nation’s customs but Toph didn’t mind. Sparky adapted his stance.

Finally.

Toph stepped to her right; Sparky mirrored her move. She never liked to attack first and other earthbenders were easy to provoke. Sparky seemed to wait for her move, the same way she was waiting for his. They almost made a full circle and no one attacked.

“Are you the ‘ladies first’ type, Sparks?” she asked, not losing her focus. “I’ll make an exception, just for you.”

Toph stomped, sending a crack in the ground just between Sparky’s feet. It was her classic move, many times she’d dealt with her opponent this way. But Sparky rolled to his side just before the earth could wreck his balance.

So Sparky likes to play fast.

Toph repeated the same trick once again, but this time she sent similar cracks to his both potential dodge spots. Take that Sparks. He jumped just where she’d expected him to. But he smoothed the ground with a fire blast and landed without much trouble in the middle of her trap.

He was in a good position to throw fire at her, so she bent a pillar from the ground behind him to destroy his balance once again. It only nudged him in the side, because Sparky was already moving – with a few jumps he was crouching on her own pillar. Toph stomped and the stone disappeared, leaving sparky sprawled on the floor.

His back wasn’t touching the ground so it wasn’t a win yet.

She felt his ragged breaths after all those jumps and dodging but he hasn’t thrown any fire at her. Toph delayed another attack to see if Sparky would use the opportunity to go to offense. She faked the move and he reacted. Finally, there was some fire, but not aimed at her. Sparky made a crazy motion with fire shooting out of his feet and in a second he was standing again.

“You know that both sides should attack, right?” Toph growled and shook the ground under his feet to irritate him.

He dodged and regained his balance with slightly more difficulties. It was just dumb – he was obviously getting tired, yet he wasn’t attacking or giving up the fight. Was he going easy on her?

Toph bent a witless stone pillar at his side and fake-tripped. Sparky easily dodged her pitiful attack and he had a clear shot.

He didn’t attack.

She got up, less gracefully than he’d done earlier, and now they both were in a perfect position to attack. Toph even gave him a bonus second… Was he thinking she couldn’t defend herself against some stupid flames? Sparky knew that she hated when people were treating her as if she was fragile and helpless, yet he was doing it right now.

Toph was done with it. She made a boulder and threw it right at Sparky to make a point. Before that she bent two stone walls around him so he couldn’t dodge – it’s time for fire, Sparks. His stance was rooted so he should easily destroy the rock with some fancy firewall.

No fire collided with her boulder.

The stone hit Sparky in the chest and send him backward. It shouldn’t have happened! He was in a perfect position to defend himself… Yet, his back hit the wall and he released a quiet groan.

“Sparks!” Toph didn’t care about the fight anymore and ran towards him. “Sparky!”

She hadn’t put much force into that attack. He should be all right... He should be all right…

Toph crouched at his side and quickly took the boulder off his chest. He was making disturbing wheezing noises… He wasn’t breathing right; she felt his heart doing some crazy cacophony.

Toph shook him by his shoulder. “Sparky, I’m sorry… Sparks,” she cried, not knowing how to help him.

 


 

It had started all right.

Zuko ran through his katas with fire and his body let him do every move, unlike the times he’d practiced in Mr. Xaalo’s basement. His inner flame was doing fine, all of the morning meditations definitely helped to keep it stable. He was ready for a stupid sparring – he could do this. No more pathetic excuses. No more being weak and scared.

When Toph’s attacks started, Zuko wasn’t so confident anymore.

He was dodging her rocks but it was more of a flight-or-fight response than a planned strategy. Remaining in control of his breath was hard but he managed to do it. He even used his fire a couple of times. He knew it was just a sparring, but his mind couldn’t understand it and told him to panic.

Toph had a weird expression, and then everything collapsed.

She created stone walls at his both sides. Zuko lost the fight with his lungs, thinking that she would crush him. Then, he noticed a stone coming right at him. It was just like in the prison and Zuko couldn’t move, as if his hands were bound behind his back once again.

In the last second before the hit, he managed to rip out of the frozen shock and cover himself with his hands. The force of the impact sent him backward but he wasn’t aware of his body anymore.

He couldn’t breathe. His chest hurt and it felt as if his lungs collapsed. Did Toph crush all of his ribs and he wouldn’t take a breathe ever again? Black spots danced all over his vision, something ringed in his ears, and something was making weird noises.

He couldn’t breathe…

Some of the weight was taken from his chest but it didn’t help. Zuko tried to curl and squeezed his eyes. He was choking. He tried to gasp but it didn’t work, it only made him panic further.

Zuko was laying on his back and someone was touching him. His eyes were open but without air, his vision was completely black.

“ – sorry… sorry… Sparks, please… stop that and breathe, please –“

Without much hope that it would work, he listened to the voice. Some air got into his lungs. It hurt as if something was choking him from the inside but he did it again, and again, and again

“Zuko! Zuko, say something… please. I’m sorry!”

Toph was clinging to his arm. He was laying flat on his back. Breathing hurt but with much effort, he could do it.

“Sparks –“ Zuko coughed and looked at Toph, his vision almost cleared out of the dark spots. Her face was wet from tears. Toph was crying. “I’m so sorry, please –“

“I –“ He tried to say something but it changed into a pained cough. “Wh – what happened?” he choked out, disoriented. All he remembered was the pain in his chest and that he couldn’t breathe.

Sparky?” Toph’s milky eyes were staring at him, tears still falling down her cheeks. “I’m sorry… You looked as if you were ready, and I thought you would easily deflect it. I’m so sorry. Are you all right? I didn’t mean to hurt you.”

Toph was panicking. Toph shouldn’t panic. The memories of what happened were slowly coming back to him. “I’m fine… Just – just give me a second.”

Toph nodded eagerly, never letting go of his wrist, her fingers digging into his skin. Zuko closed his eyes and breathed deeply, feeling the knots in his chest slowly getting loose. He was afraid that his chest had been crushed but now, with a clearer mind, he realized that the stone just hit him into the diaphragm. It was good… no fractures.

It all had happened because of his pathetic fear that he couldn’t overcome.

“Is it better?” Toph asked.

Zuko wrapped his arm around his middle and with a soft groan leaned against the wall. “Yeah… I’m sorry.”

“…What?”

He couldn’t read Toph’s face. “I’m sorry.”

“You are insane!” she exclaimed. “I thought I killed you and you are apologizing?!” She wiped the rest of the tears from her face. “Do – do you need something? I didn’t know how to help you.”

Zuko assured her that he didn’t need anything other than some more time to catch his breath for good. He felt awful – because of his weakness Toph thought it was her fault. She didn’t do anything wrong, Zuko should’ve easily defended himself from that attack.

He had to explain it to her… but later – when he had enough air for long sentences.

 


 

Toph has been listening to Sparky’s breathing since the incident. Every time it changed, even in the slightest, she tensed and paid him even more attention. It had been terrifying. She’d been truly helpless. She didn’t want to feel like that ever again.

Toph was leaning against sleeping Shriek, trying to eat an apple but it tasted sour with the guilt gathered in her stomach. “I shouldn’t have bent those walls around you,” she said, recreating the fight over and over in her head.

Sparky was sitting on her left, leaning over the wall, with his hand against his middle. “Nothing happened. It’s not your fault. I should’ve handled this.”

“Why didn’t you attack even once?” she asked.

Sparky shifted his weight. “I – uh… well,” he stuttered before taking a deep breath. “You remember I had been limping, right?” Toph nodded. “Well… earthbender did that to me when I couldn’t defend myself. It was… uh, he threw a stone right at my leg.”

Just like she did.

“Since then I – um…” Sparky continued, clearly reluctant to share the story. “I’ve developed aversion towards earthbending. I thought I could handle the sparing but apparently, I’m too weak for that.”

“So you are afraid of earthbending?”

It took him a moment to respond. “Yes,” he admitted quietly. “Sorry… that’s why I wasn’t attacking.”

Toph smashed her apple on the floor. It woke up Shriek and he used that opportunity to eat the fruit. “You are scared of earthbending and you agreed to a fight with me?!” she exclaimed. “Are you insane?”

“I’m sorry,” he said again. “It’s not your fault, you couldn’t know that.”

Toph didn’t know what to say. She couldn’t know that but it didn’t mean it was Sparky’s fault! He was the one who got hurt... She had hurt him and he kept apologizing. This whole fight could’ve ended much worse. How could she not notice that his heart was beating too fast due to fear, not physical effort?

Sparky shifted into a laying position and turned his back on Toph. “We should rest before tomorrow.”

And like that Sparky ended this definitely not finished conversation.

 


 

Zuko felt terrible.

He woke up early and started meditating, trying to fight the shame that wanted to drown him since yesterday. He had a faint bruise on his stomach but it was only his fault. It didn’t hurt that much – only when he was touching it. At least he could travel without becoming dead weight.

After the sun rose, he sat in the entrance of the cave and breathed. The dreadful moments of yesterday remaindered him to appreciate the simple pleasure of having air in his lungs. Any encounter with hostile earthbenders and he would end sprawled on the ground again. No one would coddle him as Toph did. It’s been so long since the prison and he still reacted like a scared child.

Someone tapped his shoulder and he grabbed the hand immediately.

“I called you but you weren’t listening,” Toph explained sitting next to him. Zuko released her hand muttering a quiet apology. She only shrugged. “For starters… if some crazy fire dude burned me, I’m sure I wouldn’t enjoy firebending.”

Zuko frowned. “What do you mean?”

Toph bumped him with her shoulder. “That it’s not weak, Sparks. It’s normal. But I’m not here to talk about feelings,” she said a little disgusted. “Listen, I can help you.”

“How?”

“For a good start, I won’t throw stuff at you,” she chuckled.  “I don’t know… I can help you to be more comfortable around earthbending. We can figure something out.”

At this moment, Zuko considered himself as a lost cause. “Why do you want to do this?”

“You are helping me to find Twinkle Toes and his band,” she said. It took Zuko a few seconds to realize that the weird nickname belonged to the Avatar. “I owe you.”

Zuko shrugged, and then he realized that Toph wouldn’t know he did this. It was so irritating. “I doubt it will work – “ Toph punched him in his arm. “Ouch!”

“What were you saying?” she asked. Her fist hovered in the air, clearly waiting to punch him again.

“Fine,” Zuko grumbled, not wanting to add new bruises to his collection.

Toph grinned. “I thought so.”

 


 

They have been riding in the same direction since they had departed from Gaoling. The flying creature could’ve changed its path a thousand times. Zuko knew how irrational their maneuvers had been when he’d been following them before the North.

When he was starting to lose hope he noticed a mess of white fur tangled to the upper branches of a tree. It had to belong to the bison.

“Toph, I think I found a new lead,” he said to the girl who was napping on his chest.

She straightened immediately. “Really? What is it?”

“Their bison is sheading. We have to follow its fur.”

She leaned over his chest again and groaned. “I’m not going to help with that,” she grumbled. “When I join them we are going to travel by tunnels.”

“I doubt the airbender will be fond of that idea,” Zuko said.

“I don’t care. He’s going to learn earthbending through immersion.”

 

 

 

Notes:

Zuko is like "I'm afraid of earthbenidng I'm gonna fight with a bending prodigy! Nothing can go wrong!!!!!"

So now he feels ashamed and Toph feels guilty. Amazing field trip! 😆 So much ~fuuun~

I intended to put some more "ideological/what's their motivations" talk into this chapter but as always it turned out longer than I expected and I'm already late. But just to let you know they are going to talk more about why are they chasing Aang and what they want to do (I guess... if the story will want to talk about it, I have no control)

🥺 just imagine poor panicked Toph not knowing what to do, only feeling that Sparky cannot breathe and it's because of her..... I just think that's super heartbreaking.

So well... as always I'm waiting for comments. Let me know what do you think about how this sparring turned out.

**I would start to talk about the ending of the story.... duuuh I would put a final chapter count but I don't want to make a clown of myself again

Chapter 18

Notes:

I might be lying with the chapter count. We all know this.

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

Strands of bison’s fur were tangled in the branches alongside the road. It was so irresponsible to leave such an obvious trial. They were so stupid… Did they stop paying attention to evasion after they’d dumped him in prison? They hadn’t been that reckless before the North. Or maybe he’d been an idiot…

Zuko knew he wouldn’t be able to capture the monk. He was doing it for Toph, and because he had nothing better to do. For three years he’d been following his mission, then his goal changed into a simple survival. After the blessed time of ignorance – the break –  he needed a new goal, the old one wasn’t achievable anymore.

He’s gotten so used to striving for something that the prospect of just living seemed peculiar.

Shriek was much faster and stronger than the animal Zuko had been riding to Gaoling. He reacted to every pull on the reins and a nudge of his boot. It made the ride really pleasant, almost relaxing. Toph didn’t share his opinion. She was either complaining about being blind or napping against Zuko’s chest.

“It’s just a lot of boring quivering and clatter… Wake me when it’s ground time,” she’d said before tucking herself comfortably on the front of the saddle, her limbs sprawled over Zuko’s arms and legs.

Toph shifted in her sleep, pushing her elbow into Zuko’s bruised stomach. He pulled on the reins when he bent to swallow a gasp, which made Shriek turn into the bushes alongside the road. The ostrich horse released a pained squeak and stopped without Zuko’s command.

Toph was still asleep. “Toph, it’s ground time,” he said shaking her shoulder and holding her sharp elbow at a safe distance. “Come on.”

“Finally,” she yawned and bent herself stairs to get off Shriek’s back without the need to jump. “Do you want to use the stairs, Sparky?”

Zuko shrugged and walked down her stairs, even though he could’ve jumped without any trouble. Toph bent the structure back into the ground and grinned at him.

“So you are fine with casual earthbending, huh?”

It took Zuko a second to realize that she’d just tested him. He wasn’t a fan of earth moving under his feet but he was, in fact, okay with Toph being the one bending it. “I guess,” he muttered and walked closer to Shriek’s head.

Zuko crouched to take a closer look at the animal’s legs and immediately found the reason for the squeak. He had a bleeding scratch from the recent collision and a thorn stuck just above his talon. There were no thorns in those bushes so he had to hurt himself earlier.

“Why didn’t you tell us, huh?” Zuko asked petting his beak. Shriek shook his head and stomped with his hurt leg. “Nuh-uh. Don’t do that. We have to take care of that thorn, boy.”  

Toph chuckled behind his back. “I wouldn’t take you for a softie towards animals, Sparks.”

“He can’t carry us like this,” Zuko said ignoring her remark. “But without him, we are going to be too slow to catch up with the Avatar.”

Toph pointed at trees on her left. “There’s a village over there.”

Shriek stomped with his hurt leg again. “All right, bud.” Zuko took his bag off the saddle and grabbed the reins. “Lead the way,” he said to Toph.

 


 

Helping Sparky to overcome his earthbending fear could be great preparation for training Twinkle Toes. She’d had nightmares about the moment when Sparky’s back hit the wall, when she couldn’t sense his breathing, or calm the insane speed of his heart. Now he was walking next to Shriek and muttering soft words of encouragement every time the animal limped.

“When we were fighting…” she started carefully, guessing that Sparky wouldn’t want to talk about it. “When did it become bad? When I threw that rock or earlier?”

Sparky shifted his weight, for a moment his balanced steps changed into limping again. He huffed humorlessly. “The beginning? You saw it so – “

“I’m blind, Sparks.”

“You know what I mean!” he snapped raising his voice. “You felt it. Whatever.”

“All that I felt was you, being agile and fast,” Toph retorted loudly to match Sparky’s tone. “I wouldn’t keep attacking if I knew you were freaking out. I was irritated that you dodged pretty much everything!”

“Except for the rock,” he muttered venomously.

“Stop being so moody when I’m trying to help!”

Toph would gladly bend him into the ground to make a point but unfortunately, for obvious reasons, that option was off the table. Sparky huffed and the air around became warmer.

“Did… did you just breathed fire?” Toph asked, she recalled she’d already felt something similar around angry Sparky.

“It was just a small puff of smoke,” he grumbled defensively. “I’m not that stupid.”

“That’s not what I meant!” Toph stomped in front of the ostrich horse and started walking backwards. “Shriek, could you please bite mister grumpy pants over there?”

Sparky patted the animal’s neck. “Don’t do that.”

The ostrich horse nudged Sparky with his head, which was as far from a bite as it could get.

“Traitor,” she hissed at the animal but it was Sparky who recoiled. That was weird… But Toph was pissed and ready to start her plan so she couldn’t care less. “Tell me when it’s going to be too much, Prince Grumpiness.”

And like that Toph started her brazen bending spectacle.

She made some pillars and arches, then she started juggling with stones over the road. Nothing was too close to actually endanger any of them but she wasn’t limiting herself either. Sparky’s heart speeded a couple of times when she performed a new move but he didn’t say a word to stop her.

 


 

The town was one of the poorest Zuko saw during his travels. There were barely any people around except for the guards who were giving Zuko creeps. It was hard not to turn over his shoulder every few seconds, but it would only make them look more suspicious.

Finally, they found a stall where they could buy food for Shriek, of course, the guards had to choose this place to play dice. It was fine. There was nothing wrong or suspicious in buying stupid food. Toph wanted to scam the seller but Zuko dissuaded her from that idea – those people were already poor; besides, they had enough money to afford it.

Toph stayed close to Shriek when Zuko tried to handle a small talk with the tired yet chatty shopkeeper. He could hear a muffled conversation and laughs of the soldiers sitting behind his back. He glanced at the guards and estimated that at least one of them looked like an earthbender.

The seller finally stopped talking and went to grab the food. Zuko spotted two kids hiding behind the stall. They threw something at the soldiers and ran away. Zuko doubted the joke was worth the consequences but it was none of his business. He just wanted the stupid bag of food.

“What do you think you are doing, stranger?”

Toph was already at his side when he turned around to face the soldiers.  Four men, three of them wielding spears, the bender in the middle had a mallet attached to his belt. Zuko had to clench his fist on the material of his tunic to stop himself from reaching for his swords.

“I’m buying food for my animal, sir,” Zuko answered. Toph would love to fight but it was the last thing they needed right now.

As if on cue the shopkeeper put the bag on the counter. “Here you go, young man,” he said kindly before he noticed the soldiers and tensed atmosphere. “What’s the problem, officers?”

“The stranger threw an egg at us,” the bender deadpanned, ignoring how ridiculous the accusation sounded.

The shopkeeper forced a smile. “Nonsense, gentlemen, I was talking to him the whole time,” he said giving Zuko a warning look. He nodded slowly, agreeing with the man’s version of events. He could tell those were the Gilo-kind guards. “Whoever did this must be already gone.”

“Are you questioning my authority?”

“Of course not, sir,” the shopkeeper’s voice trembled.

The earthbender turned his glare back to Zuko. “We can let this one slip since you’ve contributed to the army,” he said and put his huge hand over the bag of food. “Get lost, stranger.”

Despite his racing heart, Zuko put his hand on the bag before the man could steal it. He and the earthbender crossed their glares but before anything happened Toph tugged on Zuko’s sleeve, giggling childishly.

“Maybe a chicken flew over,” she suggested with a silly voice. The soldier frowned at her, Zuko saw his confusion when he noticed Toph’s unseeing eyes. Apparently, even a thug didn’t feel all right about robbing a blind child. “Brother, you told me a story about chickens! Do you remember?”

Zuko cleared his throat, knowing that he was forced to participate in her scam. Again. “Uh, yeah… The tale of three chickens.”

“Exactly! I wish I could touch a chicken… to just know how it looks.” She continued, ignoring Zuko’s poor support. “Mr. Soldier, is the chicken still there?” she asked pulling on the man’s arm.

“I – uh… no?” the soldier was speechless because of Toph’s acting. Zuko used this moment to hide the food in his bag. “Uh… I’m not sure there was a chicken, uh –“

“No chicken?” Toph asked with as much sadness as someone could put into something so ridiculous. Toph clung to Zuko’s side when she realized he’d taken care of the food. “I’m scared. There’s so loud here… Can we go?”

“Yeah… um, yes.” Zuko tried to make his poor performance more believable by putting his arm around Toph’s shoulders. “Sure… let’s go.”

Toph waited until they were three turns from the soldiers to start giggling maniacally.

“I’m too good at this,” she grinned with pride. “You weren’t so bad yourself, Sparks! Do you really know ‘The tale of three chickens’?”

“No.”

He knew ‘The tale of three turtle ducks’. Toph crooked her head, most likely sensing that the statement wasn’t entirely true. Before she could question him about it a boy jumped from around the building right in front of them.

“This was so cool!”

Toph pointed at him with her finger. “The actual egg thrower!”

The kid scratched his neck. “I’m not a chicken but yeah… they deserved it. I watched you both! They wanted to steal from you but you scammed them! It was so amazing!”

Toph beamed proudly. “I know. Scamming is an art.”

The kid glanced at Zuko. “Oh, and thanks for not ratting me out.”

Toph took Shriek’s reins and stepped closer to the overexcited kid. “Is there a chance you know something about ostrich horses?”

The kid shrugged. “We have them on our farm. My dad is great with animals.” He grabbed Toph’s hand and tugged her. “Come with me. I owe you.”

Toph didn’t even resist so Zuko had no other option than to trudge after them.

 


 

Hammering nails was definitely not one of Zuko’s talents, he’d already slammed his fingers twice. It was ironic that he would take care of crushing his hands himself, without any earthbender involved in the process.

Gansu glanced when, by some miracle, he finished repairing the first plank. “Try to strike lighter but more frequently,” he advised. Zuko nodded and tried the new tactic. “I know you and your sister are in the hurry but it would be better for your ostrich horse to rest for one night.”

Fortunately, the thorn hadn’t done much damage to Shriek’s leg. Gansu had put a bandage over the wound and the animal immediately went to sleep.

With his skills he will need the bandages next, Zuko thought as he started working on the second plank.

 


 

“Would you like to pet a chicken?” the kid – Li – asked after Sparky walked away to help Shriek.

Toph has never petted a chicken in her life so of course, she said yes. The boy led them to the pen full of loud animals. They were running in every direction and Toph couldn’t tell for sure how many birds were surrounding her.

“We have only pig chickens,” Li said and picked something from the ground. “Sit down and I will put it on your lap.”

Toph complied and Li put a grunting animal in her hands. It was less fluffy than she expected and its surface was kind of similar to Shriek’s back. She traced her fingers over a weird thing on its head and it purred.

“Don’t show it to my bro, he would pet it for the whole day,” Toph joked, stroking the animal under its chin.

Toph felt that Li’s heartbeat changed slightly. “He would?”

“Yeah, he likes animals.” Toph felt Li’s heart doing a characteristic twitch. “Why are you surprised?”

The question made the boy embarrassed. “Uh… It’s just, um… He looks intimidating… um… a little like them.”

It was an evidence that Sparky wasn’t paranoic. Toph didn’t want to get into the fake story with this kid. “He does?” she asked pretending to be surprised. “I’ve never seen him.”

“How could you – oh…”

Toph started giggling when Li realized that he fell for the joke, after a moment of embarrassment the boy laughed too. They played with chicken pigs until Li’s mother called them for dinner.

 


 

Li tried to ask definitely too many questions during the dinner but Gansu saved everyone from Zuko’s poor lying skills. They learned about Li’s older brother and the abuse of power in the town. Zuko didn’t feel like he should participate in those conversations, so he spent most of the time staring at his food and replaying the pitiful fight in his mind.

After the meal, Gansu brought them some blankets so they wouldn’t have to sleep on prickly hay. Zuko made him and Toph semi-comfortable lair in the corner of the barn. Toph was busy doing some weird thing to her toes so Zuko decided to clean up their supplies bag before sleeping.

One question has been echoing in his mind since they’d started the chase. “Why do you want to be the Avatar’s teacher?”

Toph turned to him, supporting her head on her bent arm. “It’s a gut feeling that I should help him,” she said with a shrug. “Moreover, the Avatar should learn from the best, which is me.”

Zuko huffed half-heartedly, he would like to have a scrap of Toph’s confidence.

“What do you want to do when we find them?” Toph asked in return.

Zuko sighed heavily. “I don’t know.”

“I can be really persuasive,” Toph offered toying with the hay under the blanket. “Angry Queen and Sarcasm Dude gonna get buried if they yell too much… I don’t think Twinkle would mind.”

Zuko frowned. “What are you talking about?”

“That you could join them with me.”

“No.”

“But you have nothing better to do so why –“

“I said no, Toph,” he snapped not leaving the girl a room for further arguments.

Zuko stood up from the floor started pacing around the barn.

It was exactly why he refused to think about his future. He didn’t want the Avatar’s group to know that he was the one who tracked them. They couldn’t know. It almost ended terribly when he was just living at Beifongs’, they wouldn’t let him walk away, knowing how easily he’d tracked them. Zuko had nowhere to go and he wouldn’t win the fight, for sure not with Toph on their side…

Was… was he acting against the Fire Nation by delivering the Avatar’s teacher?

No. No… he was just helping Toph. She couldn’t be alone on the run because she was twelve for Agni’s sake… It had nothing to do with further treason. Zuko was ashamed of being a traitor and he wouldn’t… he wouldn’t do it again. He might be an outlaw but he would stay loyal. He – he…

Zuko didn’t notice Toph on the way of his nervous pacing and he bumped right into her.

“That’s fine, Sparks.” She grabbed his wrist and pulled him to the makeshift bed. “I already learned what no means. Come on, it’s too late for that.” She pushed him on the hay and clung to his arm. “But know that I’m gonna miss my personal heater.”

 


 

Toph had her head rested on Zuko’s shoulder so he tried his best not to move. He was sick of staring at the barn roof, trying to sleep, but instead, beating himself up about every damned thing that happened during the last months.

“Are you sleeping?” he whispered when Toph moved slightly.

“You are thinking too loud to sleep, Sparks.”

“Sorry.”

Toph lightly nudged him with her elbow. “It’s fine. I’ve slept a lot during the ride. What’s on the crazy mind of yours?”

Zuko took a deep breath. “Could we um… could we work on my earthbending problem?” he forced the question through his throat. He’d become more familiar with admitting his weaknesses, but it was still difficult to ask for help. “I’m sorry for the way I acted earlier.”

Toph jumped to her feet in a second with a grin on her face. “What are you waiting for, grumpy pants?”

 


 

Zuko sliced through another stone dummy controlled by Toph with the blade of his sword. He couldn’t firebend in the open, flammable field but it didn’t matter. In the Earth Kingdom, he would have to rely on the swords anyway.

“Do you want me to speed my army a bit?” Toph asked after Zuko destroyed another brittle figure with a kick.

He didn’t want to end on the ground, fighting for his breath but, for now, he still had it under control. “Yeah,” he panted and adapted fighting stance again.

Toph kept the figures breakable so Zuko wouldn’t break his swords or bones during the fight. He dealt with another three attackers, feeling quite confident. But that was almost hand-to-hand, not a fight with an earthbender which was his main problem. Stone dummies weren’t similar to rocks thrown in a fight.

“I want to try with real earthbending,” Zuko said wiping the sweat from his forehead.

“My dummies are real earthbending.”

“You know what I mean.”

Toph hesitated and destroyed the half-created figure. “Are you sure?”

“I am,” Zuko said not sure if it was a lie or not. “Just keep the stones brittle enough so it won’t kill me, please. I – I’m ready but just in case.”

Toph shook her head in disbelief and rubbed her face. “No one ever asked me not to kill them in such a polite and apologetic way,” she said and adapted her stance.

 


 

“You can do much more than cutting cloth with those swords,” Toph praised Sparky on their way back to the barn.

Toph had expected that fight with Sparky without firebending would be just aiming stones at a moving and panicking target but she was wrong. He had been dodging a lot and a couple of times his heart speeded not due to fatigue. But in many cases, he’d actually waited for the stones head-on and dealt with them. She wouldn’t have expected that someone with only swords could stand a chance against her.

“I always liked weapons,” Sparky confessed with a whacked voice. Toph was sleepy herself and she’d been napping against her fire pillow for the best part of the day. Sparks had to be exhausted. “Except for the swords, I once had an inscribed knife from my uncle.”

Toph took the opportunity that sleepiness made Sparky more willing to share something about himself. “Really? What did it say?”

“Um… made in the Earth Kingdom on the one side and…” Sparky hesitated. She felt how his heartbeat speeded a bit, it was an emotion she wasn't sure how to classify. “Never give up without a fight on the other.”

Toph knew they has been watched since their sparing started. Li was careful enough that Sparky hadn’t spotted him but he wouldn’t get past Toph’s senses. When he heard the words written on the knife his heart literally fluttered and he ran back to his house.

Sparky happened to be a motivational speaker without even knowing about it.

“Where’s the knife now?” Toph asked when they entered the barn.

He flinched hard enough for her to feel it. “I don’t know. They took it.”

Toph decided not to ask who they were. She wasn’t sure if she wanted to know.

Sparky dragged his feet through the barn and basically collapsed on the blanket. She clung to the warmness of his arm and tucked herself comfortably.

“You don’t need the knife, you don’t give up anyway, Sparks,” she mumbled already half-asleep. He answered only with a muffled murmur.

She would miss sleepovers with him.

 


 

Zuko woke up from his slumber way past sunrise which made him disoriented and angry. Toph was snoring against his side, not at all bothered by his wriggling. He grumbled under his breath and decided to give her few more minutes before a wake-up.

Then Li’s mother ran to the barn crying. Her husband went to the front to save her older son, whose battalion had been captured.

“When the soldiers came back,” she continued telling the story through her tears. “Li tried to fight them! He said he wouldn’t give up without a fight. Then… then they took him. Please… help me. I – I don’t know what to do. I – I can’t lose them both.”

 


 

“I want to fight them,” Sparky said when they jumped off Shriek’s back in front of a group of soldiers. “I have to… I have to get rid of that fear,” he whispered.

She bumped him with her fist and stayed aside with Shriek. “You got this, Sparks.”

He dealt with three non-benders before the crowd managed to gather to watch the fight. Toph already knew Sparky felt good with close combat, especially when he couldn’t bend himself.

Toph stayed ready to help him when it came to the fight with the earthbender. Sparky sliced through few stones just like he’d done during the night. She’s never stopped listening to his heart but it kept beating strong, fueled by adrenaline. He started to struggle with repelling the attacks when the boulders became bigger, and the bender throwing them more frustrated.

She wouldn’t let Sparky lost just because he couldn’t use his full potential.

“Sparks!” she yelled to get his attention. “I’m gonna shield you! Get closer to him!”

She bent the first wall to save him from the attack that would’ve left him sprawled on the ground – there was no chance his swords would stop this. Sparky didn’t waste time and rushed closer to the bender. Toph provided him few more covers and he jumped behind every one of them just in time to dodge the stones. She was bending the ground really close to him and he didn’t even flinch.

The crowd cheered when Sparky crossed his swords on the soldier’s neck. “Let the kid go.”

The man was shaking in fear but he was trying to hide it. “Who do you think you are to tell me what to do,” he snarled.

“It doesn’t matter who I am,” Sparky said with a deadly steady voice. Toph walked closer to his side. “Let the kid go. This is the last chance.”

Toph sensed that the soldier tried to bend ground from under Sparky’s feet so she crushed a nearby wall on him. “I just wanted to add something extra from me,” she grinned. “It was amazing, Sparks,” she added more quietly which made his heart skip a beat even though he didn’t say a word.

Li’s mother had already freed him from his bonds and he basically threw himself on unexpecting and stunned Sparky.

“You were fantastic!” he practically yelled and started incoherently describing Sparky’s fight. “You only look like them but you are much better! Thank you!”

Them?”

Li paused. “I was wary of you because you look like Fire Nation and I hate them,” he explained digging a hole in the ground with his foot. “But you are not like them.”

Sparky took a couple of steps back when Li’s mother started thanking him. Toph knew those shorter breaths and twitchy heartbeats.

The scraps of Sparky’s pride were gone after that one simple, yet a stabbing sentence. She didn’t know everything but 'not longer a prince' had to have some identity problems already. A subtle ‘I hate you' didn’t help.

Applauses echoed behind them as they left the town.

 

 

 

 

Notes:

*Zuko's identity/mixed emotions party!!! everybody dance*

So like..... this thing was so long that I'm not even sure what happened here, what happened in the previous one, or what will happen in the future. No thoughts, head empty.

I guess there were a lot of siblings' cuddles and some animal fluff?? Sorry for hurting Shriek but he's okay, I assure you.
I changed the 'Zuko Alone Kid' name to Li (instead of Lee) for quite obvious reasons.

I've never actually tried to rewrite the episode and it was such a pain to go with my events but somehow put the original ones somewhere. I changed some stuff but I hope everything stayed clear enough.
The main arc of the episode changed a little - the goal was for Zuko to more or less overcome his fear. I think that in the plot of this story he'd already seen things that "Zuko Alone" showed in the series. Even the family in the canon made it obvious that people hate fire nation so I don't want to repeat things.
I made it like this because I needed the setup for the big Zuko "fuck my fear I'm badass" moment and the episode with a fight was perfect. Though I didn't write the fight super detailed on purpose because a more complicated fighting sequence already had a place in the previous chapter. It would be boring, for you and for me.

Oh and also! No dramatic introductions, Zuko… sorry my boy but it was so dumb of you

Ok..... I ranted. We are really going to the end of this part (yes I plan to do more) and now it's comment time because I'm really curious how this rewriting business turned out and how many of you is reading it!!

Leave the comment to cure Zuko's identity issues.

_---> next chap the chase will come to the end (zuko don't want to see the gang) hmmmmmmm interesting *evil author's ploting*

 


ok that's it, comments are yours

Ps. If anyone feels artistic I can sell my soul for any art of those two (or whatever else) just saying 😏😏

Chapter 19

Notes:

*looks at the chapter count* 😶😶

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

 

 

You are not like them.

The ties with his homeland kept shattering and he couldn’t do anything about it.

He’d helped the boy because it was the right thing to do, the soldiers were a bunch of thugs, they had no right to recruit an eleven-year-old to the army. He’d actually done it – he fought an earthbender, with Toph’s help, but still. The boy and almost everyone he’d met in the Earth Kingdom had been suspicious of him before he turned out to be not like them.

All this after fighting for three long years to deserve to be one of them. Zuko didn’t know who he was anymore…

He didn’t know who he wanted to be, since regaining his honor was a lost cause. He’d stopped believing that even the Avatar could revoke his deeds. All he could do was love the nation he was no longer a part of. Zuko was too much of a coward to face the consequences so he would stay here – in the land he should hate, but he didn’t.

The aftermath of the events in the Fong’s base left him unable to fend for himself and he’d almost died. But most of the people he’d met offered him kindness without wanting anything in return. For the three long years, only Uncle had tried to be kind; here, it took a couple of months and Zuko could timidly admit that he had friends. It had never happened before the Earth Kingdom.

His throat clenched when he thought about everything he had to leave behind.

Toph was using the ride time for napping again. He was a little bitter about the fact that she didn’t have to look for bison’s fur. Well… she physically couldn’t do that, but he was so sick of staring at those branches.

Toph stopped leaning against him and stretched her back. “Any signs of furry monsters?”

“Only the trail,” he said glancing around the landscape for another white tangle.

“My backside is killing me.”

Zuko would’ve released an angry puff of fire if it didn’t endanger Toph’s hair. “You are practically sleeping for the whole ride!”

“Oh… I’m so sorry that as a nobleman’s daughter I’ve never got used to living on ostrich horse’s back!” she retorted gesticulating with her hands. “You should feel alike, my fellow rich kid.”

“I’ve traveled in much worse conditions.”

“I’ve never traveled in my entire life!” Toph exclaimed dramatically.

Zuko planned to ignore her and just follow the damned trail when Toph laid over his legs, almost falling off Shriek’s back. To spike the dramatism she started making sounds that were supposed to illustrate her agony.

After just a few minutes Zuko was seriously considering setting her on fire. “Fine!” he growled and stopped Shriek.

Toph dared to chuckle while stepping on the ground – she couldn’t be that uncomfortable when she could still easily jump. Zuko took a calming breath before he stepped on earth where she could feel his every twitch.

“You know what, Sparks?” Toph said thoughtfully. Zuko stopped mid-air before touching the ground. “We make a great team. I haven’t thought fighting together could be this fun.”

Zuko decided that the topic was neutral enough that he could stop balancing on a stirrup. “Yeah… without your help, I wouldn’t win.”

Knowing where he stood, Toph didn’t have any problem with hitting him in the arm. “Give yourself some credits! You’ve overcome your fear and you didn’t use your own bending,” she said. “That’s pretty badass, Sparks.”

Zuko was sure she felt how his heart speeded. “Thank you, Toph,” he said trying to ignore the dilemma in the back of his mind.

They used the stop as a lunch break. Toph and Shriek had a bigger appetite than Zuko, so he took the role of handing them another piece of food, taking a bite or two of his own portion in between. He might indulge Shriek a little, but only because his leg was still recovering.

Toph reached with her hand towards Zuko. “Can you give me this juicy – “ She stopped mid-sentence and put her hand on the ground. “Sparky… I think I found them.”

Zuko looked around rapidly. “What? Where?” He didn’t see anything, then his mind caught up and he asked, “How?

“A faint vibration of something big. It landed over there!” She pointed at the range of hills that have been on their right for the better part of today’s journey. “It feels like a bison!”

“Are you sure?”

Toph jumped to her feet. “Normally, I can’t feel things from this far. What else could thud the ground so hard?”

Zuko knew what was their goal but he’d been refusing to think about this moment. He took a deep breath. “I can give you a ride closer but I am not going to reveal myself to them.”

Toph turned to him and frowned. “What?”

He’s been rehearsing this in his head for a while and now, it was the time to say it out loud. “Toph… I – um… I don’t want them to know that I’ve helped you. I – I want you to keep this secret. I shouldn’t ask you to lie but…” Zuko knew he was mumbling nonsense. “Please don’t tell them I helped you.”

“I don’t understand,” Toph said. “I know your relationship with them is kind of complicated but you helping me would be a good thing in their eyes.”

“Please don’t tell them that I helped you,” Zuko repeated with a sigh.

“That’s bullshit!” Toph exclaimed raising her voice. “You don’t want them to know that you are a cool guy, with a soft spot for animals, and not-so-murderous tendencies? Or maybe the fact that you helped to save Li is so terrible?!”

“Stop!” A puff of fire escaped Zuko’s mouth which made Toph recoil in surprise. “You felt how the last time went. I don’t want a repeat! I don’t want to persuade anyone why I shouldn’t be put in prison because I don’t have a fucking arguments!” he yelled and more fire left his lips. He took a deep shaky breath when he saw how motionless Toph stood. “I – sorry. Just… the last time was enough. You will do what you think is right.”

Zuko’s nails were digging into his palms as he was clenching his fists. He was a coward – afraid of a bunch of children. But the truth was that they could do to him whatever they wanted and Zuko wouldn’t fight them off on his own.

Toph might like him now, but she wouldn’t take his side knowing the full truth.

“All right,” Toph said. “I’m not going to tell them. I promise.”

“…Really?”

She crossed her arms. “Don’t be so surprised. I can keep a secret.”

Zuko believed that she wouldn’t tell anything until she knew the whole truth about him. It was enough time to disappear. He bowed to her. “I… Thank you, Toph.”

“Anytime, Sparks…” she said quietly, with the corners of her lips much lower than usual. “And… I can get to them by myself. You don’t have to come any closer. I have this one trick I’ve always wanted to test.”

Zuko nodded, agitated by the fact that the Avatar was so close and that capturing him wouldn’t change shit. “If – if it’s not the bison, or you will be too late, or you just don’t join them,” Zuko was mumbling nonsense which made Toph frown. “I mean… I’m going to spend the night in that town we rode past. If something goes wrong, you can find me there.”

It was risky to tell Toph – who was about to join the Avatar – where he would be, but he was worried. She might be the best earthbender in the world but she was still a twelve-year-old and she shouldn’t be alone. Zuko couldn’t explain the weird sense of responsibility he felt.

Toph wrapped her arms around his chest squeezing the air out of his lungs. “Thanks for helping me,” she mumbled into his chest. “If not this gut feeling that Twinkle Toes planted in my stomach I would love to fool around with you more.” Her grip tightened. “I’m gonna miss you, Sparks.”

Zuko put his chin on top of her head. “Go catch the bison,” he said through the lump in his throat.

“No one slips from me twice.”

 


 

Earth skating worked – not surprising, though she managed to catch up with them barely before their departure. Angry Queen and Sarcasm Dude had troubles with a group of deadly girls and the most dangerous one was after Twinkle Toes. They were so worn out that they just accepted the fact that she randomly appeared out of nowhere when they flew to save Twinkle Toes.

Crazy Fire was good, Toph had to give it to her, but they cornered her and she ran away after creating a massive explosion. Toph asked them who was this girl but they didn't know. "She's worst than Prince Jerk!" Sarcasm Dude exclaimed with a massive yawn.

Toph was ready to lie on Sparky’s behalf, but none of these dunderheads asked how she got there… They were all sluggish and more interested in sleeping than her badass arrival. Twinkle tried to welcome her in the group after they left the abandoned town but constant yawns didn’t let him finish the sentence.

All of them collapsed the moment they put their heads on the ground. Without her Fire Pillow around, Toph made herself an earth tent and slowly dozed off wondering what Sparky planned to do now.

 


 

 

Toph must have joined the Avatar, so with a sunrise, Zuko rode off the town on Shriek’s back.

Alone.

For a brief second, he thought about coming back to Mr. Xaalo’s house. Gaoling wasn’t a place where he could feel safe anymore; the only danger in the small town would be a hostile guard. The lack of work wouldn’t be a problem since he already had no purpose… He missed the good coffee.

But – as subtle as it was – Mr. Xaalo had got rid of Zuko. He wouldn’t welcome him back, especially not after he’d wasted the perfect chance he was given. The letter had been the closure of the peculiar relationship.

Zuko wouldn’t be anyone’s burden.

 

 


 

Zuko put his hand on Shriek’s beak for the last time and the animal bumped him with his head. He knew what he meant by the gesture so he scratched him behind his ear. Zuko handed the reins to the farm owner and Shriek tried to bite him.

Zuko glanced at the farmer. “He isn’t doing that normally,” he assured, worried that he wouldn’t want to buy an untrained animal.

“Are you sure that you want to sell him?” the man asked smiling at Zuko who was trying to ignore Shriek’s nudges. “Neither of you wants it.”

Zuko has got attached to the animal but it was a logical thing to do. “I’m sure,” he said. “I can’t afford to take care of him.”

Zuko got the cash and lost the companion. He’d been postponing selling Shriek to the last possible moment which had unfortunately come. He didn’t look when the farmer led Shriek away. He would be better grazing on some fields than carrying Zuko for entire days.

The wander led him to the town quite close to Ba Sing Se. It’d used to be the last place he wanted to be, but now… Every time Zuko heard someone mentioning the city they said it was safe. He doubted he would feel truly safe anywhere, but looking out for both Earth and Fire was exhausting. In Ba Sing Se he would have to hide being the enemy, he wouldn’t have to care about the treachery anymore.

Thinking about the potential safety of the Earth Kingdom’s capital was pointless. Uncle hadn’t got in; Lu Ten has never got out. There was no chance Zuko would break the pattern.

 


 

Zuko’s back was sore after moving bricks from one edge of the possession to the other for the entire day. The money for relocating the wall was good, so Zuko had taken the job. He was careful about his funds so he wouldn’t be forced to steal to avoid hunger. Being able to perform physical work made everything much easier – no mixed orphan had his education.

He was renting the smallest of the rooms meant for apprentices in a smithy at the edge of the town. Zuko had met the blacksmith the day he arrived at the town when the man asked him about the swords. Zuko reluctantly showed him the weapon, which granted him the blacksmith’s sympathy. It turned out he was mix-blooded to some extent. Zuko wouldn’t guess it if the man hadn’t told him. He had even proposed Zuko a job, but he decided that he liked his fingers too much after seeing the huge hammer.

He’d said that he didn’t want to be around fire, and the man has never mentioned it again. It might’ve been the best lie he’s ever come up with.

Zuko had to buy some supplies on his way back to the smithy. He took out his sack to count the money when he noticed the terrible condition of his hands. The palms were full of scratches and smeared blood from the cuts on his fingertips. He flexed his fingers, surprised that he hadn’t noticed it earlier, and all he felt was a weird numb sensation.

Apparently, bricks were just as murderous as hammers.

He needed to clean those cuts and the nearest water source was on the main square – the place Zuko tried to avoid. Too many guards and too many people who weren’t as discreet as they thought while staring at his face. Zuko preferred to choose the back roads wherever he could.

He put his bloodied hands into his pockets, lowered his head, and shuffled to the center of the town. He’d decided that pretending to be poor but self-sufficient would be the safest way to blend in. He could’ve bought much better clothes or rent a more comfortable locum for the scribe’s money but it would raise suspicions. This way it was safer.

Thanks Agni… the line to the water pump wasn’t too long.

The moment Zuko approached an elderly couple walked away and only one woman stood in front of him. She was with a small child that Zuko hadn’t noticed before. The girl opened her mouth staring right at his face. Zuko turned away, the last thing he needed was a child making a loud fuss because she got scared of his scar.

The girl tiptoed in front of him to continue her gawking. Zuko was ready to see her cry at any second, but instead, she started pinching her cheek and pulling her skin to the sides. A wide grin crept over her face when she put her palm over her left eye, leaving only a small slit between her fingers.

She was trying to imitate his scar.

“Sweetie, what are you – “ Her mother glanced at her with a warm smile and a bucket of water under her arm. The moment she looked up at Zuko and realized what her child was doing, she turned pale. “I’m so sorry for her,” the mother said, trying to hush the girl’s giggles. “I don’t know why she did this… Stop that!”

The girl stopped pinching her cheek but she still looked pretty amused. She was staring at Zuko with shiny curious eyes and he didn’t know what to do about that.

He cleared his throat. “It’s fine,” he said to the mother and glanced at the girl again. It wasn’t a malicious laugh. “She’s just curious.”

The mother pulled the child closer to her. Zuko looked at the gesture warily but the woman only ruffled the girl’s hair. “She might be curious but it doesn’t give her the right to be rude,” she said and met Zuko’s eyes. “I’m sorry again.”

Zuko nodded shortly, already getting uncomfortable by the second apology. “Can I use the pump?”

The woman stepped aside. “Oh… of course. Have a nice day!”

It took Zuko by surprise and all he managed to answer was a muffled ‘you too’ when the woman was too far away to hear him. He didn’t know what to think about the interaction with the little girl so he just put his hands under the cool stream, trying not to think at all.

Clean of blood his hands didn’t look so bad, the cold sensation helped him to actually feel his fingers again. On the way to the shop, Zuko ruffled his hair to make the sweaty strands look less filthy. The hair wasn’t getting into his eyes yet, but a month or so and he would have to find himself a hair tie.

The shopkeeper had her back turned on him when he walked behind the counter. She was holding a stack of boxes, humming under her breath, still not noticing him. Zuko cleared his throat to subtly announce his presence at the same moment the woman turned.

She jumped and one of the boxes fell to the floor. “Oh spirits… you scared me,” she said with her hand on her chest. “How do you walk so quietly, huh?”

Zuko picked up the box and put it on the counter. “I’m sorry.”

“No worries, hon,” she said and placed all of the boxes on the floor. “What can I do for you? The usual stuff or something else?”

“The usual, if that wouldn’t be a problem, ma’am.”

The woman smiled at him with her head tilted to the side. “Of course not. A minute and I’m back. I thought you would come today,” she said and disappeared into the storage.

Zuko liked the lady for the amount of talking she expected from him. Her warm smiles always felt nice, and he didn’t feel like she wanted him gone from her sight. All that without too much small talk made the shop Zuko’s favorite.

The door to the store opened and a characteristic sound of the guards’ armor echoed through the room. Fuck. It couldn’t be only one person. Zuko didn’t move or turn around, silently begging for the shopkeeper to come back faster, so he could get the hell out of here.

Thanks Agni… The lady put Zuko’s bundle on the counter before the newcomers got any closer. “Welcome, gentlemen,” she greeted them with her brand warm smile. “Give me a moment and I will take your orders.” She turned to Zuko. “Here you go – “

“We aren’t here as customers,” one of the guards interrupted. Zuko felt a shiver climbing up his spine. “I will no longer speak to your back. Turn around.”

Three earthbenders were pinning Zuko with their gaze as he turned to face them. There was no instant recognition, so he assumed they didn’t really know. Not that it stopped them from finding a problem, or maybe it was just Zuko’s so-called luck.

“Yes, sir,” he said clasping his hands behind his back and bowing his head slightly.

Just don’t make rapid decisions.

The shopkeeper laughed, but there was a light nervous tune in it. “What’s the matter? I would appreciate a little bit of politeness showed to my customer.”

The guard in the middle ignored her, keeping his eyes on Zuko. “You are in the town for a while, correct?”

“Yes, sir.”

“We’ve noticed,” the man said thoughtfully. “We’ve also noticed that you put a lot of effort into avoiding us.”

The guard on the right nonchalantly leaned against the wall. “Never seen longer than a glimpse here and there.”

“I’m working for the best part of the day, sir,” Zuko answered shortly.

It was the truth… partly. Some days he’d spent working, the others he’d wandered to the nearby old quarry to practice with swords. He hadn’t found any cave to practice firebending yet.

“What kind of work?”

“Physical.”

The shopkeeper leaned over the counter and slammed her hand on it. “What’s the meaning of this interrogation? I don’t understand how honest work and keeping a low profile became a problem?”

The guard in the middle crossed his arms, ignoring the woman’s remark. “Aren’t you around the drafting age, boy?”

“The army doesn’t want half-breeds among them,” Zuko answered with a steady voice. Months ago he would’ve been too panicked to say anything. He’d learned to blend in and he wouldn’t let a bunch of guards wreck everything.

“Enough!” The shopkeeper slammed her hands over the wood again. “Either you explain the meaning of this or get out of my shop.”

The guard finally spared her a scrap of his attention. “Of course,” he smiled dishonestly and raised his brow at Zuko. “Show us your passport, lad.”

What?”

Zuko should’ve bitten his tongue. The three men looked at each other knowingly.

“You are in the town for a while, which means you’ve become a resident. The town is under the capital’s jurisdiction so everyone living or working here needs the proper documentation.”

“So why don’t you help him get the proper documentation?” the woman asked sharply.

The guard huffed, irritated. “Our job is enforcing the law, not dandling strays.” He took a step closer to Zuko. “You are going with us, boy.”

It was bad.

Zuko had no idea the law existed. He had no idea the fucking passports existed. “I – I didn’t know,” he said to buy himself some time.

Should he run? Fight them? Let them take him and escape later?

He should’ve known that the areas closer to Ba Sing Se would have a strict law. He was so stupid…

“Are you coming willingly?” the guard asked. “We will inform you about the possible consequences at the station.”

Consequences

Zuko loathed the word.

It’s been a long time since his heart was trying to break his ribcage. They thought he was harmless, and it was better to keep it this way. There was a chance they wouldn’t bother to restrain a cooperative minor.

Zuko nodded. “I will go.”

“He’s coming with me.”

For the first time, the guard turned his eyes away from Zuko. “And who are you?”

Zuko knew the voice…

“Colonel Huong.” The man showed a badge to the guards and the confidence drained out of all three of them. “So I advise watching your tongue, private.”

“Y – yes, sir.”

The colonel’s gaze finally focused on Zuko, just as in the prison he couldn’t read the shit out of the man’s fucking blank face. “He’s coming with me,” he repeated, not leaving any room for disagreement. “Now.”

Zuko was fucking done with half-measures. He would do whatever he had to get out of this disaster alive and free. He had spared the colonel once and maybe it had been a mistake.

 

 

 

Notes:

Me? a cliffhanger? What a surprise.

Everyone, Colonel is back. Is it good or is it bad?
WHAT IS THE COLONEL DOING HERE??? *hello Huong! It's been a long time*
I would love to see your theories to see if you are optimistic and more like "omggg he found him to make adoption!!!!"
or more pessimistic like "well a fire prince shouldn't be free in my country I'm a freaking military man what have I done?"
or in between??
pretty please tell me!!!!

A goodbye with Toph 🥺 it was fast and they both are sad but nor like... literally?
ALSO, goodbye with Shriek :'(

GUYSSS, really I think we are one chapter left to the end so I want to get back to comment begging.
IF YOU READ --> COMMENT. I'm really curious since only some people mentioned colonel once or twice and more of you suspected 'joining the gang' business

If I see over 3 pages of comments to scroll I acquire super writing speed 😏😏 just saying.

**time gap that happened after Toph will be clarified later

I'm sure I forgot about half of the stuff I wanted to say so feel free to lure me into some rants in the comments. I absolutely crave it

OHH and also apparently I'm supposed to use Tumblr more often 🤣

https://renegadeoftheworld.tumblr.com/

I announce comment mobilization since it's so heartwarming to see how many people are reading to this point 🖤

*** For the ones who don't remember the colonel was the guard from the earth kingdom prison. In the end, he'd helped Zuko after he'd been beaten by other soldiers. (two last chapters of the first story basically). The last we heard of him he'd been summoned to General Fong.

Chapter 20

Notes:

YES. I know what I did.
Are you honestly surprised the chapter count grew? I am not.

(though I really didn't want to lie to you the last time it just happened)

side note: we are not in ba sing see, just some town close to it

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

 

 

As soon as General Fong regained consciousness Huong was summoned to his office. He wouldn’t cow in front of his superior, he was ready to report about the undignified violence used against the Fire Prince. He was ready to admit that he’d let the Avatar take the prince from their custody. Huong had his doubts about the consequences the decision might cause them in the future but his conscience wouldn’t have let him keep the boy here.

He was shaken after everything he’d witnessed that day – the teenager suffering a flashback and daring Huong to kill him; the teenager assaulted so badly that Huong had to carry him in his arms; just a fucking child wheezing because he couldn’t take a breath.

He couldn’t stop thinking about the worst night of his life when his precious Lee stopped breathing. Just a little detail connecting both situations was enough to remind Huong how he was kneeling on the floor, cursing every spirit he’d heard of.

Huong stopped just in front of Fong’s door to collect his thoughts. It was no time for grief.

 


 

General Fong had a problem with admitting that losing the alliance with the Avatar was a result of his thoughtless decisions. The information that the Fire Prince was gone was too much for him to take with a cool head. Huong was ready to take a blow from his superior at any second when the rebuke started. He was actually surprised when he left the office untouched.

General decided that matters connected with the Fire Prince would be solved with a trial. Huong could walk freely around the base until then, probably only because Fong was too disconcerted to detain him properly. Huong used that opportunity to pay a visit to the group of assaulters once again, this time with no violent intents.

“The penalty for treachery is death,” Huong said when he stopped in front of the cell. “Before you try to deny I want to inform you that I’ve seen the poster.”

The woman stood up and clenched the bars. “What’s the penalty for losing the most valuable hostage in this war’s history, Colonel?”

Huong had seen enough in his life to recognize that she was trying to hide her fear with defiance. “Soon I will find out,” he answered calmly. “I’m here to propose you something.”

“What?”

“Only the five of us have seen the poster,” he said. “I’m willing to keep it that way.”

The woman laughed. “Do you feel bad after beating the shit out of us?”

“Not at all,” he answered. Huong has never been fond of violence but in this case, he wasn’t regretting getting his hands dirty in the slightest. “I have my own reasons.”

The woman huffed.

“It’s your choice,” Huong shrugged and stepped away from the bars. Three men sitting in the back of the cell were tracing his every move. “I have the poster. A word about treason and you are dead tomorrow morning.”

It took one step towards the exit to make the youngest soldier cling to the bars. “We won’t tell!” he cried with a trembling voice. “Colonel, I agree,  I  - I wasn’t thinking. I – I don’t want to die… Please.”

Huong spared them a glance before turning away for good. The poster would be no longer a problem. He hadn’t done that to save the soldiers but to guarantee the prince’s safety after the tracking group catches him. Huong doubted the prince would go with the Avatar or look for help in the colony.

He wanted to let the prince go to his homeland to recover, not to suffer in some forest without any medical help he needed. In this case, it would be better if he stayed here. Getting caught would be hazardous for the traumatized boy’s mind but Huong would do everything he could to make his accommodation endurable. Whatever the boy was going through right now was Huong’s fault.

Enemy Prince or not, a juvenile shouldn’t have endured any of this.

At least there was no chance the prince would be accused of escaping on his own in this condition. Avatar would be blamed which was the best possible outcome – no one would catch or punish the world’s last hope.

 


 

Huong was demoted to the rank of lieutenant. The assaulters were stripped of their ranks completely and sentenced for labor work around the base during their time of imprisonment. General Fong didn’t know about the poster nor that Huong not only hadn’t stopped the Avatar but he’d helped him to free the prince.

The search division was already combing the terrain around the base, keeping the whole thing secret from the public. Huong hadn’t mentioned the fire colony but the search started there anyway.

He believed that sooner or later the Fire Prince would be found. The boy might be a damned Blue Spirit but there was no chance he would go anyway by himself in this condition. Huong wasn’t sure he would survive long enough to be found though. It made him volunteer to help in the search but Fong hadn’t permitted it, not that it was surprising.

 


 

Weeks passed and the prince or his body hasn’t been found. No news from the Fire Nation; no news from any other division about the captured royal.

General was furious after losing so valuable leverage in this war. After the demoting, Huong couldn’t know if Fong had some specific plans involving the prince or he just wanted to have him as a trophy that could be used at the right moment. The fact that Fong kept the escape secret made everything dubious. If the boy lived and hid somewhere in the Earth Kingdom, the local authorities had the biggest chances of locating him.

Huong couldn’t stop thinking that he’d endangered the Earth Kingdom by releasing the prince among his people. He couldn’t pretend to know the boy after just a few days of observation. Though the fight and the prince’s panic attack demonstrated some facts that soothed Huong’s fear. Nonetheless, Prince Zuko was obligated to hate the Earth Kingdom because of his heritage. The prison events could’ve made this whole thing personal to him. Huong feared that innocent people could suffer because the prince would look for revenge.

Whatever was happening… an enemy prince was no good in the heart of the country. All because of Huong’s impulsive decision. Like every man who ever held power, Huong had blood on his hands shed by wrong decisions. He didn’t need more.

 


 

As a lieutenant, Huong was closer to soldiers and he could pay more attention to his subordinates. It had its pros and cons but at least he could identify and discard individuals like those who wanted to give the prince to the enemy for a prize. It wasn’t an order from Fong, but Huong’s own initiative to diversify his lieutenant’s duties.

The atmosphere in the base after the Avatar’s problem was tense and many soldiers had lost some of their respect towards the General. Huong had barely any contact with the man which was probably for the best. With every passing day without any report about the prince, Fong was getting more furious.

Huong was tired of it. After a drink with the right person, he got himself a field mission, away from the base. He would control smaller units and offer aid if needed, all that in different parts of the Kingdom, reaching every destination will take him a couple of months. He needed some fresh air, the base became suffocating.

The next day Huong was packed, changed into less official clothing, and ready for the road. He was leading the strongest ostrich horse towards the gate when he spotted General Fong waiting for him.

“I heard about your assignment, Lieutenant,” the way he emphasized the rank heralded the tone of the conversation.

Huong made the appropriate salute. “Yes, General.”

“The task is quite demeaning for the man of your abilities and experience.”

Huong raised his chin to look the taller man in the eyes. “I don’t see it this way, General.”

The army has been the most important thing in Huong’s life after Lee’s death. He and Hane grieved differently which had led them to have more arguments than conversations. One day they had decided that it was better to take separate ways. It had been a good choice – Huong was promoted to the rank of colonel in the span of two years and Hane became the best seamstress on the coast.

There were days when he felt bad about his rank, he was always an ambitious man and it was a serious backtrack in his career. But he never thought of it as degrading, it had a humbling effect on him. Huong was glad his ego hasn’t reached Fong’s level.

Fong huffed as if he just caught him lying. “Lieutenant, do you still think that it’s not possible that the Avatar took the prince with him?”

“The monk was worried about the prince’s safety but at the same time he was afraid of him,” Huong repeated the same testimony he’d said months ago. “I don’t think he would risk being around the prince.”

“We closed the way to the colony immediately,” General said pinning Huong with his gaze. “How is it possible that we hadn’t caught the boy if you say he was so badly injured?”

The question was a not-so-subtle form of interrogation. “I don’t know, sir. When the Avatar took the prince he was unconscious and I’m fairly sure he had an injured leg and a possible concussion.”

Fong frowned deeply and rubbed his beard. “Well, lieutenant,” Again the same emphasis on the rank, “you will travel a lot… Do you have enough drive to regain your rank?”

Huong narrowed his eyes at the general, not expecting that question. “I’m going to do the best I can, sir,” Huong said without directly answering the suspicious question. Huong might have appreciated humbling values but there was a reason why he secretly kept his colonel insignia.

Fong looked him directly in the eyes. “Then bring me the Fire Prince.”

 


 

 

‘Bring me the Fire Prince’ had been only a joke until he saw the dark-haired boy with a scar.

Huong has never treated the ridiculous mission seriously. He had been doing his job, traveling from one military unit to another, helping whenever he could, and trying to keep his country safe. He was wondering what the hell happened with the prince, depending on the day, he either felt responsible or afraid for his nation’s safety. He paid no mind to the weird obsession of the general, the man hasn’t been acting rationally since the incident.

The boy was waiting in line to the water pump and talking with some mother with a child. He cleaned his hands and with too-fast steps went to the edge of the square. Huong didn’t even have to hide because the boy kept his gaze on the ground for the entire time.

Prince Zuko. In a town definitely too close to the capital. Alive and well.

Huong noticed that he wasn’t the only one observing the boy – a group of guards followed him as soon as he left the square. They were walking too nonchalantly to really know who they were following.

Questions with no answers were rattling in Huong’s mind. He traced his fingers over the badge in his pocket as he followed the prince.

 


 

“Gentlemen,” the shopkeeper didn’t sound confident anymore, she was glancing between Zuko and the soldiers with a confused look, “I’ll ask again, what’s the meaning of this? Lee is my regular, always pays upfront, never caused any troubles.”

Zuko hasn’t stopped looking at the colonel since he entered the shop. He had normal clothes, not the heavy armor he’d been wearing in the base, his beard was shorter but Zuko still couldn’t read his face. The man briefly glanced at the shopkeeper and with a deepened frown focused back on Zuko.

He couldn’t fight four men, not when they knew who he was. With all the composure that hadn’t drained out of him yet, Zuko nodded to the colonel.

“Dragging Lee to the army is atrocious! Do you know that?!” the woman rebuked looking straight at the colonel.

“I assure you that I will not drag him to join the army,” the colonel said with his composed voice, still never turning his eyes away from Zuko. “Guards, please explain to the lady how conscription works.”

“Yes, sir,” the guard answered immediately.

Huong stepped slightly to the side to make space for Zuko, so he wouldn’t have his back turned on him. “Come with me.”

Zuko obeyed.

As long as Huong hasn’t revealed Zuko’s identity to anyone, he had a chance to get out of this alive. Unless the colonel had backup.  His mind was racing as he stepped out of the shop to the road full of people. The man wasn’t saying anything. Just like in the prison, he wasn’t restraining Zuko, only walking uncomfortably close to his side. He probably didn’t want to raise panic by manhandling him here or risking that Zuko would fight back.

Huong nudged him into a back alley – a secluded place was bad. Why wasn’t he saying anything?! With nothing restricting his movements he could fight with the man. Zuko’s head was buzzing, the shapes they were passing by were unfocused and woozy. There were barely any people around… He was running out of time.

Zuko’s eyes focused on an unfinished building on their way. Agni, please, let it be empty…

He obediently stayed at the colonel’s side until they reached the construction, he wasn’t making any movements that could foreshadow his plan. When Huong was in the middle of a step, Zuko twisted his body so the whole strength fueled by pure desperation was put into the blow.

Zuko’s fist slammed into the bottom of Huong’s jaw before he could react. The colonel groaned as his eyes rolled back into his head and he fell to the ground.

 


 

Zuko had found a scrap of rope, enough to tie the colonel’s hands behind a pillar in the empty building. The man was just as heavy as the bricks he’d been moving earlier this day.

Zuko was pacing around the empty space, praying so no one would come here. He wasn’t sure what he would do next, but for now, he had to stay focused. He could’ve run away right now but what would be the point? With his luck, he would run into General Fong waiting behind the corner.

The vague memories of events after the earthbenders had beaten him were ringing in Zuko’s head. He remembered a lot of pain and a brief comfort brought by the steady voice. Zuko came closer to the unconscious man when he noticed a trail of blood on the collar of his shirt. He wanted to check the extent of the injury when the colonel suddenly jerked in the bonds.

Zuko jumped back and summoned fire daggers to his both hands. He waited for the man to stop blinking before he spoke. “Don’t move.”

Huong winced as he opened his jaw. “All right,” he said in a too-calm tone.

Zuko pointed at him with the tip of the dagger, his hand was trembling. “Don’t move or – or I will burn you.”

“I am not moving, Prince Zuko,” the man said calmly and tested his jaw, which was followed by another wince. “It was a good punch.”

Zuko lowered his hand only because he didn’t want the colonel to see them shaking. “How many men are with you?”

“What is your plan –“

Zuko swung with the dagger just in front of Huong’s face, the man recoiled slightly, pressing his back against the pillar. “Answer my question!”

Huong was looking at the tip of the dagger. “Enough units to surround the town.”

Fuck. Fuck. Fuck… “They… they don’t know I am here.”

“They know,” Huong said glancing between Zuko’s face and his weapon. “I wanted to deal with this the calm way. If you hurt me, they won’t hesitate.”

It was bad… so fucking bad. Maybe… maybe he could take Huong as a hostage? But there was no chance he could control the bigger man with the scrap of rope he had. He didn’t have his swords and he couldn’t openly firebend.

Zuko extinguished the dagger and stepped away from the man. His body was buzzing with adrenaline. He had to move. He had to run! But he didn’t have Shriek anymore, and all of his belongings were in the smithy. Think… Zuko tried to fool himself that pacing around was helping him to focus, but his hands just started to shake more.

“I’m supposed to be back soon, if not, they will intervene,” Huong said. Even though blood was dripping from his chin, the tied man looked more collected than Zuko. “We don’t have to do this the hard way, Prince Zuko.”

Zuko stopped at the opposite edge of the room and glared at the colonel. “So you can bury me in another dark hole?! Crush my hands? Interrogate and torture, because, if I remember correctly, we haven’t got to that stage the last time?!” Zuko’s voice echoed against the walls.

“Nobody wants to hurt – “

“Stop lying!” Zuko yelled and threw a fireball close to the colonel’s legs. The man bent his legs out of reflex as much as the position let him. “You let the Avatar free me, and now you want to make me a prisoner again! Make up your fucking mind and stop toying with me!”

For the first time, Zuko actually saw a glimpse of fear on the colonel’s stone face. He wasn’t sure how he felt about it. He didn’t want to hurt the man but he might have no other choice. Could he even do it? Huong was tracing his every move since he threw the fire, at least now, he was taking him as a real threat.

Zuko had no idea what to do…

Huong’s head turned to the left – to the entrance.

Zuko was far beyond petrified when he turned to the door, ready to see a group of earthbenders prepared to pin him down. Before anyone passed the threshold, Zuko’s legs sank into the ground. Earth enclosed his hands and pinned them to the floor. The ground moved again and made Zuko kneel with his arms and legs immobilized by the rough stones.

The guards from the shop ran into the room. “What happened?”

Colonel Huong freed himself from Zuko’s bonds and with a snap of his wrist hardened the rocks around Zuko’s limbs. He lowered his head trying to not lose his mind completely. He might’ve dealt with his fear of earthbending but this

This was triggering every one of his weaknesses.

“I have it covered,” the colonel said with the tone Zuko heard for the first time. “Everything is under control.”

 

 

 

Notes:

I hope it was obvious but just in case - Colonel was totally bullshitting about the army surrounding the town. He's alone here.

I absolutely adore you for the amount of comments you left under the previous chapter and I would die of joy if it happened again ❤ Well the next chapter will be the last one..... 95% sure??

 

Colonel Huong had his POV!!! Damn, he didn't want to shut up. Tell me what do you think of it!! Do you see some parallel between him and Zuko 😏😈
I would love to hear about all Huongs dilemmas after Zuko left. And a tiny bit more of his backstory.

 

Zuko..... you know how to make things worst, don't you? As we all learned panicked Zuko is dumb Zuko.

 

Now the question is what are colonel's plans... *evil laughter* idk how he feels about being threatened with fireballs

 

Now, my dear adoption fans, I love you, but did you really think that I would make it all full of cakes and rainbows? Though I would gladly hear your lovely complaints below 🖤🖤

 

I wanted to create a gray conflict (especially in Huong's POV) and I hope it somehow worked

 

I hope to rant with you in the comments and, again, I'm going to drown in the pool of joy if the number of comments repeats this time <3

 

I hope you liked it!!! (even without the adoptions)

Chapter 21

Summary:

THE FINAL CHAPTER

*dramatic music in the background*

Notes:

A day late but it's the longest chapter and the last one. Guys this time I lied and changed a chapter number only once (?)

It's a reason to celebrate!

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

 

 

The stone was covering him from the tips of his fingers to the upper part of his forearms. It was pressed so firmly to his skin that he couldn’t even twitch. He felt like the rocks were getting tighter, his bones closer to snapping, but there was no pain yet. His legs were getting numb, his thighs and hips were immobilized, making it impossible to release the building tension.

“With all due respect, sir, it’s our duty to deal with delinquents like this one. You must have more important things to do. We can take care of it.”

Zuko hung his head and focused only on breathing. It was the only thing he could do. He had to endure whatever would happen with scraps of dignity.

“No need.”

The pounding of his heart made the conversation above him seem distant. Zuko tried to remember all he knew about the colonel. The man had never been cruel but after Zuko almost broke his jaw it would change.

“Colonel, we –“

“Stay alert, soldier. Until I command you otherwise, anything that concerns the boy is my personal business. No interference.”

Zuko was such a fool that suffering had to repeat the lesson over and over again.

“Yes, sir.”

He squeezed his eyes when he heard shuffling of receding steps. The guards left the building and now he was alone with Colonel Huong. He heard a loud sigh and clenched his teeth, preparing for the pain that would surely come. Huong hadn’t let the guards took him, so he could punish him personally. The stones started moving and Zuko whined despite his efforts to stay quiet.

He was waiting for the first bone to snap under the pressure when he fell forward. The stones restraining him disappeared into the ground leaving only wide cuffs binding his wrists together.

“I couldn’t risk you firebending,” the colonel said when Zuko was trying to comprehend that his bones weren’t shattered to pieces. “No sudden movements and you may stand up.”

Afraid of the hidden trick, Zuko remained in the same position the rocks had forced him into. He flexed his uncrushed fingers while he still could.  The range of his misery depended on the man Zuko had threatened to burn, so it was just a matter of time before the pain comes.

“Prince Zuko, can you hear me?” Zuko nodded shortly, not moving otherwise. It was a naïve thought but maybe if he obeyed the colonel would find some forbearance. Back in the prison, the man had been lenient. "I want to talk to you, and I won't do it when you kneel in front of me."

There was no point in standing up. No matter if he fought or not, he always ended up kneeling.

“Did the earthbending hurt you?” the colonel asked in his characteristic tone – calm and gentle yet making Zuko’s skin crawl in anticipation of a disaster.

It hadn’t hurt him, but the petrified numbness it left was enough for Zuko to not trust his legs. “No,” he croaked, afraid that another nonverbal response would equal disrespect.

Men in power do not tolerate disrespect.

Huong sighed. “Then follow the order and stand up.”

The movement was slightly off-balance with a petrified body and bound hands, but Zuko rose to his feet. In this position looking at the floor was a display of cowardice, not surrender, so with an exhale Zuko raised his head to face Huong.

The man was leaning against the pillar and pressing a cloth to the wound on his jaw. “All right,” he said wincing and blinking a couple of times. “I should have spoken before you assumed my intentions and acted vehemently. Do you understand that this situation is quite… complicated?”

“Yes,” Zuko said hoarsely, he was sick of euphemisms.

Huong put the bloodied cloth into his pocket. “Let’s move to a more civilized place,” he said looking at the rough walls and unfinished elements. “I’m going to clarify some matters already on the way.”

Zuko didn’t want to die but living in a dark cell would be torture.

Huong took off his overshirt and started folding it. Zuko observed his moves, not understanding why the man was doing it in the middle of the arrest. The mark on the colonel’s bare forearm caught his attention and made his skin crawl.

Zuko was familiar with burns, he saw one every time he looked into a mirror, but he’d never seen a burn caused by his own flames. He remembered the scuffle in the prison rather vaguely, all that had happened after overshadowed the beginning of the disaster. But seeing the mark refreshed the memory. Zuko had used fire daggers… just like today.

“Give me your hands,” Huong ordered, expectantly reaching with his burned arm, it was nowhere as bad as Zuko’s face but the skin was visibly misshaped. Zuko clenched his fists to hide the tremble and with an exhale offered his bound wrists. “I don’t want to cause a scene.” Huong wrapped the material around the cuffs and adjusted it in few places. “Hold it as if you are carrying it.”

Zuko grabbed the fabric as much as his bound hands let him when the colonel stepped back to evaluate the disguise. He nodded approvingly and walked to Zuko’s right side. He tensed when the colonel reached for him, but the man only firmly grabbed his elbow.

“This is how I’m going to escort you,” he informed in his damned gentle tone. “Time to move, Prince Zuko.”

Zuko was fidgeting with the fabric around his cuffs, trying to calm his wrecked nerves, as the colonel led them to a busy road. They were in the part of the town Zuko had been avoiding. Wealthy people living here were quicker to stare and less willing to give a job to a mixed orphan. He kept his head low, mentally preparing himself to face dozens of earthbenders.

Huong gripped his elbow harder which made Zuko’s heart skip a beat. “For starters, no one is surrounding the town,” the man said, his hold almost causing pain. “I’m here alone and no one knows about you.”

It would mean that he could’ve run the moment Huong hit the ground unconscious unless it was another lie. Huong was looking at him waiting for some kind of reaction but Zuko felt too exhausted for that. “Why are you telling me this?”

“Because I prefer to avoid rash decisions, and before anything else happens I want to speak with you.”

Zuko ignored the fact that the colonel hadn’t answered his question. “Use the word, colonel,” he growled under his breath, trying to understand raw anger and torpor battling inside him. “You want to interrogate me.”

“Yes, I will ask you questions but I won’t do other things you may associate with interrogation.”

Zuko clenched his fists under the fabric, trying not to think about his last interrogation – the fear, the pain, the coldness… Recovering from the last time took him long, dreadful months. When the injuries themselves weren’t that much of a problem, from time's perspective Zuko could see how feral his reactions to any authority had become.

He couldn’t go back to the version of himself from before the North. The traitorous yet peaceful life he was trying to maintain slipped from under his legs every fucking time the things started to look good. Agni… there were moments when Lee distracted him enough to actually feel happy. Yet he was condemned to live with the burden of his past pinning him to the ground. He couldn’t move on and he couldn’t turn back. Zuko was stuck in the void between the past and possible future, where he always ended up suffering.

“Answering your question,” the colonel said when they walked into a less crowded street with many houses. His grip was still strong but it’d stopped oscillate at the edge of pain, “I’m telling you this to be honest with you. Don’t see it as an invitation to try something. I outrank every officer in this town, so if I need backup, I’m going to have it.”

Zuko felt drained,  at this point he wasn’t even considering struggling or fighting. He didn’t believe he could win; it would only make it all worse. “Where are you taking me?” he asked with a hushed voice.

Huong stopped in front of one of the smaller houses and started searching for something in his pocket. Zuko cautiously looked around at the people passing through the street. No one paid them any special attention. He must have looked like a misbehaved teenager, not an arrested enemy on the way to interrogation.

Huong opened the door and nudged Zuko to step inside before him. “It belongs to one of my men currently stationed somewhere else. It’s empty.”

The house was small, after two steps inside Zuko stood in the living room with few chairs and a small fireplace. On the left, the kitchen was separated only by half-wall from the rest of the house. There was a corridor leading somewhere but Zuko couldn’t see what was behind the corner, probably rooms, possibly stairs to the basement.

“This way,” Huong said reappearing at Zuko’s side. The man led him to the area with the dining table behind the kitchen. Huong took off the material hiding the cuffs, the stones stayed in place. “Sit on the opposite side.”

The side with no way of eventual escape, with the wall behind his back, and where Huong could have a full view on him from almost every place of the house. Zuko shuffled with his stiff body around the table, constantly reminding himself to breathe. He tried to fidget with his hands but the firmly placed stone didn’t even rub against his skin.

He could tell the man some of the truth, but would he believe? No one ever trusted his word. Especially, after the attack when Zuko only proved the things easier to believe in.

He had to stop thinking about the possible outcomes, or he’s going to freak out before the first asked question.

 


 

The sharp pain and swelling on his jaw shifted into a dull pulsing in his head. With all the unknowns, there was one thing Huong knew for sure – Prince Zuko knew how to punch. In the beginning, he had slight difficulties with focusing his thoughts, but he blamed it on the bizarreness of the whole situation. As long as he wasn’t nauseous, he had no time for coddling himself when the fire prince was anticipating his fate in front of him.

And Huong had no idea what that fate should be.

The prince’s duality was giving Huong another kind of headache. A skilled fighter and an heir to the enemy’s throne, yet just a teenager who was clearly afraid of him. The handcuffs had to stay – the prince had used every possibility to escape Huong had ever given him, and every attempt was violent and unplanned. Besides, his jaw wouldn’t take another punch.

Huong put the overshirt on the back of the chair while the prince’s wary eyes followed his every move. Even with so little information, he had suspicions about what the prince may associate with interrogation, after seeing the boy’s back freshly after the transfer from the North. Huong would do none of that, and he hoped the prince would understand that soon.

To show his decent intentions, he poured a glass of water and put it in front of the boy. “It’s for you.”

The prince nodded but made no move to reach for the glass despite the obvious scrappiness of his voice. Huong poured himself a glass as well since he would probably end as the one speaking more. When he was putting the jug back on the kitchen counter, the dark stains on the overshirt caught his attention. Blood.

He frowned at the glaring boy in front of him. “Show me your hands, please.”

Huong, unfortunately, knew why the firebender did it with a wince. To avoid distressing the boy further, Huong assessed the damage without touching. The raw skin on the knuckles was the outcome of the punch, and honestly, Huong found it fair. But he didn’t know what caused the bleeding cuts and scratches on the boy’s palms.

“My bending hasn’t done those,” Huong stated certainly. He had been cautious with immobilizing the prince so he wouldn’t have hurt himself if he tried to struggle. But in this case, the stones must have irritated the existing damage. “What happened?”

The prince frowned at him as if he didn’t understand the question. “I was carrying bricks.”

“What?”

The prince scowled at him. “I’m not lying.”

“All right,” Huong said calmly. “Why were you carrying bricks?”

“It was a job,” he admitted quietly, not looking Huong in the face.

Huong made a mental note about that fact, doing his best to hide the surprise in front of clearly the ashamed teen. It might be below a prince, but no honest work was humiliating in Huong’s eyes, though he was surprised that the proud teen had decided to do this.

He dampened two towels, one for the prince and the other for his own jaw. The boy took it but with the stiff cuffs, he couldn’t wipe the blood thoroughly.

“Wait,” he said, making a really unreasonable decision considering the boy’s abilities. “I will reshape the cuffs to allow you more movement. But don’t make me regret it.”

The prince didn’t respond but when Huong reached for the cuffs he kept his hands in place. He wished he had the regular iron cuffs but he couldn’t predict this. He left the wide bracelets unchanged to avoid digging into the boy’s skin, but with some effort and precision, he made a stone chain connecting his both wrists. Huong glanced at the prince’s face and saw that he’d been holding his breath for the whole process.

“Keep your hands where I can see them,” Huong requested to minimize the risk of the prince trying something.

The prince glared at him but after he was done wiping the blood he placed his clenched fist on the table without objections. Huong took a sip from his glass, wondering what he should start with, all the time watched by the prince’s wary gaze.

“How much do you remember from the incident in the prison?” Huong asked. The last time he’d seen the prince, he’d been so battered that he passed out against Huong’s side.

The prince lowered his gaze. “Enough.”

“Before anything else I want to apologize for the despicable behavior of my men,” Huong said. “The aggressors had been punished severely.”

The prince’s fists were clenched tight when he was staring at some spot on the table.

“I hadn’t known about the poster before – “

The golden eyes widened at him in panic,  just one eye actually. “You – you know about it?”

“I’ve found it after I told the Avatar to take you close to the colony,” Huong explained. “I wouldn’t have allowed it if I knew you could have problems with getting help. Did you go to the colony, Prince Zuko?”

“Don’t call me that,” the boy growled to Huong’s confusion. “You saw the poster. I’m no longer a prince, just a traitor,” he spitted the last word with visible disgust.

“All right,” Huong agreed, guessing that it was the boy’s sensitive spot. “Then answer my question, Zuko.”

The boy exhaled slowly before speaking. “I had no contact with anyone from the Fire Nation.”

Huong titled his head, remembering too well the boy’s terrible condition after the assault. How are you not dead, wouldn’t be a good way to phrase the question. “Then tell me what happened after you woke up.”

The prince was a terrible storyteller, even though Huong could see that the boy was really trying to meet his requirements. It was clear that he was omitting some things, but he was saying enough for Huong to fill the gaps. The general message was ‘I thought I would die’ said in dismissing manner. When he got to the part when he’d fallen into the canyon, Huong winced, imagining how painful it must’ve been.

No one had thought about searching the canyon because it was a difficult territory, with only one safe passage. Then Prince Zuko mentioned the family who helped him and Huong didn’t believe that coincidence like this could've happened, but he asked anyway.

“Stop for a second,” Huong interrupted the prince’s monologue. “The man was an earthbender named Moosha?”

Huong knew his guess was right before Zuko – it was hard to stop calling the boy the prince – managed to articulate his answer. He abruptly took his hands from the table and leaned away from Huong.

“How do you know?” he asked, breathing rapidly. “They didn’t know it was me they were helping. I – I didn’t ask for it… they were just kind. You can’t – “

The prince was worried about the nonexistent consequences Huong could enforce on people that helped a barely alive teenager. Something squeezed in his chest when he realized that it was the first assumption the boy came up with.

Huong hushed him with a hand gesture. “Stop right there,” he said a little too sharply. “First of all, I wouldn’t blame anyone for helping a person in need.” The boy looked as if he had some objections but he stayed silent. “I know Moosha. We served together before he left the army.”

“How did you know it was him?”

“He told me in a letter a few weeks earlier that he and his family plan moving to Ba Sing Se,” Huong explained, observing how the boy relaxed slightly after hearing that. “It was a wild guess.”

“They saved my life and showed me the way out of the canyon,” Zuko said quietly.

Huong had to stop the urge to dumping this whole interrogation and just ask Zuko about his old friend, but it was no moment for that. The last time he’d heard from Moosha was just before the medic left. Huong hoped he and his family get safely to the city.

“I’m glad you met him, it’s a good man,” Huong said. “Now, please, put your hands back on the table and continue the story.”

The boy quickly obeyed, making a loud thud when the stone hit the wood. “Sorry… I – I wasn’t trying anything.”

“I’m aware,” Huong assured before the prince could create a dark scenario. “Just continue the story.”

 


 

 

Zuko was aware that he was stuttering over his words and mixing some events. Generally, he decided to tell the truth but skip and details about the weeks on the streets and Toph’s company after leaving Gaoling. Saying that he’d been working in two noble’s houses but without mentioning the names sounded like a lie.

“You were a scribe for over two months,” Huong said thoughtfully. Zuko nodded trying to read Huong’s face but failing miserably. He couldn’t tell if the man believed his story in the slightest. “Who did you work for?”

Admitting that he’d been working in Beifongs’ household was risky, Huong could think that Zuko was there to gain information about the wealthy family. Without trying he’d learned that Beifongs didn’t care about the war. Zuko couldn’t mention Mr. Xaalo. He didn’t believe that Huong wouldn’t try to reach the people Zuko had met.

Zuko shifted in his chair and exhaled slowly. “I’m not going to tell you.”

“I need at least one name,” Huong said with a stern voice. Zuko felt shivers running down his spine even though the colonel wasn’t openly showing his anger. “When I’m ready to believe you worked as a scribe I want to know for who.”

Zuko didn’t want this conversation to turn into a real interrogation. “Beifongs”

Huong raised his brow. “The Beifongs?

“Yes,” Zuko growled, glaring at the colonel. “I’m not lying.”

“Not a bad career in just two months,” Huong said rubbing his temple. The mocking disbelief made Zuko’s blood boil and he had to take really slow breaths to stay calm. “All that with no one suspecting anything?”

“I don’t know!” Zuko snapped hitting the table with the stone on his wrists. “They were taking me for a mixed orphan, so I wasn’t arousing trust in the first place!”

Zuko’s chest was rising and falling too fast, he couldn’t control his breathing when all he felt was anger. He felt stinging on his palm and noticed blood oozing from one of the scratches. Huong passed him the towel without commenting on Zuko’s outburst.

“The woman in the shop called you Lee,” Huong said with a tone that lacked the usual gentleness. “Is that the name you were using?”

“It’s just a name!” Zuko fumed. “I don’t see how –“

Zuko closed his mouth in the middle of the sentence when he remembered how he’d chosen the name. The name of Huong’s dead son. The man had loved the boy, so he had to be furious that someone like Zuko dared to use the name.

“I – I’m sorry… I didn’t know any earth kingdom names and… and I wasn’t… I didn’t mean to – “

Huong hushed him with a hand. “No, you are right,” he said rubbing his temple. He took a deep breath before continuing. “The name you were using is irrelevant. I’m sorry for taking it personally.

“I’m sorry,” Zuko said ashamed for realizing it so late.

“It’s all right,” Huong returned to his calm tone. “My son was much more than just a name.”

Zuko wondered how would it feel to make his father proud of him. It made his chest hurt to see how years after his son’s death Huong spoke about him with love. If only he’d been enough… Zuko’s death wouldn’t be worth the Fire Lord’s blink.

His throat became dry so he finally reached for the water Huong had given him. The man was lost in his own thoughts so, hopefully, he hadn’t noticed the jealousy that must’ve shown on Zuko’s face. Drinking with handcuffs on his wrists was awkward, but Zuko managed to do it without spilling.

“How were you fending for yourself before you started working,” Huong asked the moment Zuko put the glass back on the table.

“The family from the canyon gave me some stuff,” Zuko muttered without looking at the man.

“Were you stealing?” Huong asked bluntly.

“I was too injured to get away with that,” Zuko admitted almost choking from shame but maybe an honest answer would make the colonel believe him. Then he remembered the kind girl from the pottery shop who, knowing his luck, was Huong’s niece. “I – um… I’ve stolen a cup once.”

“A cup?”

Zuko swallowed the embarrassment and scowled at Huong. “I needed it.”

Huong gave him a strange look but didn’t comment. “Were you thinking about getting into Ba Sing Se?”

“I was,” Zuko admitted. “But I know it’s impossible.”

Huong straightened in his chair. “Why did you want to get into the capital?”

Zuko was aware of the assumption the colonel probably made. He was already fucked up so a little bit of humiliating truth wouldn’t make his situation much worse. “In the city, I would have to hide only from the Earth Kingdom.”

Huong rested his elbows on the table. “Did the brand of a traitor change your loyalties?”

The question felt like a blow to the face, the assumption knocked the air out of his lungs. “I’m loyal to my country, Colonel.”

Zuko knew that the statement could bury him away from Agni’s light for the rest of his life, but he couldn’t say anything else.

 


 

The prince of the enemy nation survived undetected in his country for long months. He knew how to blend in, which was an extremely dangerous skill if used to gather intelligence.

The boy swore his loyalty to his country yet, assuming that all he’d told was the truth, he hadn’t done anything against the Earth Kingdom. Huong even got the impression of fondness when he spoke about Moosha or the nameless nobleman that gave him the job. He was willing to believe the prince’s version of events since the shopkeeper’s behavior from earlier fitted perfectly into a picture of an orphan who just wanted to keep a low profile.

It would take much more than one conversation to truly understand the prince’s way of thinking.

Imprisoning him was never a real option. Huong still remembered the trembling boy in the cell and his conscience wouldn’t survive giving him another trauma. But letting him be there unsupervised could endanger the country if one day the prince's loyalty would win over his basic need of survival. Huong already knew too well how the teenager acted when his back was against the wall.

In the moment of silence after the last question, the prince focused on toying with the stone chain connecting his wrist. He knew the fire prince enough to be sure that the boy was ready for the worst

Huong shattered the stone on Zuko’s wrist which made the boy flinch and look at him in panic. He took a deep breath before making another irresponsible decision that day. “We have some terms to discuss.”

Personally detaining a skilled firebender who was also the Blue Spirit...

What could go wrong?

 


 

Appa was gone because Toph couldn’t have saved her idiot friends, fight a bunch of crazy sandbenders, and see on the wobbly ground at the same time. Twinkle was devastated and he wasn’t acting like himself, no attempts of Sugar Queen to make him feel better worked.

Toph would like her friend with an exceptional talent for tracking furry animals and anything connected to the Avatar was here.

Sparky would know how to find Appa.

 

 

 

Notes:

The last section is kind of a teaser of what might happen in the next part of the series 😏

Well, no adoption because I like to play with all the grayness and war vibes but a house arrest is good enough right? Not a literal prison should satisfy all on you

And here's my question would you be interested in more of this "detention" it seems interesting to me but I don't know 🤔 If there's something you would like to know about the time of those two tell me in the comments! I have some ideas of my own but never too much inspiration <3

Also, HEAR ME OUT! In two days I have the one-year anniversary of my first posted work here. That's the best comment begging I can come up with so I want my one year presents in the form of long beautiful comments 🖤
But aside from begging it's really just... woahhh... damn. A whole year 🙄🙄

I hope the final was satisfying. It took me a long time to figure out where to separate this and the future part. It's a little cliffhanger but not really? Huong isn't a bad dude but who know what the "detention" is and how Zuko gonna react.
Tell me what you think!!!

And since it's the end I would like to speak to all sneaky people reading without commenting: IT'S YOUR TIME. You have no idea how delightful it had been to see a huge response after the ending of Rock Bottom.
I'm nice to my readers, I'm only mean to Zuko, so no need to fear me :))

* I need a little break to figure out some crucial parts of the next part so one week schedule is on hold for now. It's pretty possible I will relax by writing Xaalo's side story :))

Please let me rant with you about this whole part, series, or whatever you want really XD
I can't wait to see your opinion on both stars of this chapter!!!!

🖤🖤🖤 thank you for hanging out with me for another book
you are the best xoxox

Chapter 22: ANNOUNCEMENT :)

Summary:

Part 3.5 is out there.
Yup 3.5 because it was supposed to be an one shot but the plans changed.
Huong and Zuko. Prison aka House Arrest.

Chapter Text

Check it out! It’s in the main series so it’s easy to find form there!

Im doing these notifications because some people said it had helped in the past so here you go again!

let me know if you find the new part from there!

 

 

Chapter 23: ANNOUNCEMENT v2 (it's been a long time, eh?)

Summary:

Ok, so long story short the "one-shot" with the colonel grew to a huge big ass story and it wasn't at all planned the last time I was messing with this one.

So, if any of you people who are still subscribed to this story didn't care that much about Zuko and my colonel OC it's a late Christmas for you!!

I've started a brand new part that involves the gaang and actually has something to do with the gaang sneak peek I left at the end of this story.

If you are interested, go and check it out in the series button

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Ok, so this "chapter" might be a little unnecessary but I'm just doing something that I know I would appreciate as a reader who thought something like: "omg... author! I don't want this zuko/huong dynamics anymore! I was super interested in the gaang joining the party and you ruined it!!!"

Of course, I'm exaggerating (or not?) but I hope you get my point. 

So if you are one of those readers, seriously, let me know lol. I won't be mad or anything and that would be cool that my big brain time of advertising it that way was worth something.

If not and you are just following the story and this notification was confusing for you then just treat it as spam. Forget. And move on. And continue waiting for another actual update in 'Hard Time Trusting' 😆

Ok, I think I'm done mumbling. Bye! 

Notes:

lol, since I don't run any social media I use chapters to let you know something

no one can stop me. I'm the boss here

Series this work belongs to:

Works inspired by this one: